# SuperCool use cases, in full > SuperCool is an AI agent that makes finished work (videos, images, websites, decks, research and writing) from a plain-language request. Each section below is one free-to-try tool page at https://supercool.com/use/; the API docs in full are at https://supercool.com/docs/llms-full.txt. ## Product Video Ad Maker https://supercool.com/use/product-video-ad **Turn a product photo into a video ad.** Drop in a product photo and say what it is. Your AI agent picks the strongest angle and makes a short vertical video ad, with a caption and hooks to test. You have a product and no time to film it. This AI product video ad maker turns one product photo into a short vertical video ad. Drop in the photo, type what the product is, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes three ad angles with hooks, picks the strongest one and makes a 5-second clip for TikTok, Reels or Shorts. You also get a ready-to-post caption, hashtags and three alternate opening lines to test against each other. While Emma works, you can chat with her about who the product is for and where the ad will run, and she takes your answers into account. The finished ad plays right on the page, ready to download. ### Real results - Handmade lavender soy candle: A frame from the 5-second clip of the candle, lit, with three ad angles and a caption (https://supercool.com/use-examples/product-video-ad/1.webp) - Insulated steel water bottle, matte black: A frame from the 5-second vertical push-in, with three ad angles and a caption (https://supercool.com/use-examples/product-video-ad/2.webp) ### How it works 1. **Show Emma the product.** Drop your product photo into the frame, or tap to choose one. Type what it is on the line underneath, like a caption. A photo gives the best result, but a name alone works too. 2. **Press Make my ad.** Emma starts right away. She writes three ad angles, each with an opening hook and a sentence on why it should work. 3. **Chat while she films.** Tell her who buys it and where the ad will run. She picks the strongest angle and makes a 5-second vertical clip from your photo. 4. **Download and post.** The video plays on the page with a download button. Copy the caption and hashtags, and keep the alternate hooks for your next test. ### What you get - 3 ad angles with hooks - A short vertical video ad - A ready-to-post caption - Alternate hooks to test ### Who it's for - **Online shop owners.** Get a video ad for a new listing without booking a shoot or learning an editing app. - **Handmade sellers.** Turn a photo of a candle, a print or a piece of jewelry into a short clip for Reels. - **Direct-to-consumer brands.** Try several hooks on one product before putting real budget behind any of them. - **Social media managers.** Fill a content calendar with quick product clips and captions for clients. - **Small retailers.** Show off a new arrival or a seasonal item the same day it lands in the shop. ### Ideas to try - Insulated steel water bottle that keeps ice all day, matte black - Handmade lavender soy candle in a reusable amber jar - Wireless earbuds with a pocket-size charging case - Grain-free salmon dog treats, baked in small batches - Linen apron with a leather neck strap for home cooks - Refillable glass spray bottle for plant-based kitchen cleaner - Glow-in-the-dark star projector night light for kids' rooms ### On your own or with Emma - **Angles and hooks.** On your own: Brainstorm hooks alone and guess which one will land. With Emma: Three angles with hooks and a reason for each, plus three alternate hooks to test. - **Filming.** On your own: Set up lights, a phone rig and props, then shoot and reshoot. With Emma: A 5-second vertical clip made from the product photo you already have. - **Caption.** On your own: Write the caption and hashtags after the video, often in a rush. With Emma: A caption and hashtags written with the ad, ready to copy. - **Tools.** On your own: Move between a notes app, a video editor and a caption tool. With Emma: One page: you type, chat with Emma, and download the result. ### Tips - Use a clear, well-lit photo with the product filling most of the frame and a plain background behind it. - Say what makes it different in the product line, for example 'keeps ice all day' rather than just 'water bottle'. - Tell Emma who buys it and where it will run while she works, so the angles fit your audience. - Post the same clip with different hooks from the list and keep the one that performs best. - Once the first ad lands, ask Emma for more variations on the other angles. ### Try it free The free try writes the three ad angles, the caption and the alternate hooks, and makes the 5-second vertical clip from your photo. An account with credits keeps your ad and lets you ask Emma for longer versions and more variations. ### Questions **How long is the video?** The first one is a short clip. Ask your agent for longer versions or more variations after. **Can I use it in paid ads?** Yes. The files you download are yours to use. **Is it free?** Yes, you can try it free. Create an account to keep your ad. **What shape is the video ad?** It's vertical, the shape TikTok, Reels and Shorts use. The clip is 5 seconds long, built for the first moments of a scroll. **Do I need a product photo?** This AI product video ad maker works best with one, since the clip is made from your photo. If you don't have a photo, type what the product is and Emma works from the description. **Does the ad have a voiceover?** No, the page doesn't record a voiceover. You get the clip plus a written caption and hooks, and you can add a sound or music track in the app you post from. **What are ad angles and hooks?** An angle is the reason someone would buy, such as saving time or a gift idea. A hook is the opening line that stops the scroll. Emma writes three angles with hooks and makes the video on the strongest one. **Will the product look exactly like my photo?** The clip starts from your photo, so it stays close, but AI video can change small details like the text on a label. Watch it before you post. **Where can I post the ad?** Anywhere vertical video fits: TikTok, Reels, Shorts and stories. You can use what Emma makes for your own projects; check each platform's ad rules before you run it. **Can I make ads for more than one product?** Yes. Come back with another product photo, or ask Emma in the chat to make a product video ad for the next item on your list. --- ## Airbnb Listing Video https://supercool.com/use/airbnb-listing-video **Turn your listing into a walkthrough video.** Paste your listing link or upload photos and pick the vibe: luxury, cozy or adventure. Your AI agent polishes your best photos and cuts a 30-second walkthrough guests can't scroll past. Most listings are a scroll of still photos. This AI Airbnb listing video tool turns yours into a 30-second walkthrough tour. Paste your listing link or add your own photos, pick a vibe, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, polishes your best photos and cuts a wide video that moves through your place room by room, with music to match. Emma also rewrites your listing description and pulls out the highlights guests care about, using only what your photos and listing actually show. The photo edits are for light, color, sharpness and straight lines, never for adding or removing anything, so the place guests see is the place they book. You chat with her while she works. ### How it works 1. **Paste your listing link.** Type or paste the link on the key card: Airbnb, Vrbo, Booking or your own site. No link, or the site won't load? Drop in up to four of your own photos instead. 2. **Pick the vibe.** Luxury for slow, polished golden-hour moves. Cozy for warm light and soft textures. Adventure for the views and the outdoors. Then press Check in. 3. **Tell Emma about the place.** While she enhances the photos and films the shots, she may ask what guests love most and what's nearby. Your answers go into the description and highlights. 4. **Download your tour.** The walkthrough video plays on the page with a download button, next to your enhanced hero photos, the new description and the highlights. ### What you get - A 30-second walkthrough video - Up to 5 enhanced hero photos - A rewritten listing description - Highlights guests care about ### Who it's for - **Airbnb and Vrbo hosts.** A walkthrough video for your listing and your social posts, made from the photos you already have. - **Property managers.** A consistent tour and refreshed description for each unit without booking a videographer for every one. - **Boutique stays and cabins.** An adventure or cozy cut that shows off the setting as much as the rooms. - **New hosts.** Better hero photos and a clearer description before your first guests arrive. - **Direct-booking sites.** A short tour for the homepage of your own rental site, from the photos already on it. ### Ideas to try - My Airbnb link for a two-bedroom lake cabin, cozy vibe - My Vrbo beach condo link, luxury vibe - Four photos of my mountain A-frame: deck, living room, loft and the view, adventure vibe - The listing page on my own website for a downtown loft, luxury vibe - My Booking page for a farm stay with a hot tub, cozy vibe - Photos of a desert tiny house at sunset, adventure vibe - A studio apartment near the old town, cozy vibe ### On your own or with Emma - **Filming.** On your own: Booking a videographer or shooting on your phone and hoping the light cooperates. With Emma: Emma makes slow walkthrough camera moves from the listing photos you already have. - **Photo touch-ups.** On your own: Editing each photo in an app, and risking edits that make the place look different. With Emma: Five hero photos enhanced for light, color, sharpness and straight lines only. - **Editing the tour.** On your own: Ordering shots, adding transitions and finding music in a separate editor. With Emma: Shots and photo holds cut together in a sensible room order, with a music bed in your vibe. - **Listing copy.** On your own: Rewriting the description yourself and guessing what guests want to read. With Emma: A rewritten description and short highlights based on what the listing really shows. ### Tips - Use a link whose photos show each room clearly. The tour can only show what the photos show. - If your listing site won't load for Emma, upload your four strongest photos: a wide living space, the bedroom, the kitchen and the view. - Pick the vibe that matches the guests you want, as well as the decor. Adventure suits a place people book for the outdoors. - Tell Emma what's nearby and what guests rave about in reviews, so the highlights say it. - Watch the video against your real place before you post. AI video can still shift small details. ### Try it free The free try enhances three of your hero photos and films one 5-second walkthrough shot. The full 30-second tour with music, up to five enhanced photos and the rewritten description come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial enhances three of your hero photos and films one 5-second walkthrough shot. The full 30-second tour, up to five enhanced photos and the rewritten description come with an account and credits. **Will it change how my place looks?** It shouldn't. Your agent enhances photos for light, color and sharpness only and is told never to add or remove anything, and the video adds slow camera moves to your own photos. AI video can still change small details, so compare it with your place before you post. **Does it work with any listing site?** It reads public listing pages like Airbnb, Vrbo and Booking. Some sites block automated visits; if yours does, upload your photos instead. **How long is the Airbnb walkthrough video?** About 30 seconds, in wide 16:9. It mixes three 5-second moving shots with photo holds, cut together with an instrumental music bed. **Can I upload the video to my Airbnb listing?** You can download your Airbnb listing video and use it wherever you share your place. Check each platform's rules for listing media before you upload. **Does it add furniture, people or amenities?** No. Emma is told not to add or remove anything, and the description sticks to what your photos and listing show. Still, compare the video and photos with your place before you post. **Can I use my own photos instead of a link?** Yes. Drop up to four photos onto the page. Emma works from those as they are. **Will it write a new listing description?** Yes, in the full version. Emma rewrites the description and lists four to six highlights, without inventing amenities. **Is the video vertical for Reels or TikTok?** This page makes a wide 16:9 tour. Ask Emma in the chat if you'd like a different version. --- ## Event Promo Video https://supercool.com/use/event-promo-video **Turn your event into a promo that sells tickets.** Describe your event or paste its Eventbrite link, say who it's for and pick the energy. Your AI agent designs a poster and cuts a short vertical promo video, with captions to post. People scroll past text posts about events. A short video with the right energy stops them. This AI event promo video maker turns your event details into a poster and a 15-second vertical promo. Write the event on the ticket, or paste its Eventbrite link, say who's coming and pick the energy. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, does the rest. The poster carries your event name, date and venue, spelled exactly. The promo is three 5-second shots of a crowd in your energy, with a music bed, your event name at the start and the date, venue and a call to action at the end. You also get captions for Instagram, TikTok and Facebook with hashtags, ready to post. ### How it works 1. **Write your event on the ticket.** Type the event name, date, time and venue, or paste a public event link and Emma reads the details from it. 2. **Fill the Admit line and pick the energy.** Say who the crowd is, then choose Hype, Elegant, Chill, Family fun, Underground or Inspiring. Tear the ticket to start. 3. **Tell Emma about tickets.** While she designs and films, she asks where tickets are sold and the price, so the captions can point people there. 4. **Download and post.** The poster, the 15-second promo and the captions land on the page, with download buttons for the video and poster. ### What you get - A 15-second vertical promo video - An event poster - Your date and venue on screen - Social captions and hashtags ### Who it's for - **Venues and bars.** Owners promoting a weekly night, a live act or a special party without a video editor. - **Event organizers.** People running fairs, meetups and festivals who need fresh social content for each date. - **DJs and promoters.** Anyone selling tickets to a club night who needs a vertical clip for stories and reels. - **Community groups.** Churches, schools and clubs announcing a fundraiser, fair or family day. - **Founders and hosts.** People running breakfasts, workshops and networking events who want a polished invite. ### Ideas to try - Rooftop Salsa Night, Sat Aug 9, 8pm, The Vue, Miami. Admit: young professionals. Hype - Founders Breakfast, Oct 3, 7:30am, WeWork Austin. Admit: local founders. Inspiring - Fall Craft Fair, Nov 1-2, Main St Park. Admit: families with little kids. Family fun - Basement techno night, Fri Dec 5, 11pm, Warehouse 9, Detroit. Admit: electronic music fans. Underground - Spring Gala for the children's hospital, Apr 18, 7pm, Grand Ballroom, Hotel Marlowe. Admit: donors and local business owners. Elegant - Sunday acoustic sessions, every Sunday 4pm, Driftwood Cafe, Santa Cruz. Admit: indie music fans. Chill - A public event link to my Eventbrite page. Admit: photography hobbyists. Inspiring ### On your own or with Emma - **Footage.** On your own: Dig through old phone clips, or film something new before the event. With Emma: Three AI-generated shots of a crowd in your chosen energy. - **Editing.** On your own: Cut clips, add music and title cards in an editing app. With Emma: Shots, music bed and on-screen event name, date, venue and call to action, put together for you. - **Poster.** On your own: A separate design job in another app. With Emma: A matching poster with the name, date and venue. - **Captions.** On your own: Write a different post for each platform. With Emma: Captions for Instagram, TikTok and Facebook, with hashtags. ### Tips - Include the date, time and venue in your event details. Emma never invents them, so anything missing stays off the poster and video. - Be specific on the Admit line. Families with little kids and young professionals call for very different shots. - Tell Emma where tickets are sold and the price when she asks. It sharpens the call to action and captions. - Check the spelling of the event name and venue on the poster before you share it. - Pick the energy for how the night feels, not just the genre. A jazz brunch can be Chill or Elegant. ### Try it free The free try designs your event poster and films one 5-second promo shot, with a caption. The full 15-second promo with music, your date and venue on screen, and captions for each platform comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial designs your event poster and films one 5-second promo shot. The full 15-second promo with music, your date and venue on screen, and the captions comes with an account and credits. **Can it read my Eventbrite page?** Yes, paste a public event link and your agent reads the name, date and venue from it. Double-check the details on the poster before you share it. **Are the people in the video real?** No. The crowd shots are AI-generated to show the mood, not footage of your past events. **How do I make a promo video for my event?** Write your event details or paste its link, say who the crowd is and pick an energy. Emma designs a poster and makes a 15-second vertical promo with music and your event details on screen. **What size is the event promo video?** Vertical 9:16, made for Instagram Reels and Stories, TikTok and Facebook. The poster is a 3:4 portrait image. **Does the video have music?** Yes. The full promo has an instrumental music bed in the energy you pick. **Can I use footage from my past events?** Not on this page. The shots are AI-generated to show the mood. Ask Emma in the chat if you want to work with your own clips. **What does the video say on screen?** Your event name at the start, then the date, venue and a call to action at the end. Emma only uses details you give her or that are on your event link. **Can I change the energy after it's made?** Yes. Ask Emma in the chat for another version in a different energy, or for changes to the captions. --- ## Explainer Video From Screenshots https://supercool.com/use/explainer-video-from-screenshots **Turn product screenshots into a 30-second explainer.** Drop in your product screenshots and say what it does and who it's for. Your AI agent writes the script and cuts a narrated explainer that zooms through your real UI. You already have the best footage of your product: its screens. This explainer video maker turns up to four screenshots into a 30-second narrated explainer. Drop them in, say what the product helps people do and who's watching, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes the script and cuts the video through your real interface with smooth zooms and pans. The script is tight, about 75 words: a hook, the problem, two or three beats that each show one of your screens, and a closing line with a call to action. A narrator voice is cast for your audience and laid over a light music bed. Nothing is redrawn or generated, so what viewers see is what your product looks like, in a widescreen video ready for your site or a launch post. ### How it works 1. **Drop your screenshots on stage.** Add one to four product screenshots in the order you want them shown. Each gets a number so you can check the sequence. 2. **Say what it does and for whom.** Finish the line It helps people with what your product does, then pick who's watching (Small businesses, Developers, Shoppers, Teams, Creators, Parents) or type your own audience. Press Launch my explainer. 3. **Chat while Emma cuts it.** Tell Emma your product's name and what viewers should do next, such as visit a link, sign up or book a demo. 4. **Watch and download.** The video plays on the page with the script beside it. Download the video, copy the script, or ask for captions or an end card. ### What you get - A 30-second narrated explainer of your product - Your real screens, with smooth zooms and pans - A tight script: hook, problem, how it works, call to action - Music and a voice cast for your audience ### Who it's for - **Startup founders.** A short product explainer for a landing page, a launch post or an investor update, made from screens you already have. - **Indie app makers.** Show how your app works in 30 seconds without learning video editing. - **Product marketers.** Turn a new feature's screenshots into a narrated walkthrough for a release announcement. - **Small software businesses.** Give prospects a quick look at the product on your pricing or demo page. - **Sales and customer success teams.** A short clip to drop into an email that explains the product better than a paragraph. ### Ideas to try - Three screenshots of our booking app: it helps people book appointments without the back-and-forth, for small businesses - Four screens of an invoicing tool: it helps people track every invoice and get paid faster, for freelance designers - Two screenshots of a meal planner: it helps people plan family meals in two minutes, for parents - The dashboard, settings and alert screens of an uptime monitor: it helps people know their site is down before customers do, for developers - Three screens of a shared shopping list app: it helps people stop buying the same thing twice, for roommates - A team inbox's main view and assignment screen: it helps people answer every customer email once, for teams ### On your own or with Emma - **Script.** On your own: Write and rewrite a voiceover until it fits half a minute. With Emma: A 30-second script built as hook, problem, screen beats and a call to action. - **Voice and music.** On your own: Record yourself or hire a voice actor, then find a track that fits. With Emma: A narrator cast for your audience over a light music bed. - **Editing.** On your own: Learn an editor to time zooms and pans to the narration. With Emma: Your screenshots timed to the script with zooms, pans and dissolves. - **Accuracy.** On your own: Mockups and stock footage can drift from the real product. With Emma: Only your real screens, and a script that sticks to what they show and what you said. ### Tips - Use clean, full-resolution screenshots without personal data or test content on screen. - Put your screenshots in story order: the problem or starting point first, the result last. - Choose screens that each show one clear thing. A cluttered screen is hard to follow in a few seconds. - Be specific in It helps people. A concrete job gives the script a sharper hook. - Give Emma your exact call to action, like a short web address, so the closing line points somewhere real. ### Try it free The free try writes the full script and narrates its opening over a 10-second zoom through your first screenshot. The full 30-second explainer through all your screens, with music, comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial writes the full script and narrates its opening over a 10-second zoom through your first screenshot. The full 30-second explainer through all your screens comes with an account and credits. **Does it redraw my product?** No. The video uses your actual screenshots, so what people see is what your product looks like. The script only describes what your screenshots show and what you tell it. **Can I add captions or an end card?** Yes. Once it's ready, ask Emma for captions or a call-to-action end card and she'll add them to the same video. **How do I make an explainer video from screenshots?** Upload one to four screenshots in order, say what the product does and who it's for, and press Launch my explainer. Emma writes the script, narrates it and cuts the video through your screens. **How many screenshots should I use?** Up to four. Three or four usually works well for a 30-second video, since each main beat shows one screen. One screen can repeat across two beats if you have fewer. **What shape is the video?** Widescreen 16:9, which suits websites, presentations and most video players. **Can I pick the voice?** Emma casts a friendly, clear narrator for the audience you choose. If you want a different feel, say so in the chat. **Will it add features my product doesn't have?** No. The script only describes what your screenshots show and what you told Emma, with no invented features, numbers or claims. **Can this explainer video maker make a longer video?** This page makes a 30-second explainer. Ask Emma in the chat afterwards about captions, an end card or other changes. --- ## Podcast Clip Maker https://supercool.com/use/podcast-clip-maker **Turn your podcast into captioned vertical clips.** Paste an episode link and the guest's name. Your AI agent listens for the best moments and cuts them into vertical clips with captions, ready to post. Your best podcast moments are buried in an hour of conversation, and short-form feeds want them vertical, captioned and under a minute. This podcast clip maker does the digging. Paste an episode link, add the guest's name and pick a clip length, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, transcribes the episode, finds the strongest moments and cuts them into vertical clips. You get three 9:16 clips, each a self-contained moment with a clear opening line and a payoff, with big captions burned in so they work on mute. Each comes with a hooky title, the line that makes it and its timestamps in the episode. You also get three episode title ideas and short show notes. Nothing is generated: every clip is your recording, framed vertically. ### How it works 1. **Paste the episode link.** Drop a YouTube or Vimeo link, or a direct link to an audio or video file, into Input 1. 2. **Add the guest and clip length.** Write the guest's name on the card (optional), set the Clip length fader to 15, 30, 45 or 60 seconds, and press Cut my clips. 3. **Chat while Emma listens.** Emma downloads and transcribes the episode and picks the moments. Tell her who the show is for and where you'll post. 4. **Download and post.** Your clips land on the page with titles, quotes and timestamps. Download them and copy the titles and show notes. ### What you get - Three vertical clips cut from your episode - Captions burned in, so they work on mute - The best moments picked from the transcript - Episode title ideas and show notes ### Who it's for - **Independent podcasters.** Get clips for every episode without spending an evening scrubbing through the timeline. - **Video podcast hosts.** Turn a wide two-camera conversation into vertical clips that keep the speaker in frame. - **Audio-only shows.** Get captioned audiograms with your guest's name and a moving waveform, so audio still works in a video feed. - **Podcast producers and editors.** A fast first pass at clip picks, with timestamps you can check against the full episode. - **Coaches and speakers.** Cut your interview appearances or talks into short clips to share with your audience. ### Ideas to try - Our latest YouTube episode with guest Dana Whitfield, 30-second clips - A Vimeo link to my interview with chef Marco Ruiz, 45-second clips - A direct MP3 link to this week's audio-only episode, guest Priya Shah, 15-second clips - My panel talk recording on YouTube, no guest name, 60-second clips - Our solo episode about pricing for freelancers, 30-second clips - A YouTube link to a church leadership podcast episode with Pastor James Cole, 45-second clips ### On your own or with Emma - **Finding moments.** On your own: Listen back to the whole episode and note timestamps. With Emma: Emma transcribes the episode and picks the three strongest self-contained moments. - **Vertical framing.** On your own: Crop each clip by hand and fix it when people fall out of frame. With Emma: A center crop on the speaker, or the full frame over a blurred fill when a crop would cut people out. - **Captions.** On your own: Type or correct captions and time them word by word. With Emma: Big, bold captions burned in from the transcript, a few words at a time. - **Titles and notes.** On your own: Write episode titles and show notes after the editing is done. With Emma: Three episode title ideas and short show notes alongside the clips. ### Tips - Pick a clip length that fits where you'll post. Shorter clips suit fast feeds, longer ones suit a story with a setup. - Add the guest's name. It appears on audiogram clips and helps Emma write better titles. - Put your strongest conversation early. Emma looks for moments in the first 30 minutes of the episode. - Check each clip's timestamps against your full episode if you want to adjust where it starts. - Only use episodes you have the rights to post. ### Try it free The free try cuts one captioned vertical clip from the first 10 minutes of your episode. All three clips, the episode title ideas and the show notes come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version cuts one captioned clip from the first part of your episode. All three clips, titles and show notes come with an account and credits. **What links work?** Public YouTube or Vimeo links and direct links to an audio or video file. Private, paywalled or DRM-protected episodes can't be downloaded. Your agent looks for moments in the first 30 minutes of the episode (the first 10 in the free version). Only use episodes you have the rights to. **Does it make anything up?** No. Every clip is cut from your episode as it was recorded; your agent only picks the moments, frames them vertically and adds captions. An audio-only episode gets a simple captioned audiogram. **What does a podcast clip maker do?** It turns a long episode into short vertical clips for TikTok, Reels and Shorts. This one transcribes your episode, picks the strongest moments, frames them 9:16 and burns in captions. **How long are the clips?** You pick about 15, 30, 45 or 60 seconds. Emma looks for self-contained moments close to that length. **Can it handle a two-person video podcast?** Yes. If a center crop would cut people out, the clip shows the full frame over a blurred fill instead. **Do I get timestamps?** Yes. Each clip shows its start and end time in the episode, plus the quote that makes it. **Can I edit the captions?** The captions are burned into the video. If a word is wrong, ask Emma in the chat about re-cutting that clip. **Does this podcast clip maker work with long episodes?** It works with long episodes, but it only looks for moments in the first 30 minutes. A moment after that won't be picked on this page. --- ## Restaurant Food Teaser https://supercool.com/use/restaurant-food-teaser **Turn your dish photos into a mouth-watering teaser.** Upload a few photos of your dishes and say what's new: an opening, a special, a new menu. Your AI agent makes a cinematic hero shot and a short vertical teaser with your name on it. Your food looks great in person. Getting that onto Reels and TikTok usually means a videographer or an evening lost in an editing app. Upload a few photos of your dishes, type your restaurant's name and what's new, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, makes a cinematic hero shot and a 10-second vertical food teaser video. She relights your best dish photo with warm, moody light and steam, then films two slow shots of your food, adds a short instrumental music bed that suits your place, and ends on a card with your name and offer. You also get captions for Instagram and TikTok with hashtags. She works from your photos, so the food stays close to what you serve. ### How it works 1. **Plate your photos.** Add 1 to 4 dish photos to the plates on the pass. 2. **Fill in the ticket.** Type your restaurant's name under Restaurant. Under 'What's new', add an opening, a special or a new menu if you have one. 3. **Press Fire the teaser.** Emma starts with the hero shot. While she works, tell her about the vibe of the place and your address or booking link. 4. **Download and post.** The hero still and the teaser land on the page, ready to download, with captions and hashtags to copy. ### What you get - A cinematic hero shot of your dish - A 10-second vertical teaser - Your name and offer on screen - Captions and hashtags to post ### Who it's for - **New restaurants.** A grand opening teaser with the date on the end card. - **Cafes and bakeries.** A new seasonal menu or a brunch launch, shown off with steam and slow push-ins. - **Food trucks and pop-ups.** A quick teaser before an event, with where to find you in the caption. - **Bars and taquerias.** Weekly deals like half-price tacos every Tuesday, in a format people stop scrolling for. - **Agencies and social managers.** Short videos for restaurant clients made from the photos they already have. - **Caterers.** A short, mouth-watering clip of signature dishes to share with couples and event planners. ### Ideas to try - Casa Lupita, half-price tacos every Tuesday, with photos of our birria tacos and street corn - The Copper Pot, new fall menu is here, with three dish photos - Nonna's Kitchen, grand opening Friday 6pm, with our lasagna and tiramisu - Kumo Ramen, brunch now on Sundays, with a photo of our tonkotsu bowl - Smoke & Oak BBQ, brisket sandwich special this weekend - Little Fig Bakery, with photos of our croissants and pistachio cake, no offer - Green Bowl, new vegan menu, with photos of two grain bowls ### On your own or with Emma - **Filming.** On your own: Book a videographer or film plates under kitchen lights. With Emma: Cinematic shots made from the dish photos you already have. - **Editing.** On your own: Cut clips, find music and add text in an editing app. With Emma: Two shots, a music bed and an end card put together for you. - **Captions.** On your own: Write captions and hashtags last, in a hurry. With Emma: Captions for Instagram and TikTok with hashtags, ready to copy. - **Format.** On your own: Re-crop a wide video for phones later. With Emma: Vertical from the start, made for Reels and TikTok. ### Tips - Use bright, sharp photos with the dish filling the frame, shot from above or at a low angle. - Add more than one dish so the second shot can show something different. - Keep 'What's new' short enough for an end card, like 'Grand opening Friday 6pm'. - Tell Emma the vibe of the place, cozy, lively or upscale, so the music fits. - Send her your address or booking link so the captions tell people where to go. ### Try it free The free try makes a cinematic hero still of your dish and one 5-second teaser shot, with a caption. The full 10-second teaser with music, your name and offer on screen, and captions for each platform comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial makes a hero still of your dish and one 5-second teaser shot. The full 10-second teaser with music, your name and offer on screen, and captions comes with an account and credits. **Will the food look like my real dishes?** It starts from your photos, so it stays close to them, but AI video can change small details. Check it before posting so it shows what guests will actually get. **Can I use it in ads?** Yes. The files you download are yours to use. **How long is the food teaser?** 10 seconds, made from two 5-second shots, in vertical 9:16 for Reels and TikTok. **How many dish photos should I upload?** One to four. With two or more, Emma can show a different dish in each shot. **Does the teaser have music?** Yes. A short instrumental music bed that matches your restaurant's vibe plays under the shots. **Will there be text on the video?** Your restaurant's name and offer appear on an end card. The food shots themselves stay clean. **Do I need professional food photos?** No. This AI restaurant food teaser works from clear phone photos. Emma relights your best one as a cinematic hero shot, keeping the dish as it is. **Will people appear in the video?** No. The shots stay on the food, with no faces. **Can I make a teaser for a grand opening?** Yes. Type the date and time under 'What's new', like 'Grand opening Friday 6pm', and it appears on the end card with your restaurant's name. --- ## Slides to Video Presenter https://supercool.com/use/slides-to-video-presenter **Turn your slide deck into a narrated video.** Upload your deck, choose a presenter's voice and how long it should run. Your AI agent writes the talk from your slides, narrates each one and cuts a captioned video. A slide deck rarely explains itself when you're not there to present it. Upload your deck as a PDF, choose a presenter's voice and how long it should run, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes the talk from what's on your slides, narrates each slide in that voice and cuts it all into one captioned video. It's a simple way to turn slides into a narrated video. Each slide stays on screen while its part is narrated, with captions burned in so it works with the sound off. The talk sticks to what's on your slides, with no facts or numbers added. Decks up to 20 slides are narrated in full, and the script appears slide by slide on the page alongside the video. ### How it works 1. **Put your deck on the big screen.** Drop your deck as a PDF up to 10 MB, or tap to choose it. From PowerPoint, Keynote or Google Slides, export a PDF first. 2. **Pick the presenter and the length.** Under Who presents it?, choose Warm & friendly, Confident, Calm British or Upbeat. Under How long should it run?, pick about 1, 3 or 5 minutes. 3. **Press Raise the curtain.** Emma writes the talk and narrates each slide. Tell her in the chat who the audience is and anything the slides leave out that the talk should say. 4. **Watch and share.** The video plays on the big screen with a Download video button, and the talk is shown slide by slide underneath. ### What you get - One narrated video of your whole deck - A talk written from what's on your slides - Captions burned in, ready to share - The script, slide by slide ### Who it's for - **Founders and sales teams.** Send a narrated pitch deck that investors or buyers can watch on their own time. - **Teachers and trainers.** Turn lecture slides into a captioned video lesson. - **Remote teams.** Share a project update or quarterly review as a video instead of another meeting. - **Conference speakers.** Make a recorded version of your talk for people who missed it. - **HR and onboarding.** Turn a policy or onboarding deck into a video new hires can watch in their first week. ### Ideas to try - My Q3 sales review deck, Confident, about 3 minutes - A 12-slide onboarding deck for new hires, Warm & friendly, about 5 minutes - Seed pitch deck for our meal-planning app, Confident, about 3 minutes - A biology lecture on cell division, Calm British, about 5 minutes - Product launch overview for the sales team, Upbeat, about 1 minute - Annual report highlights for our nonprofit's donors, Warm & friendly, about 3 minutes ### On your own or with Emma - **The script.** On your own: Write what to say for every slide. With Emma: Writes the talk from what's on your slides, sized to the length you chose. - **Recording.** On your own: Record yourself, stumble over a line and start again. With Emma: Narrates each slide in the presenter voice you picked. - **Editing.** On your own: Sync audio to slides in a video editor and type captions by hand. With Emma: Times each slide to its narration and burns in captions. - **Sharing.** On your own: Send the deck and hope people click through it. With Emma: One video anyone can watch, with the script alongside. ### Tips - Slides with clear headings and a few key points give Emma the most to work with. - Put context that isn't on the slides in the chat, since the talk sticks to what the deck says. - Match the length to the deck: about 1 minute suits a handful of slides, 5 minutes a fuller deck. - Tell Emma who the audience is so the tone fits: investors, students or your own team. - If your deck is over 10 MB, export a smaller PDF, for example with compressed images. ### Try it free The free try narrates your first 3 slides into a short captioned video. The whole deck, up to 20 slides, comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial narrates your first 3 slides into a short captioned video. The whole deck, up to 20 slides, comes with an account and credits. **Can I upload PowerPoint or Keynote files?** Upload your deck as a PDF. PowerPoint, Keynote and Google Slides can all export one from the File menu. Animations and embedded videos don't carry over; each slide shows as it looks in the PDF. **Will it make things up about my slides?** The talk is written from what's on your slides and kept to it. Check the script before you share the video, especially any numbers or names, and ask Emma to change anything. **How do I turn slides into a narrated video?** Upload the deck as a PDF, choose a voice and a length, and press Raise the curtain. Emma writes the talk, narrates each slide and renders one captioned video. **Can I use my own voice instead of the AI voiceover?** Not on this page. You choose from four presenter voices: Warm & friendly, Confident, Calm British and Upbeat. **What language is the narration in?** English. The talk is written as plain spoken English from what's on your slides. **What if my deck has more than 20 slides?** It's narrated up to slide 20, and the result notes that the rest were left out. Split a longer deck into two PDFs if you need all of it. **What does the video look like?** A 1920x1080 widescreen video of your slides as they appear in the PDF, with the narration and burned-in captions. **Does it put an avatar or presenter on screen?** No. Your slides are the picture, with the narration and captions over them. **Can I get the script?** Yes. The talk appears on the page slide by slide, and Emma can offer it as a PDF after the video lands. --- ## Talking Head With Your Voice https://supercool.com/use/talking-head-with-your-voice **Turn one photo and your voice into a talking-head video.** Add a photo of yourself, record a short voice sample and paste your script. Your AI agent makes a lip-synced video of you saying it, in your own voice, with captions. Make an AI talking head video in your own voice from a single photo. Add a clear photo of yourself, record about 30 seconds of your voice and paste your script. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, clones your voice from the sample and makes a lip-synced video of you saying the script word for word, with captions burned in. Choose landscape or vertical before you start. Scripts run up to about 45 seconds, and a longer one is cut at the end of a sentence. Emma never swaps in a stock voice or a stock face: if your photo or recording doesn't work, she tells you. Use your own face and voice, or those of someone who said yes. ### How it works 1. **Put your photo on the monitor.** Add a clear, well-lit photo of yourself facing the camera, then pick Landscape or Vertical. 2. **Write your script in the prompter.** Paste or type what you want to say. The prompter counts your words and shows the length, up to 45 seconds. 3. **Record your voice.** Tap record and read your script aloud as the prompter scrolls, for about 30 seconds somewhere quiet. Or upload a recording you already have. 4. **Roll camera.** Press Roll camera and tell Emma where you'll post while she works. The finished video plays on a studio monitor, ready to download. ### What you get - A lip-synced video of you saying your script - Your own voice, cloned from a short sample - Burned-in captions, ready to post - Landscape or vertical, your pick ### Who it's for - **Small business owners.** Post a short welcome, offer or product tip in your own voice without setting up a camera. - **Coaches and course creators.** Make intro clips and lesson teasers that sound like you. - **Real estate agents.** Share a quick market update or a listing intro as a vertical video. - **Team leads and HR.** Send new hires a personal welcome, like what their first week looks like. - **Creators who dislike filming.** Keep posting talking-head videos on days you can't get in front of a camera. ### Ideas to try - Vertical: Hi, I'm Dana. In the next thirty seconds I'll show you the one habit that doubled our sales. - Landscape: Welcome to the team. Here's what your first week looks like, from Monday's tour to Friday's lunch. - Vertical: Three things every first-time home buyer should know before making an offer. - Landscape: a 40-second note to my piano students about this month's recital and what to wear. - Landscape: a thank-you to our newsletter readers for our bakery's fifth birthday. - Vertical: what to bring to my Saturday morning yoga class, and where to park. ### On your own or with Emma - **Filming.** On your own: Lights, a camera, a quiet room and take after take. With Emma: One photo and a short voice sample. - **Voice.** On your own: Re-recording every time the script changes. With Emma: Your voice cloned from the sample, saying the script word for word. - **Captions.** On your own: Typing and timing captions in an editor. With Emma: Captions burned in, ready to post. - **Format.** On your own: Reframing a landscape shoot for vertical, or filming twice. With Emma: Landscape or vertical, your pick, with the other format on request afterward. ### Tips - Use a front-facing photo with even light and nothing covering your face. - Record close to the mic in your normal speaking voice, with no music or chatter in the background. - Write the way you talk. Short sentences and contractions sound more natural. - Keep the script under 45 seconds. The word counter turns pink when you're over. - Use Rehearse to scroll the prompter at speaking pace before you record. ### Try it free The free try makes about 10 seconds of you saying the opening of your script, in your voice, with the words shown on the page. The full video, up to about 45 seconds with captions burned in, comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial makes about 10 seconds of you saying the opening of your script, in your voice. The full video, up to 45 seconds with captions, comes with an account and credits. **What kind of photo and recording work best?** A clear, well-lit photo facing the camera, and about 30 seconds of you talking somewhere quiet. Reading your script aloud while you record works well; the page scrolls it for you like a teleprompter. **Can I use someone else's face or voice?** Only with their permission. Use your own photo and voice, or those of someone who has agreed to it. The video is AI-generated, so say so where the platform you post on asks you to. **How long can the talking head video be?** Up to about 45 seconds, roughly 110 words. A longer script is cut at the end of a sentence, and the page says so. **Will it change my script?** No. Emma uses your words as written and only fixes obvious typos. **How long does my voice sample need to be?** About 30 seconds. The page records up to 45 seconds and lets you stop any time after 20. You can also upload an MP3, WAV or M4A. **Can I make a vertical video for social media?** Yes. Pick Vertical for 9:16 or Landscape for 16:9 before you start. Afterward, Emma can offer the other format. **What if my voice clone doesn't sound right?** Emma never swaps in a stock voice. If the clone doesn't work from your sample, she tells you; a clearer recording in a quieter room is the usual fix. **Do I need a camera to make an AI talking head video?** No. You need one photo of yourself and a voice sample, which you can record on the page with your phone or computer microphone. --- ## UGC Ad Maker https://supercool.com/use/ugc-ad-maker **Turn a product photo into a UGC-style ad.** Drop in your product photo, say who buys it and pick an angle: problem/solution, unboxing or testimonial. Your AI agent writes a scroll-stopping hook and films a short creator-style ad. UGC-style ads look like a real person filmed them on a phone, which is why they sit so naturally in a feed. Getting one usually means finding a creator, shipping them the product and waiting. With this AI UGC ad maker, you drop in a product photo, say who your customer is and pick an angle. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes a scroll-stopping hook and a two-beat script, then films a 10-second vertical ad of an AI creator who fits your customer, holding your product and speaking the lines, with captions on screen. You also get ad copy, with primary text, a headline and a call to action, and two more angles to test. ### How it works 1. **Drop in your product photo.** Drop your product photo into the phone card, or tap to choose one. 2. **Say who it's for and pick an angle.** Type your customer under 'Made for', then pick Problem → solution, Unboxing or Testimonial. 3. **Press Film my ad.** Emma writes the hook and script, then films the creator with your product. Tell her where the ad will run and what the product costs. 4. **Download and test.** The 10-second ad plays in the feed on the page. Download it, copy the ad copy, and try the other angles next. ### What you get - A scroll-stopping hook - A shot-by-shot script - A 10-second vertical ad with captions - Ad copy and two more angles ### Who it's for - **Online brands.** Test new hooks and angles without shipping product to creators. - **Small businesses new to video ads.** A first creator-style ad for a product without hiring anyone. - **Media buyers.** Fresh variations for a campaign when the current ads start to tire. - **Online sellers.** A short, talking demo video for a product page or a social ad. - **Agencies.** Concept videos and scripts to show a client before a full creator shoot. ### Ideas to try - Busy moms who never have time for breakfast, Problem → solution, for our protein overnight oats - Runners training for their first marathon, Testimonial, for blister-proof socks - Gamers with sore wrists, Problem → solution, for an ergonomic mouse pad - New homeowners on a budget, Unboxing, for a smart plug starter kit - College students in tiny dorm rooms, Unboxing, for a folding desk lamp - Dog owners with heavy shedders, Problem → solution, for a deshedding brush - Skincare beginners in their twenties, Testimonial, for a fragrance-free moisturizer ### On your own or with Emma - **Casting.** On your own: Find a creator, agree on terms, ship the product and wait. With Emma: An AI creator who matches your customer, holding your product. - **Script.** On your own: Write the hook and lines yourself, then brief someone else. With Emma: A hook and a shot-by-shot script written for your angle. - **Editing.** On your own: Cut clips and add captions in an editing app. With Emma: Two clips put together with captions on screen. - **Testing.** On your own: Pay for a new shoot for every new angle. With Emma: Two more angles with hooks and outlines to try next. ### Tips - Use a clean product photo where the label and shape are easy to see, so the product looks right in the creator's hands. - Describe your customer specifically: 'runners training for their first marathon' beats 'athletes'. - Pick the angle that fits the product: Problem → solution for fixes, Unboxing for gifts and packaging, Testimonial for results. - Tell Emma the price and where the ad will run so the ad copy fits. - Run the other angles as separate ads and keep the hook that does best. ### Try it free The free try writes the hook and script, makes a still of your creator with the product, and films one 5-second clip of the creator saying the hook. The full 10-second captioned ad, the ad copy and the extra angles come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial writes the hook and script, makes a still of your creator with the product, and films one 5-second clip. The full 10-second captioned ad, ad copy and extra angles come with an account and credits. **Is the creator a real person?** No. The creator is AI-generated. Label the ad as AI-made where a platform asks, and don't present it as a real customer review. **Can I run it as a paid ad?** Yes. The files you download are yours to use. Check each platform's ad and AI-content rules before you run it. **How long is the UGC ad?** 10 seconds, in two 5-second beats, vertical 9:16 for feeds like TikTok and Reels. **Does the creator talk?** Yes. The creator speaks the script's lines in the video, and the lines appear as captions on screen. **What angles can I choose?** Problem → solution (the pain, then your product fixes it), Unboxing (first open, first reaction) or Testimonial (a happy customer talking to camera). **Will the product look like mine?** Your photo is the reference, so the product should look like it, but AI video can change small details like label text. Watch the whole ad before you run it. **What ad copy comes with it?** Primary text, a headline and a call to action written for your customer and angle, plus two other angles, each with a hook and a one-line outline. **Can I choose what the creator looks like?** The AI UGC ad maker casts a creator to match the customer you describe, so the way you describe your customer shapes who appears. **Do I need a photo of my product?** Yes. The page needs one, since the creator is shown holding or using your actual product. A clear shot on a plain background works best. --- ## 30-Day Content Calendar https://supercool.com/use/30-day-content-calendar **Plan a month of posts in one go.** Tell your AI agent what you post about, where, and what you want from it. It plans the next 30 days, with a hook, caption and format for every day. A 30-day content calendar means you stop asking what to post every morning. Tell Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, what you post about, where you post and what you want this month to do for you. She plans a full month of social posts. Each one has a hook, a caption, a format, a call to action and hashtags, and a few content pillars give the month a rhythm. The plan comes back as a wall of sticky notes you tap to read, plus a CSV for your spreadsheet or the scheduler you already use. With an account, Emma also designs the first three posts as images, sized for the feed or for reels and stories. You still do the posting. She does the planning and the writing. ### How it works 1. **Say what you post about.** Write your brand or niche on the first sticky note, like a coffee roaster in Austin or a yoga studio for beginners. One line is enough. 2. **Tap where you post and your goal.** Pick every platform you use, from Instagram and TikTok to LinkedIn, Pinterest or Threads. Then choose one goal: grow followers, sell more, get leads or build community. 3. **Press Plan my 30 days and chat.** Emma starts planning straight away. While she works, tell her about your audience, what has worked before and how often you can really post, and she works it in. 4. **Read, copy and download.** Your month lands on the page as notes you tap to read. Copy a hook, or a caption with its hashtags, or download the whole plan as a CSV. ### What you get - 30 days of posts, each with a hook, caption and format - Content pillars so the month has a rhythm - Hashtags and a call to action for every post - A CSV to drop into your spreadsheet or scheduler - The first 3 posts designed ### Who it's for - **Small business owners.** Plan a month of posts around your products, offers and behind-the-scenes moments without giving up a weekend to do it. - **Solo creators.** Keep a steady posting rhythm across two or three platforms, with a hook ready for every day. - **Real estate agents and local services.** Mix listings, local tips and client stories so your feed brings in leads instead of going quiet. - **Social media managers.** Get a first draft of a client's month to edit, then load the CSV into your scheduler. - **Coaches and studio owners.** Turn what you teach into pillars and posts that build a community around your classes or sessions. ### Ideas to try - A small-batch coffee roaster in Austin, on Instagram and TikTok, to sell more bags online - My beginner yoga studio in Leeds, on Instagram and Facebook, to build community - A real estate agent in Phoenix who works with first-time buyers, on LinkedIn and Instagram, to get leads - Handmade silver jewelry from my own online shop, on Pinterest and Instagram, to sell more - A personal finance creator for nurses, on TikTok and YouTube Shorts, to grow followers - A family-run Italian restaurant in Chicago, on Instagram and Facebook, to fill more weeknight tables - A bookkeeping firm for contractors, on LinkedIn and X, to get leads ### On your own or with Emma - **Planning the month.** On your own: A blank spreadsheet and an evening of brainstorming that often stalls around day ten. With Emma: Emma plans all 30 days in one go, rotating your pillars and platforms. - **Writing the posts.** On your own: Hooks and captions written one at a time, usually the night before. With Emma: Every day has a hook, a caption sized for its platform, a call to action and hashtags. - **Variety.** On your own: Easy to fall back on the same kind of post every day. With Emma: Each day gets a format that suits its platform: reel, carousel, single image, story, text post or short video. - **Getting it into your tools.** On your own: Copying and pasting into a scheduler by hand. With Emma: Download the plan as a CSV, or copy any day's caption with its hashtags. - **Visuals.** On your own: Designing graphics yourself or briefing a designer. With Emma: With an account, the first three posts come designed: 4:5 for the feed, 9:16 for reels and stories. ### Tips - Be specific about who you serve. 'Handmade silver jewelry for minimalist brides' gets sharper hooks than 'jewelry'. - Only tap the platforms you will really post on this month. Fewer platforms make a tighter plan. - Tell Emma in the chat how many days a week you can realistically post, and what has worked for you before. - Pick the goal that matters most this month. A plan built for leads has different calls to action than one built for followers. - Ask her to swap or rewrite any day you don't like before you download the CSV. ### Try it free The free try gives you the full 30-day calendar as text: the pillars, all 30 days with hooks, captions, formats and hashtags, and posting tips. An account with credits adds designed images for the first three posts. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version gives you the full 30-day calendar as text. The designed posts for the first days come with an account and credits. **Does it post for me?** No. You get the plan and the words; you post them yourself or load the CSV into the scheduler you already use. **Can I change days I don't like?** Yes. Tell your agent in the chat which days to swap or rewrite and it updates them. **What is a content pillar?** A theme you come back to through the month, like tips, behind the scenes or customer stories. Emma picks 3 or 4 for your brand and rotates the 30 days across them so your feed doesn't feel random. **Which platforms does the content calendar cover?** The ones you tap: Instagram, TikTok, LinkedIn, YouTube Shorts, Facebook, X, Pinterest and Threads. Each day is planned for one of them, with a format and caption length that suit it. **Can I import the plan into a scheduler?** Yes. Download the CSV and load it into your spreadsheet, or into any scheduler that imports CSV files. Each row is one day. **How long are the hooks and captions?** Hooks stay under about 120 characters so they work as an opening line. Captions are sized for the platform, so a LinkedIn post runs longer than a TikTok caption. **Does it make the reels and videos too?** No. For reels and short videos the plan gives you the format, the hook and the caption, and you film them. With an account, the first three posts are designed as images. **Does Emma look up trends or hashtags online?** No. She writes the social media content plan from what you tell her about your brand, platforms and goal. Tell her about your audience in the chat for a closer fit. **Can I plan the next month when this one ends?** Yes. Come back and make a new 30-day content calendar, and tell Emma which posts did well so she can lean into them. --- ## AI Influencer Starter https://supercool.com/use/ai-influencer-starter **Create an AI influencer with a consistent look.** Describe the look or add a reference photo, then give them a name and a niche. Your AI agent creates one consistent persona, with portraits in six settings and a bio. An AI influencer generator is only useful if the person looks the same in every post. Here you describe a look or add a reference photo, give your creator a name and pick a niche. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, fixes one detailed look and uses it for six photorealistic portraits, one in each setting your niche suggests, so it reads as one consistent persona. Alongside the portraits you get a profile bio under 150 characters, a handle idea, three content pillars for the niche and a short line disclosing that the persona is AI-generated. It all pins up on this page, portraits ready to download. Tell Emma where the persona will post and what their personality is like while she works. ### How it works 1. **Pin up the look.** Describe the look on the polaroid's strip (age range, hair, style), or drop in a reference photo of yourself or someone who agreed to it. 2. **Name them and pick a niche.** Type a name on the name tag and tap a niche like Fitness or Travel, or write your own. The six empty polaroids show the settings you'll get. 3. **Press Cast my creator.** Emma shoots the first portrait, then the other five from it so the face stays the same. Chat with her about the persona's voice meanwhile. 4. **Download and post.** Portraits pin up as they land, beside the bio, handle, pillars and disclosure line, ready to copy. ### What you get - Six portraits of the same persona in different settings - A bio and handle ready to paste - Three content pillars for the niche - An AI disclosure line to post with it ### Who it's for - **Brand marketers.** A recurring face for a brand's social accounts, with a bio and content pillars to build from. - **Faceless creators.** A consistent host for a channel when you'd rather not be on camera yourself. - **Small businesses.** A friendly persona to front posts in a niche like food, wellness or home decor. - **Writers and game designers.** Reference portraits of one character in several everyday settings. - **Agencies testing concepts.** A quick way to see how a persona idea looks and sounds before committing to it. ### Ideas to try - Freckles, auburn curls, late 20s, cozy knitwear. Name: Juniper Hale. Niche: Home & decor - Tall, shaved head, warm smile, streetwear. Name: Marcus Vale. Niche: Fitness - Silver bob, round glasses, 60s, linen everything. Name: Rosa Lind. Niche: Travel - Early 30s, black braids, gold hoops, bright athleisure. Name: Kemi Ade. Niche: Wellness - Mid 20s, messy blond hair, oversized hoodies, headset around the neck. Name: Rory Finch. Niche: Gaming - My own photo as the reference, named Dana Drives, niche: vintage cars - Late 40s, salt-and-pepper beard, denim apron. Name: Tomas Reyes. Niche: Food ### On your own or with Emma - **A consistent face.** On your own: Generate image after image and hope the face matches With Emma: One fixed look description, and every portrait made from the first one - **Settings.** On your own: Plan and describe each scene yourself With Emma: Six settings matched to the niche, shown before you start - **Profile copy.** On your own: Write the bio, handle and content ideas separately With Emma: Bio, handle idea, three content pillars and a disclosure line in the same run - **Labeling it as AI.** On your own: Easy to forget, and awkward to word With Emma: A ready disclosure line comes with the persona ### Tips - Be specific about the look: age range, hair, skin tone and a signature style. - A clear, well-lit reference photo gives the most consistent face. - If you type your own niche, you get general settings like a café, a city street and a studio portrait. - Tell Emma the persona's personality in the chat so the bio sounds like them. - Put the disclosure line in the bio so followers always know. ### Try it free The free try makes two portraits of your persona, in the first two settings, plus the bio, handle, content pillars and disclosure line. An account with credits makes all six portraits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial makes two portraits of your persona and the bio. All six settings come with an account and credits. **Can I base it on a real person?** Use a description, your own photo, or a photo you have permission to use. Don't make a persona from someone else's face, and never from a celebrity. **Do I have to say it's AI?** Most platforms ask you to label AI-generated people, and it's the honest thing to do. The result includes a short disclosure line you can put in the bio or captions. **How does it keep the same face in every photo?** Emma writes one detailed look description and uses it word for word for every portrait, and makes the later portraits with the first one as the reference. **What do the portraits look like?** Photorealistic, candid lifestyle photos in natural light, portrait-shaped (3:4), with no text or logos. **Which niches can I pick?** Fitness, Travel, Food, Fashion, Tech, Gaming, Wellness and Home & decor, each with six settings of its own. You can also type any niche. **Can this AI influencer generator make videos?** Not on this page: it makes still portraits and the profile copy. Once it lands, you can ask Emma in the chat about a first reel or a content plan. **Can I post the portraits on social media?** You can use what Emma makes for your own projects. Check the rules of the platforms you post to, especially on labeling AI-generated people. **Do I need a reference photo?** No. A written description is enough. A photo helps if you want the persona based on your own look. --- ## Bio & Profile Glow-Up https://supercool.com/use/bio-and-profile-glow-up **Give your social bio a glow-up.** Paste your current bio, say what you do and who you want to reach. Your AI agent writes three new bios for each of your platforms, and you compare before and after. Your bio is the first thing people read, and most are written in a hurry. Paste yours in, finish one sentence about what you do and who you want to attract, and tap your platforms. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes three new social media bios for each one, every bio a different angle and each kept within that platform's character limit. The results come back as a before and after of your profile, so you can see the change side by side. Add your current profile photo and Emma also restyles it into a polished profile picture, and she suggests posts worth pinning to the top. Copy the bio you like and paste it in yourself: nothing is changed on your accounts. ### How it works 1. **Show your profile today.** Type your handle and paste your current bio into the profile card. No bio yet? Leave it blank and Emma starts fresh. Tap the avatar to add your photo if you want it restyled. 2. **Finish the sentence.** "I'm a ___ and I want to attract ___." Be specific about the people you want to reach. 3. **Tap your platforms.** Pick any of Instagram, TikTok, LinkedIn, X, YouTube and Threads, then press Glow up my bio. 4. **Compare and copy.** Chat with Emma about what makes you different while she writes. Your new bios land on a before/after view, ready to copy. ### What you get - Three new bios for every platform you pick - Each sized to that platform's character limit - A before/after view of your profile - Ideas for posts to pin to the top - A polished restyle of your profile photo ### Who it's for - **Freelancers and service providers.** Photographers, trainers and designers who want a bio that says who they help and how to book. - **Founders.** A LinkedIn headline and an X bio that explain the company in a line, written to the people you want to reach. - **Creators.** Bios for Instagram, TikTok and YouTube that match each platform's space and tone. - **Small shops and makers.** Home bakers and local sellers who want a bio that brings in orders. - **Job seekers.** A sharper LinkedIn headline aimed at the roles and recruiters you want. ### Ideas to try - I'm a wedding photographer and I want to attract couples planning a 2027 wedding - I'm a personal trainer and I want to attract busy parents who want to get fit - I'm a SaaS founder and I want to attract B2B marketing leads - I'm a home baker and I want to attract local cake orders - I'm a UX designer and I want to attract startup hiring managers - I'm a real estate agent in Tampa and I want to attract first-time buyers - I'm a yoga teacher and I want to attract beginners who feel nervous about classes ### On your own or with Emma - **Starting point.** On your own: Rewriting the same line over and over, unsure what to cut. With Emma: Emma works from your current bio and your goal, and writes three distinct angles. - **Character limits.** On your own: Counting characters by hand for each platform, then trimming. With Emma: Each bio is written to fit that platform's limit. - **Several platforms.** On your own: Writing a separate bio for every app, or pasting one everywhere. With Emma: Three bios for every platform you tap, all at once. - **Profile photo.** On your own: Booking a shoot or editing a selfie in another app. With Emma: Add your photo and Emma restyles it with a clean background and soft light. ### Tips - Paste your real current bio. Emma keeps what works and fixes what doesn't. - Name the people you want to attract as precisely as you can: "couples planning a summer wedding" beats "clients". - Tell Emma in the chat about your link or offer, so the bios point people to it. - Try the three angles on different platforms. A personality-first bio might suit TikTok while a direct one suits LinkedIn. - For the photo restyle, use a clear, well-lit shot of your face. ### Try it free The free try writes three new bios for every platform you pick, with your before and after. The pinned-post ideas and the profile-photo restyle come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version gives you the new bios for every platform you pick. The pinned-post ideas and the profile-photo restyle come with an account and credits. **Does it read my profile from my handle?** No, your agent doesn't log in to your accounts. Paste your current bio for the best rewrite; with only a handle, it writes fresh bios from what you tell it. **Will it change my profile for me?** No. Copy the bio you like and paste it into your profile yourself. **How long can an Instagram bio be?** 150 characters. Emma also writes to TikTok's 80, X's 160, Threads' 150, a LinkedIn headline's 220 and a YouTube description of up to 1,000. **Why three bios instead of one?** Each takes a different angle, for example clear and direct, personality-first, or led by proof or an offer. You pick the one that sounds like you. **Can I write a bio from scratch?** Yes. Leave the bio blank and Emma writes fresh social media bios from what you do and who you want to reach. **Which platforms does it cover?** Instagram, TikTok, LinkedIn, X, YouTube and Threads. Tap as many as you use. **What does the profile photo restyle do?** With an account, if you add your photo, Emma makes one polished head-and-shoulders profile picture of you with a clean background and soft light. Only upload photos of yourself. **Can it add my link or a call to action?** Yes. Tell Emma the link or offer in the chat while she works and she'll work it into the bios. --- ## Channel Theme Song https://supercool.com/use/channel-theme-song **A theme song for your channel.** Type your channel name and what it's about, then pick a sound. Your AI agent produces a 20-second theme you can open every video with, with a hook that says your name. A good channel has a sound people know from the very first note. This channel theme song maker gives you one. Type your channel name and what it's about, pick a sound, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, produces a 20-second theme made for your channel, built to open your videos and close them. Most sounds come with a short sung or chanted hook that says your channel name. Lo-fi stays instrumental for a calmer intro. The theme plays right on the page with a download button, the hook lines written out and a few tips for using it as your intro and outro. It works for a YouTube channel, a TikTok series, a Twitch stream or a podcast. ### How it works 1. **Name your channel.** Type your channel name straight into the channel header on the screen, then a few words on what it's about. 2. **Pick a sound.** Choose a cassette: lo-fi, epic, chiptune, synthwave, acoustic or hip hop. Then tap Press record. 3. **Chat while Emma produces it.** She writes a short hook with your name and produces the theme. Tell her where you post and how your intros start. 4. **Play it and use it.** Your 20-second theme lands on the page with the hook lines and tips for where it fits in your videos. ### What you get - A 20-second theme song made for your channel - Six sounds, from lo-fi to epic to chiptune - A short vocal hook with your channel name - Tips for using it as an intro and outro ### Who it's for - **YouTubers.** An intro theme that plays under the cold open and a clean ending for the outro. - **Streamers.** A short theme for starting soon screens, breaks and the end of a stream. - **Podcasters.** Open and close every episode with the same recognizable sting. - **TikTok and Shorts series.** A quick hook with your series name to mark each new episode. - **Small brands with a channel.** A sound that ties your how-to videos and product demos together. ### Ideas to try - Pixel Past, weekly retro game reviews, chiptune - Table for One, cozy cooking for one, acoustic - Rust and Rivets, DIY van builds, hip hop - Quiet Hours, study with me sessions, lo-fi - Night Drive Garage, 80s car restorations, synthwave - The Long Campaign, history deep dives, epic - Plant Mom Diaries, houseplant care tips, acoustic ### On your own or with Emma - **Finding music.** On your own: Digging through stock libraries for a track plenty of other channels already use. With Emma: A theme produced for your channel, in the sound you pick. - **Your name in it.** On your own: Hiring a musician or recording a jingle yourself. With Emma: A short, chantable hook that says your channel name, unless you go lo-fi. - **Length and fit.** On your own: Trimming a long song to fit an intro and hoping the cut sounds clean. With Emma: Made at 20 seconds with a strong opening and a clean ending. - **Using it.** On your own: Guessing where an intro should sit in your edit. With Emma: A few tips on using it under your cold open and as your outro. ### Tips - Describe what the channel is about in a few concrete words. "Weekly retro game reviews" gives Emma more to work with than "gaming". - Keep your channel name easy to sing. If it's long, tell Emma in the chat which part to use in the hook. - Pick the sound that fits the feel your viewers already know from your videos. - Use the opening seconds under your cold open and the ending as your outro, so every video starts and ends the same way. ### Try it free The free try makes the full 20-second theme, hook and all. Add-ons like an intro bumper video with your name or a 5-second outro sting use credits on an account. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial makes the full 20-second theme. An intro bumper video or an outro sting uses credits on your account. **Can I use it on YouTube, TikTok and Twitch?** Yes. The theme is made for you, so you can use it as your intro, outro or stream music without hunting for licensed tracks. **Does it say my channel name?** Most sounds get a short sung or chanted hook with your channel name. Lo-fi stays instrumental; ask your agent for a vocal version if you'd like one. **How do I make intro music for my YouTube channel?** Type your channel name and topic on this page, pick a sound and tap Press record. Emma produces a 20-second theme you can put at the start of your videos. **Which sounds can I choose?** Lo-fi, epic, chiptune, synthwave, acoustic and hip hop. **Can I download the theme?** Yes. The theme plays on the page with a download button, so you can drop it into your editing app or streaming setup. **Can I get an intro video to go with it?** Yes, as an add-on. After the theme lands, Emma can make an intro bumper video with your name or a short outro sting, using credits on your account. **Can I use the theme on my streams and videos?** You can use what Emma makes for your own projects. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. **Is the channel theme song made just for me?** Yes. It's produced from your channel name, topic and sound when you press the button, not picked from a library. **What shows up on the page when it's done?** The theme with a play button and a download button, the hook lines if it has them, the sound you picked, and two or three tips on where to place it in your videos. --- ## Faceless YouTube Channel Starter https://supercool.com/use/faceless-youtube-channel-starter **Start a faceless YouTube channel.** Pick a niche and a narrator voice. Your AI agent names the channel, designs its logo and plans your first 10 videos, laid out as your channel page. A faceless YouTube channel lets you build an audience without ever appearing on camera: narration over visuals, carried by a clear niche and a voice. Pick your niche and a narrator voice, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, gets the channel ready to launch. She names it, writes the handle, tagline and about text, designs a logo that reads at small sizes and plans your first 10 videos. Each video idea comes with a title, an opening hook, a typical length and a line on why it works in your niche. With an account, Emma also makes banner art and your first 30-second Short, voiced in the style you chose, with captions. Everything lands on the page laid out like your channel, ready to copy and download. ### Real results - History, Documentary voice: Banner art for Epoch Archives, a history channel she named and planned with 10 video ideas and a voiced first Short (https://supercool.com/use-examples/faceless-youtube-channel-starter/1.webp) - The scale of the universe, Storyteller voice: Banner for How Big Is Big?, a space channel for kids and parents, with a logo, 10 ideas and a narrated Short (https://supercool.com/use-examples/faceless-youtube-channel-starter/2.webp) - History, Documentary voice: The Epoch Archives logo: a gold broken column inside a laurel, made to read at small sizes (https://supercool.com/use-examples/faceless-youtube-channel-starter/3.webp) ### How it works 1. **Pick a niche.** Tap a tile like History, True crime, Space or Money, or type your own after 'A channel about', like money mistakes in your 20s. 2. **Choose the narrator's voice.** Pick Calm, Hype, Documentary or Storyteller. The ideas and the first Short are written for that voice. 3. **Start my channel and chat.** Press Start my channel. While Emma works, tell her how often you can post, if you want Shorts or long videos, and topics to avoid. 4. **Copy, download, claim.** Your channel page fills in as the pieces land. Copy the name, titles and about text, download the logo, then check the name and handle on YouTube before you claim them. ### What you get - A channel name, handle and about text, plus alternates - A logo made for small screens - 10 video ideas with titles and opening hooks - Banner art for your channel - Your first 30-second Short, voiced ### Who it's for - **People who'd rather not be on camera.** Start a channel about a topic you love while keeping your face private. - **Side-project builders.** Get the branding and the first content plan done in one sitting, so you can start making videos. - **History, space and true crime fans.** Turn years of reading into a channel with a clear identity and a list of videos to make first. - **Writers and voice-over artists.** Use the ideas and hooks as a starting slate for scripts you narrate yourself. - **Educators and small brands.** Launch an explainer channel in your field without filming yourself. ### Ideas to try - History, Documentary voice - Unsolved true crime cases from the 1970s, Calm voice - Stoic motivation for early mornings, Hype voice - The scale of the universe for curious kids and parents, Storyteller voice - Money mistakes in your 20s, Storyteller voice - Abandoned places and lost towns, Documentary voice - The psychology of everyday habits, Calm voice - Strange borders and tiny countries, Storyteller voice ### On your own or with Emma - **Branding.** On your own: Days of brainstorming names, then paying someone for a logo and banner. With Emma: A name with 3 alternates, a handle, tagline, about text and a logo built to read small. - **Video plan.** On your own: A notes file full of half ideas. With Emma: 10 video ideas, best first, each with a title, hook, length and why it fits. - **First upload.** On your own: Writing, recording and editing your first Short alone. With Emma: With an account, a voiced 30-second vertical Short with captions. - **Consistency.** On your own: A logo, banner and tone that don't quite match. With Emma: Everything planned around one niche and one narrator voice. ### Tips - Narrow the niche. 'Medieval medicine' gives sharper ideas than 'history'. - Pick a voice you could keep up for fifty videos, not only the first one. - Tell Emma in the chat if you'll post Shorts, long videos or both, so the lengths fit your plan. - Start with the first idea on the list. They're ordered best first. - Search the name and handle on YouTube before claiming them, and keep an alternate ready. ### Try it free The free try gives you the channel name with 3 alternates, a handle, tagline and about text, a logo and 10 video ideas with titles and hooks. The banner and the voiced first Short come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version gives you the channel name, a logo and 10 video ideas. The banner and the voiced first Short come with an account and credits. **Will the channel name be available?** Your agent doesn't check YouTube for you, so search the name and handle on YouTube before you claim them. You get a few alternates in case your favorite is taken. **What does faceless mean here?** Videos that never show you on camera: narration over visuals, stock-style footage or illustrations. The ideas and the first Short are planned that way, in the voice you picked. **How do I start a faceless YouTube channel?** Choose a narrow niche, settle on a narrator voice, then set up a name, logo, banner and a list of first videos. This page does those steps with you; you create the channel on YouTube and upload. **Does Emma create the channel or upload videos for me?** No. She gives you the name, the branding and the plan. You create the channel, claim the handle and upload yourself. **Is there text on the logo and banner?** No. Both are made without lettering so they stay clean at small sizes. YouTube shows your channel name next to them. **How is the first Short made?** Emma writes a short script for your chosen voice, voices it, and sets it over three vertical scene images with captions, about 30 seconds long. It comes with an account. **What makes a good niche for a faceless channel?** A topic with endless stories or questions, where visuals and narration do the work. History, space, mysteries and money are common picks, and each idea explains why it fits yours. **Can I use the logo and ideas for a monetized channel?** You can use what Emma makes for your own channel. Check YouTube's rules on monetization and content as you grow. --- ## Poem Reel https://supercool.com/use/poem-reel **Turn your poem into a cinematic reel.** Paste your poem, choose its mood, and read it yourself or pick a voice. Your AI agent sets it to moving atmosphere shots with the words appearing as they're read. Turn a poem into a video without opening an editor. Paste your poem, tap its mood and choose who reads it: you, or a voice you pick. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, makes one cinematic vertical reel. The poem is read slowly over moving atmosphere shots drawn from its own images, with a quiet music bed and each word appearing on screen as it's read. Your words are never changed. A long poem uses its opening stanzas, up to about a minute of reading, and the page says so. If you read it yourself, your recording becomes the narration, evened out for volume. The reel is 9:16, made for phone screens, and plays on the page ready to download. ### How it works 1. **Paste your poem.** Paste or type it onto the typewriter sheet, one line per line, with a blank line between stanzas. 2. **Tap the mood.** Choose Melancholy, Hopeful, Romantic, Haunting or Serene. The mood sets the scenes and the music. 3. **Choose the voice.** Tap Pick a voice for Soft-spoken, Deep & slow, Bright & clear or Weathered, or Read it myself to record your reading or upload one. 4. **Make my poem reel.** Press Make my poem reel and chat with Emma about the poem while she works. The reel plays on the page; download it or copy the poem. ### What you get - A vertical reel of your poem, ready to post - Read in your own voice, or one you pick - Words that appear as they're spoken - Scenes and music matched to the mood ### Who it's for - **Poets sharing online.** Give new work a cinematic, vertical form that people stop scrolling for. - **Spoken word performers.** Pair your own reading with atmosphere shots and the words on screen. - **Teachers and students.** Bring a class poem, or a public-domain classic, to life as a short film. - **People marking a moment.** Turn a poem for a wedding, anniversary or memorial into a reel to share with family. - **Writers building an audience.** Post a poem reel every week to grow a following around your writing. ### Ideas to try - A four-stanza poem about my grandmother's kitchen, Serene, read in my own voice - Wordsworth's 'I wandered lonely as a cloud', Hopeful, Soft-spoken - A breakup poem I wrote in the rain last October, Melancholy, Deep & slow - A love poem for our tenth anniversary, Romantic, Bright & clear - A short ghost poem about an empty lighthouse, Haunting, Weathered - A haiku sequence about the first snow, Serene, Soft-spoken - The poem I wrote for my father's memorial, Hopeful, read it myself ### On your own or with Emma - **Narration.** On your own: Recording, re-recording and cleaning up the audio. With Emma: Your own reading evened out for volume, or a voice to your pick, read slowly with pauses. - **Visuals.** On your own: Searching stock footage that only half fits the poem. With Emma: Moving atmosphere shots drawn from the poem's own images, in its mood. - **Words on screen.** On your own: Timing each line by hand in an editor. With Emma: Words that appear as they're read. - **Music.** On your own: Finding a track you're allowed to use. With Emma: A sparse, quiet instrumental bed made for the mood. ### Tips - Keep your line breaks the way you want them heard. The reading pauses at each line end, and longer between stanzas. - Reading it yourself? Find a quiet room and read slowly. The page records up to two minutes, and the reel uses up to about one. - Pick the mood the poem leaves you with, not only its subject. - For a long poem, paste the stanzas you love most so they make the cut. - Ask Emma for a square version afterward if you also post to a feed. ### Try it free The free try reads the opening of your poem, about the first 30 seconds, over one moving atmosphere shot with the words on screen. The full reel, with more scenes and a music bed, comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial reads your poem (about the first 30 seconds) over one moving atmosphere shot, with the words on screen. The full reel, with more scenes and a music bed, comes with an account and credits. **Will it change my words?** No. Your poem is used exactly as you wrote it. If it's long, the reel uses the opening stanzas and says so. **Can I use my own reading?** Yes. Tap "Read it myself" and record it, or upload a recording. Your reading becomes the narration as it is, cleaned up a little for volume. **How do I turn a poem into a video?** Paste the poem, pick its mood and choose a voice or your own reading. Emma makes a vertical reel with narration, moving scenes and the words on screen. **How long is the poem reel?** As long as the reading, up to about a minute. Longer poems use their opening stanzas. **What shape is the video?** Vertical 9:16, for phone screens. Ask Emma afterward for a square 1:1 version. **Do the scenes show people?** The shots are atmosphere: places, light and weather drawn from the poem's images, with no close-up faces. **Can I upload a reading I already recorded?** Yes. Upload an MP3, WAV or M4A up to 10 MB, or record it right on the page. **Can I use a famous poem?** Use your own poems or ones in the public domain. For a poem still under copyright, only use it if you have permission, and check the rules of the platforms you post to. --- ## Reel From Your Photos https://supercool.com/use/reel-from-your-photos **Turn your photos into a reel with music.** Drop in a few photos and pick a vibe. Your AI agent cuts them into a 15-second vertical reel with music and text hooks, ready for Reels, TikTok or Shorts. You have good photos of your product, your place or your event, and a feed that favors video. Drop up to four photos onto the phone, pick a vibe, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, cuts them into a 15-second vertical reel with music made for it and short text hooks on screen. It's a simple way to turn photos into a reel with music. The reel is 9:16, sized for Instagram Reels, TikTok, YouTube Shorts and Stories. Emma writes two or three hooks, the first one made to stop the scroll, plus a caption and hashtags to post with it. With an account she also brings your strongest photo to life as a short moving shot that opens the reel. ### How it works 1. **Drop in your photos.** Tap the phone or drag up to 4 photos onto it. Each one becomes a story bubble along the top. 2. **Pick a vibe.** Choose Hype, Cozy, Luxe, Fun, Cinematic or Chill. Under What is it?, you can say what it's about so the hooks mention it. 3. **Press Make my reel.** Emma writes the hooks and makes the music. Tell her in the chat where you'll post it and what you want viewers to do. 4. **Watch and post.** The reel plays in the phone on the page. Download it, copy the hooks and caption, and post it yourself. ### What you get - A 15-second vertical reel made from your photos - Music made for it, in the vibe you pick - Text hooks that stop the scroll - A caption and hashtags to post with it ### Who it's for - **Small shops.** Show off a new collection or a weekly special as a reel instead of a still post. - **Cafés and restaurants.** Announce a grand opening or a new menu from a few photos. - **Rentals and hosts.** Turn photos of a lake house or a guest room into a quick vertical tour. - **Couples and party hosts.** Share a wedding or birthday recap with music. - **Travelers and creators.** Make a reel from a trip's best shots. - **Makers and crafters.** Show a handmade piece from a few angles. ### Ideas to try - 4 photos of our new spring candle collection, Cozy - 3 photos from the grand opening weekend at the bakery, Fun - Sara & Leo's wedding, 4 photos, Cinematic - The lake house in summer, 4 photos, Chill - Our new leather wallet in three colors, Luxe - Highlights from Saturday's bootcamp class at the gym, Hype - Our farmers' market stall with fresh peaches and jam, Fun ### On your own or with Emma - **Editing.** On your own: Learn a video editor and line up every cut. With Emma: Cuts your photos into a 15-second vertical reel with soft dissolves between them. - **Music.** On your own: Search for a track you're allowed to use. With Emma: Makes an instrumental track for the reel in the vibe you pick. - **Words.** On your own: Guess at on-screen text, a caption and hashtags. With Emma: Writes short hooks for the screen, a caption and hashtags. - **Motion.** On your own: Go back and shoot new video. With Emma: With an account, brings your best photo to life as a short moving shot. ### Tips - Use 3 or 4 photos with variety: a wide shot, a close-up, a detail, and people if you have them. - Choose sharp, well-lit photos. Vertical photos fill a vertical reel best. - Fill in What is it? so the hooks name your product, place or event. - Tell Emma what you want viewers to do: visit, buy, book or follow. - Pick the vibe for your audience. Luxe suits a jewelry shop; Fun suits a birthday party. ### Try it free The free try makes a slideshow reel of your photos with music, text hooks, a caption and hashtags. With an account and credits, Emma also brings your best photo to life as a short moving shot. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version is a slideshow reel of your photos with music, text hooks and a caption. With an account and credits, your agent also brings your best photo to life as a short moving shot. **How many photos can I use?** Up to 4 on this page, and 3 or 4 works best. Video clips aren't supported here yet; send more photos to your agent in the chat afterwards if you want a longer cut. **Can I use it on any platform?** Yes. It's a vertical 9:16 video that works on Instagram Reels, TikTok, YouTube Shorts and Stories. Download it and post it yourself. **How do I turn photos into a reel with music?** Drop up to 4 photos on the phone, pick a vibe and press Make my reel. Emma makes the music, writes text hooks and cuts the photos into a 15-second vertical video. **Do I need to find my own music?** No. Emma makes an instrumental track for the reel in the vibe you pick. You can't upload your own song on this page. **How long is the reel and what size is it?** About 15 seconds, vertical 9:16 at 1080 by 1920 pixels. **Can I make a reel from just one photo?** Yes. The page takes anywhere from 1 to 4 photos, though 3 or 4 give the reel more variety from shot to shot. **Does it post the reel for me?** No. Download it and post it yourself, with the caption and hashtags Emma wrote. **Can I change the text hooks?** Ask Emma in the chat to change a hook or the caption. You can also copy each hook from the page. **Can I use photos I found online?** Only upload photos you have the right to use, such as your own. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. --- ## Thumbnail Studio https://supercool.com/use/thumbnail-studio **YouTube thumbnails that stand out in the feed.** Type your video's title, pick the feeling it should sell and add a photo of you if you like. Your AI agent designs three thumbnails and shows how they look in a feed. Thumbnail Studio designs YouTube thumbnails that stand out in a busy feed. Type your video's title, pick the feeling it should sell, and add a photo of you if you want to be in it. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, comes up with three different concepts and designs each one at 1280×720, the size YouTube uses. Each thumbnail has 2 to 4 big words that add to your title instead of repeating it, one clear subject showing the emotion, and a bold, uncluttered composition. They come back sitting in a video feed so you can see which one stands out, with A/B notes on which to test first. While she works, tell her what happens in the video. ### How it works 1. **Type your video's title.** Write it under the empty thumbnail in the feed, like We built a cabin in 30 days. 2. **Add a photo of you (optional).** Drop it into the thumbnail spot and Emma puts you in the designs. 3. **Pick the feeling it should sell.** Choose Shock, Curiosity, Joy or Hype, then press Design my thumbnails. Chat with Emma about the video and your other thumbnails while she works. 4. **Compare them in the feed.** Switch which version sits in the feed, read the words and idea behind each, download the JPGs and check the A/B notes. ### What you get - Three thumbnail designs at 1280×720 - You in them, from your photo - A preview of each one sitting in a video feed - A/B notes on which to test first ### Who it's for - **YouTubers.** Fresh thumbnail options for every upload without opening a design app. - **New channels.** A strong look for the first videos, before a style has settled in. - **Video podcasters.** Episode thumbnails with the host's face and a clear hook. - **Teachers and course creators.** Thumbnails that make a lesson or tutorial look worth the click. - **Social media managers.** Three concepts to test for a client's video, with notes on which to try first. ### Ideas to try - I tried the 75 Hard challenge, Shock, with my photo - We built a cabin in 30 days, Hype - Why nobody talks about this phone setting, Curiosity - I cooked like a 1900s chef, Joy, with my photo - I lived on $10 a day in Tokyo, Shock - The easiest sourdough you'll ever make, Joy - What happened to the town that vanished overnight, Curiosity ### On your own or with Emma - **Concepts.** On your own: Make one design and hope it works. With Emma: Three different concepts, each a new angle on your title. - **The words.** On your own: Repeat the title on the thumbnail. With Emma: 2 to 4 big words that add to the title instead. - **Your face.** On your own: Cut yourself out of a photo and place yourself in each design. With Emma: You in each design, from one photo you drop in. - **Choosing.** On your own: Guess which one will get the click. With Emma: A feed preview of each, plus A/B notes on which to test first and why. - **Sizing.** On your own: Resize and compress each file by hand. With Emma: JPGs at exactly 1280×720 and under 2 MB. ### Tips - Use a photo with a big, clear expression and good light. The thumbnail is small in the feed. - Pick the emotion your video actually delivers, so the click feels earned. - Type the title as you'll publish it. Emma writes the thumbnail words to work alongside it. - Tell Emma what your other thumbnails look like, so the new ones fit your channel. - Start with the version the A/B notes put first. The thumbnails come strongest first. ### Try it free The free try makes one thumbnail from your title, without lettering, plus the 2 to 4 words to add to it and the idea behind it. The three lettered 1280×720 versions and the A/B notes come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version makes one thumbnail from your title, without lettering, plus suggested words to add. The three lettered versions and A/B notes come with an account and credits. **Can I upload them straight to YouTube?** Yes. The full versions are 16:9 JPGs at 1280×720, which YouTube accepts as custom thumbnails. Your channel needs custom thumbnails enabled. **Will the words always be spelled right?** Usually, but AI lettering can slip. Check the words before you upload, and ask your agent in the chat to fix any that are off. **What size is a YouTube thumbnail?** 1280×720 pixels, a 16:9 shape, as a JPG under 2 MB. The full versions from this page are exactly that. **What makes a good YouTube thumbnail?** A clear subject with an emotion you can read at a glance, a few big words that add to the title, high contrast and an uncluttered background. Each design here follows those rules. **Do I have to use my own face?** No. The photo is optional. Without one, this AI thumbnail maker designs around a clear subject showing the emotion you picked. **Why three thumbnails?** Each one is a different concept, so you can see which angle stands out in the feed and test it. The A/B notes say which to try first and why. **Which emotion should I choose?** Pick the feeling the video delivers: Shock for a surprising result, Curiosity for a question or a mystery, Joy for something warm or fun, Hype for big moments and challenges. **Does it make thumbnails for other shapes?** No. This page makes 16:9 YouTube thumbnails at 1280×720 for regular videos. **Can I use a photo of someone else?** Only upload photos you have the right to use. You can use what Emma makes for your own channel; check YouTube's rules for thumbnails. --- ## Viral Hook Lab https://supercool.com/use/viral-hook-lab **20 hooks that stop the scroll.** Give your AI agent your video's topic and who it's for. It writes 20 opening lines in different styles, so you can pick the one that grabs. The first line of a short video decides whether anyone stays for the second. In the Viral Hook Lab, you type your video's topic and who it's for, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes 20 scroll-stopping hooks for TikTok, Reels and Shorts. They come in groups of four by style, such as curiosity gap, bold claim, question, story or contrarian, each with a note on when that style works best. Every hook is under 15 words and written for your topic and audience, not pulled from a list of generic openers. There are no made-up statistics: a numbers hook uses figures you can stand behind, or asks a question. Tap to copy any hook, or all 20. With an account, Emma also writes three 30-second scripts built on the strongest ones. ### How it works 1. **Type your topic.** Put your video's topic in the first reel of the machine, like why your sourdough is flat. 2. **Name your audience.** Type who's watching in the second reel, or tap Founders, Home cooks, Gym beginners, Students, Busy moms or Job seekers. 3. **Pull the lever.** Press Pull for 20 hooks. Tell Emma what happens in the video and the one thing viewers should take away. 4. **Copy your favorites.** The hooks land in the machine, grouped by style. Tap one to copy it, or copy them all. ### What you get - 20 opening hooks written for your topic and audience - Grouped by style: curiosity, bold claims, stories and more - One tap to copy any hook, or all of them - Three script variations built on the best hooks ### Who it's for - **Short-form creators.** Fresh openers for every video instead of the same line every time. - **Small business owners.** Hooks that make a product tip or behind-the-scenes clip worth watching. - **Coaches and educators.** A strong first line to pull people into a lesson they need. - **Social media managers.** A batch of options to test across several posts. - **Founders building in public.** Openers that turn an update into a story people finish. - **UGC creators.** Several openings to offer a brand for the same clip. ### Ideas to try - Topic: why your sourdough is flat. Audience: home bakers - Topic: 3 apps that save me hours. Audience: freelancers - Topic: how I paid off $20k in credit card debt. Audience: people in their 20s - Topic: the 5-minute morning stretch. Audience: desk workers - Topic: what recruiters skim first on a resume. Audience: job seekers - Topic: one-pan weeknight dinners. Audience: busy moms - Topic: mistakes I made launching my first product. Audience: founders ### On your own or with Emma - **Options.** On your own: Write two or three openers and pick one With Emma: 20 hooks to choose from in one pull - **Variety.** On your own: Fall back on the same kind of opener With Emma: About five styles of four hooks, each with a note on when it works - **Fit.** On your own: Generic templates that could be any video With Emma: Written for your topic and your audience - **The rest of the video.** On your own: Write the script separately With Emma: Three 30-second scripts on the strongest hooks, with an account ### Tips - Be specific in the topic: a concrete result or problem beats a broad subject. - Name a narrow audience; “new runners over 40” gives sharper hooks than “people”. - Try two hooks from different styles on the same video and compare. - Use the hook as both the first spoken line and the on-screen text. - Make sure the video delivers what the hook promises. ### Try it free The free try writes all 20 hooks, grouped by style, one tap to copy. The three 30-second script variations come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version gives you all 20 hooks. The three script variations come with an account and credits. **Will these make my video go viral?** Nobody can promise that. A strong first line gives people a reason to keep watching, which is the part these help with; the rest is your video. **Which platforms are they for?** Short-form video: TikTok, Instagram Reels and YouTube Shorts. They work as the first spoken line, the on-screen text, or both. **What is a video hook?** The opening line of a short video, spoken, on screen or both, that gives people a reason to keep watching. **How long are the hooks?** Each is under 15 words, short enough to say in the first seconds or fit on screen. **What hook styles do I get?** About five styles of four hooks each, drawn from curiosity gap, bold claim, question, story, contrarian, numbers and POV, chosen for your topic. **Will the hooks include fake statistics?** No. Numbers hooks use figures you can stand behind, or they're phrased as a question. **What's in the scripts?** Each of the three 30-second scripts has a hook, a body and a call to action, built on one of the strongest hooks. **Do I need to describe the whole video for the Viral Hook Lab?** No. A topic and an audience are enough. Telling Emma in the chat what happens in the video and your tone helps her fit the scripts. **What makes a good hook?** It's short, specific and makes a promise the video keeps: a question the viewer wants answered, a claim they want to check, or a story they want to finish. **Can I get hooks for a different audience?** Yes. Run it again with the new audience. The hooks are written for the one you name, so a new audience gets new lines. --- ## Anime Opening Maker https://supercool.com/use/anime-opening-maker **Make the opening for your own anime.** Give your hero, your show's title and a vibe: battle, slice of life, mecha or isekai. Your AI agent animates a 15-second anime opening with a title card and an original theme. Every anime series starts with its opening: the hero reveal, the music kicking in, the title hitting the screen. This AI anime opening maker gives your own show one. Add your hero as a photo or a one-line description, type your show's title and pick a vibe. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, draws the hero in cel-shaded anime style and animates a 15-second opening that lands on your title card. She also writes the show around it: your title in katakana, a tagline, the first episode's title and a short cast with your hero and a rival. The opening is set to an original instrumental theme in your vibe, from high-energy battle to a sweeping isekai adventure. It plays on the page in a retro TV, ready to download and share. ### How it works 1. **Add your hero.** Drop a photo of yourself, a friend or your pet into the frame, or describe the hero in a line, like a sleepy barista who secretly fights demons. 2. **Title the show and pick a vibe.** Type your show's title where it says YOUR SHOW, then tap Battle, Slice of life, Mecha or Isekai. 3. **Roll the opening and chat.** Press Roll the opening. While Emma works, tell her the hero's name and power, the rival, or what happens in episode one. 4. **Watch and download.** The opening plays on the page with your title, katakana, episode title and character cards. Download the video and the title card. ### What you get - A 15-second animated anime opening - Your show's title card - An original instrumental theme - Your hero drawn in anime style, from a photo or a description ### Who it's for - **Anime fans.** Turn a character you've been daydreaming about into an opening that feels like a real series. - **Webcomic and web novel writers.** Give your story a 15-second opening and a title card to post alongside new chapters. - **Friends and families.** Cast your best friend, your kid or your dog as the hero of a show for a birthday or the group chat. - **Streamers and creators.** Use it as a channel intro or a hype clip that matches your on-screen persona. - **Tabletop groups.** Give your campaign's party an opening sequence before the first session. ### Ideas to try - Hero: my corgi with a tiny red scarf. Title: CORGI KNIGHT. Vibe: Battle - Hero: a girl with silver hair and a giant wrench. Title: GEARHEART. Vibe: Mecha - Hero: a photo of me in my nurse's scrubs. Title: NIGHT SHIFT. Vibe: Slice of life - Hero: a retired librarian who wakes up as a dragon tamer. Title: OVERDUE. Vibe: Isekai - Hero: a photo of my little brother in his soccer kit. Title: STRIKER ZERO. Vibe: Battle - Hero: a shy florist who can hear plants talking. Title: PETAL TALK. Vibe: Slice of life - Hero: a photo of our rogue's cosplay from game night. Title: CRIT HAPPENS. Vibe: Isekai ### On your own or with Emma - **Character art.** On your own: Commission an artist or learn cel-shading yourself. With Emma: Emma draws your hero in anime style from your photo or description. - **Animation.** On your own: Weeks of keyframes, or a studio quote. With Emma: Three animated shots, from the hero reveal to a push-in on the title card, cut into one 15-second opening. - **Music.** On your own: Hunting for a track you're allowed to use. With Emma: An original instrumental theme made for your vibe. - **The show itself.** On your own: Naming episodes and characters from scratch. With Emma: A katakana title, tagline, first episode title and a hero and rival, written for you. ### Tips - Use a clear, well-lit photo where the face is easy to see. It's the reference for your anime hero. - Short titles look biggest on the title card. One to three words work well. - Pick the vibe that fits the story: Mecha for robots and launch sequences, Slice of life for everyday charm. - With a photo, use the optional line to add a detail, like 'with a katana' or 'in a school uniform'. - Tell Emma the hero's name and power in the chat so the character cards feel like your show. ### Try it free The free try draws your hero as an anime title-card still and writes the katakana title, tagline, first episode title and characters. The animated 15-second opening with its theme comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Can the hero be me, or my pet?** Yes. Add a photo and your agent draws them in anime style as the reference, or just describe the hero in a line. **Does it have a theme song with lyrics?** The opening uses an original instrumental theme. Ask your agent for a full theme song with lyrics in a follow-up. **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version makes an anime title-card still of your hero. The animated opening comes with an account and credits. **How long is the anime opening?** About 15 seconds: three animated 5-second shots that end on your title card, set to an original instrumental theme. **What shape is the video?** Landscape 16:9, like a TV anime opening. Download it from the page when it's done. **Do I need a photo?** No. A one-line description is enough. A photo helps when you want the hero to look like a real person or pet. **What does each vibe change?** The look, the action and the music. Battle leans on fights and rivals, Slice of life on cherry blossoms and school rooftops, Mecha on giant robots and launches, and Isekai on a hero carried into a fantasy world. **Does it write my title in Japanese?** Emma writes your title in katakana, shown beside it on the page. The title card in the opening uses your title as you typed it. **Can I use a photo of someone else?** Only if they're happy for you to. Use photos of yourself, your pets or people who said yes. **Can I use the opening as a channel intro?** Yes. You can use what the AI anime opening maker makes for your own projects. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. --- ## Book Trailer Maker https://supercool.com/use/book-trailer-maker **Make a trailer for your book.** Paste your blurb or first chapter, pick the mood and add your cover. Your AI agent writes the narration and cuts a short trailer with title cards and music. A book trailer gives readers a feel for your story before they open it. Paste your blurb or first chapter, add your cover if you have one and pick a mood. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes a short narration from your own text and cuts a narrated trailer of about 20 seconds, with scenes in your cover's look, your tagline on screen and music to match. The trailer closes on your book standing in a lit bookstore window at night, its title readable. Alongside the video you get three pull quotes copied word for word from your text, plus a caption and hashtags to post with it. This AI book trailer maker suits a cozy mystery as well as an epic fantasy, a finished book or one on preorder. ### Real results - Dark: a cartographer's map of a city in the fog, cover attached: The trailer's end card: her cover on a lit bookshop stand, after narrated shots of the fog city (https://supercool.com/use-examples/book-trailer-maker/1.webp) - Romantic: a florist and the best man who stood her up: The opening shot of a 21-second trailer, with the tagline over the flower shop (https://supercool.com/use-examples/book-trailer-maker/2.webp) - Dark: a cartographer's map of a city in the fog, cover attached: The first shot of the 25-second trailer, with the tagline as a title card (https://supercool.com/use-examples/book-trailer-maker/3.webp) ### How it works 1. **Put your cover on the stand.** Tap or drop your cover image onto the bookstore stand. It's optional, but Emma matches the trailer's look to it. 2. **Paste the story and pick a mood.** Paste your back-cover blurb or your whole first chapter on the staff pick card, then choose Romantic, Dark, Epic or Cozy. 3. **Cut my trailer, then chat.** Press Cut my trailer. Emma may ask for the title, your author name and where you'll post. Answer in the chat and she uses it. 4. **Download and post.** The trailer plays on the page. Download it, copy any pull quote, and grab the caption and hashtags. ### What you get - A narrated trailer of about 20 seconds - Title cards with your book's name and tagline - Three pull quotes from your own text - A caption and hashtags to post it ### Who it's for - **Indie authors.** Launch a new release or a preorder with a trailer for your socials, website and newsletter. - **Traditionally published authors.** Make your own promo for a launch, a paperback release or a book anniversary. - **Small presses.** Give several titles on your list a trailer each without booking a video team. - **Serial fiction writers.** Announce a new arc or season with a trailer and quotes from the opening chapter. - **Writers with a work in progress.** Share the mood of a draft with your writing group or early readers. ### Ideas to try - Dark: When a disgraced cartographer finds a map of a city that does not exist, she follows it into the fog. Cover attached. - Cozy: the first chapter of my village bakery mystery, where the scones go missing on the morning of the fair - Romantic: a second-chance romance between a wedding florist and the best man who stood her up ten years ago - Epic: my fantasy blurb about twin heirs, one throne and a dragon that answers to neither - Dark: the opening chapter of my psychological thriller set on a winter ferry, no cover yet - Cozy: a picture-book blurb about a hedgehog who runs a lending library, cover attached - Romantic: my historical romance blurb about a lighthouse keeper's daughter and a shipwrecked sailor in 1890s Maine ### On your own or with Emma - **Script.** On your own: Narration that sounds good read aloud takes several drafts. With Emma: Emma writes a 4 to 6 line narration drawn from your book. - **Visuals.** On your own: Stock footage that doesn't match your cover, or a hired editor. With Emma: Scenes made in your cover's look, ending on your book in a bookstore window. - **Voice and music.** On your own: Recording a voiceover and finding music you can use. With Emma: A narration voiced for your mood, over an instrumental bed. - **Promo copy.** On your own: Picking quotes and writing a caption at the last minute. With Emma: Three pull quotes word for word from your text, plus a caption and hashtags. ### Tips - Paste a full chapter if you can. More text gives Emma better lines for the narration and the pull quotes. - Add your cover so the scenes match its colors and style and the trailer closes on it. - Pick the mood readers should feel. A thriller with a love story in it might still be Dark. - Tell Emma the title and your author name in the chat if your text doesn't say them. - Say where you'll post so she can shape the caption for it. ### Try it free The free try animates a 5-second title card from your cover (or designs one in your mood if you have no cover) and writes your tagline, three pull quotes and a caption. The narrated trailer with scenes and music comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Where do the pull quotes come from?** They're lines taken from the text you paste in, never invented reviews. Paste a chapter to give your agent more to choose from. **Do I need a cover?** No, but it helps: your agent matches the trailer's look to it and closes on it. Without one, it designs the look from your blurb and mood. **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version animates a 5-second title card from your cover and writes the pull quotes. The narrated trailer comes with an account and credits. **How long is the book trailer?** About 20 seconds: narrated, with two story scenes and a closing shot of your book that holds at the end. **What shape is the video?** Landscape 16:9, which suits YouTube, websites and most feeds. **Does the narration use my exact words?** The narration is written from your book, in its tone. The pull quotes are the part copied word for word from your text. **Can I make a trailer before the book is finished?** Yes. A blurb or a first chapter is all it needs, so it works for a preorder or a work in progress. **What if my text doesn't include the title or my name?** Emma asks in the chat. If she still doesn't know them, she leaves them out rather than making them up. **Can I post the trailer on social media?** Yes, you can use what the AI book trailer maker makes to promote your own book. Only upload a cover you have the right to use, and check the rules of the platforms you post to. --- ## Fan Trailer Maker https://supercool.com/use/fan-trailer-maker **Make a fan trailer with your own twist.** Name a film or show you love and the twist: what if it were a horror, a 90s sitcom, a musical? Your AI agent cuts a concept trailer with title cards, music and a poster. This AI fan trailer maker takes a film, show, book or game you love and asks one question: what if it were something else? Name it, add your twist (a horror movie, a 90s sitcom, a Broadway musical), and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes a new title and tagline and cuts a concept trailer with title cards, music and a poster. It's an original fan concept, not a recut. Emma creates new visuals inspired by the story and your twist, with no clips from the original, no real actors' likenesses and no studio logos. Pick a teaser of about 15 seconds or a trailer of about 20, and chat with her about your favorite moment while she works. ### How it works 1. **Write what you love.** Type the film, show, book or game on your I love badge, like The Office or Pride and Prejudice. 2. **Finish the twist.** Complete What if it were… with your own idea, or tap one like a film noir or set in space. 3. **Pick a length and press Cut the trailer.** Choose the Teaser (about 15 seconds) or Trailer (about 20 seconds) ticket. Emma writes the title cards and makes the shots, music and poster while you chat. 4. **Watch and share.** The trailer plays on the panel screen with its title cards and poster. Download it and copy the caption and hashtags, which say it's a fan concept. ### What you get - A 15- or 20-second concept trailer - Trailer-style title cards - A concept poster - A caption and hashtags to post it ### Who it's for - **Fan accounts and communities.** A fresh what-if to post and get people talking about a story they already love. - **Content creators.** Short, shareable videos that come with a caption and hashtags ready to post. - **Writers and pitchers.** Showing a genre mashup idea with a title, logline and concept poster instead of only describing it. - **Film students.** Seeing how a genre shift changes the tone, the look and the music of a familiar story. - **Teachers and book clubs.** A playful hook for talking about a classic, like Sherlock Holmes as a nature documentary. ### Ideas to try - Pride and Prejudice, but what if it were a horror movie, as a Trailer - The Office, as a nature documentary, as a Teaser - Finding Nemo, as a film noir, as a Trailer - Sherlock Holmes, set in space, as a Teaser - The Great Gatsby, as a Broadway musical, as a Trailer - Jurassic Park, as a 90s sitcom, as a Teaser - Little Women, as a heist thriller, as a Trailer ### On your own or with Emma - **Footage.** On your own: Recut clips from the original and work around who owns them. With Emma: New, original visuals inspired by the story and your twist. - **Editing.** On your own: Cut shots, add title cards and sync music in an editor. With Emma: Shots, trailer-style title cards and a music cue in the twist's genre, cut together for you. - **The pitch.** On your own: Come up with a new title, tagline and poster yourself. With Emma: A new title, a tagline, a one-line logline and a concept poster. - **Posting.** On your own: Write a caption and hunt for hashtags. With Emma: A caption that says it's a fan concept, plus up to 8 hashtags. ### Tips - Make the twist a genre with a strong look and sound. Noir, horror or a musical change the visuals and music more than a small tweak. - Pick a story people know by its setting and situation. The trailer evokes it through new characters and places, not the original designs. - Choose Teaser for one punchy idea and Trailer when the twist needs room to build. - Tell Emma your favorite moment from the original while she works. It can shape a shot or a title card. - Keep the fan concept note in the caption when you post. ### Try it free The free try writes your new title, tagline and title cards, and makes a concept poster plus one 5-second signature shot. The full trailer, cut with title cards and music, comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Does it use real footage or actors?** No. It's an original fan concept: new visuals inspired by the story and your twist, with no clips, real actors' likenesses or studio logos. It isn't affiliated with the original. **How long is it?** A teaser runs about 15 seconds and a trailer about 20, with title cards and music. Ask your agent for a longer cut afterwards. **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version makes a concept poster and one 5-second shot. The full trailer comes with an account and credits. **What's the difference between Teaser and Trailer?** The Teaser has two 5-second shots and ends on a title card, about 15 seconds in all. The Trailer has three shots and the title card, about 20 seconds. **Is there dialogue or a voiceover?** No. The trailer tells its story with shots, trailer-style title cards and a music cue in the twist's genre. **What can I base a fan trailer on?** A film, a show, a book or a game: anything with a story people know. Emma evokes it through setting and situation, with new characters' looks. **What do I get besides the video?** A new title for the twisted version, a tagline, a one-sentence logline, the title cards in order, a 3:4 concept poster, and a caption with hashtags. **Can I post my fan trailer on social media?** You can use what Emma makes for your own projects. It's an unofficial fan concept, so keep the caption that says so and check the rules of the platforms you post to. **Can I make a trailer for my own original idea?** This AI fan trailer maker reimagines a story you already love. For an idea of your own, the Short Film Studio page makes a short film from a one-line logline. --- ## Horror Short Maker https://supercool.com/use/horror-short-maker **Make a horror short from your worst fear.** Pick the fear, say where it happens. Your AI agent writes it, shoots three dread-soaked scenes and cuts them into a short horror film with sound design and a poster. Everyone has one fear that gets under the skin: a house that isn't empty, a call from a number that shouldn't exist, a reflection that lags behind. This AI horror short maker turns yours into a film. Pick the fear, type where it happens, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes it and shoots a short horror film about it. The story runs in three beats: unease, escalation, reveal. Each beat becomes a 5-second widescreen scene in low light with a handheld feel, cut together with a title card in distressed lettering, for about 20 seconds of film. A low, droning sound-design bed with a sting near the end holds it together. You also get a creepy poster with the title and tagline, plus the logline and shot list. It goes for dread and atmosphere, not gore. ### How it works 1. **Answer: what do you fear?.** Pick one: the house, the forest, the phone call, the doll, the mirror or the basement. 2. **Answer: where does it happen?.** Type a place, as specific as you like, then press Press play. 3. **Chat while Emma shoots it.** Emma writes the title, logline and three beats and makes the scenes, title card, sound bed and poster. Tell her what would scare you most. 4. **Watch it on the tape.** The short plays on the page with the poster and shot list. Download the short when it's ready. ### What you get - A horror short of about 20 seconds - A sound-design bed to make it creep - A creepy poster with the title - The logline and shot list ### Who it's for - **Horror fans.** See your own worst fear play out as a short film you can share with friends who love a scare. - **Short-form creators.** A spooky clip and poster for a Halloween post, a story series or a creepy account. - **Writers and filmmakers.** Test the mood of a horror idea as a quick visual pitch before you write the full script. - **Game masters and storytellers.** A short atmospheric teaser to open a horror game night or a campfire story. - **Party and event hosts.** A custom horror short and poster for a Halloween party invite or a haunted house night. ### Ideas to try - The house, in my grandmother's farmhouse in Maine - The phone call, at a 24-hour laundromat at 3am - The forest, at a summer camp after everyone left - The doll, in the night nursery of an old children's hospital - The mirror, in a motel bathroom off an empty desert highway - The basement, in the brand new house we just moved into - The forest, along a ski lift that keeps running after closing ### On your own or with Emma - **Getting footage.** On your own: Find locations, actors and lights, then shoot at night. With Emma: Three 5-second scenes made from your fear and place, with one location kept consistent. - **Sound.** On your own: Hunt for drones and stingers and line them up by ear. With Emma: A sound-design bed with a low drone and a sting near the end, laid under the cut. - **Poster.** On your own: Design key art and title lettering in a separate app. With Emma: A poster with the film's title and tagline, made alongside the film. - **Story.** On your own: Write and storyboard a short yourself. With Emma: A title, logline and three-beat story of unease, escalation and reveal. ### Tips - A specific place is scarier than a general one. Room, time and one odd detail help. - Ordinary places work well: a laundromat, an office after hours, a parking garage. - Tell Emma in the chat if you want it creepier or lighter. - If someone younger will watch, say so in the chat so Emma keeps the tone suitable. - Ask for more scenes or a found-footage cut once the first version is done. ### Try it free The free try makes the creepy poster and a 5-second teaser shot of the first beat. The full short with all three scenes, the title card and the sound design comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **How scary does it get?** Dread and atmosphere rather than gore: shadows, wrong details, a reveal. Ask your agent to push it further or lighten it in a follow-up. **How long is it?** About 20 seconds: three 5-second scenes plus a title card. Ask your agent for more scenes or a found-footage cut afterwards. **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version makes the poster and a 5-second teaser shot. The full short with sound design comes with an account and credits. **What does an AI horror short maker actually make?** Here it makes a short horror film of about 20 seconds (three 5-second scenes and a title card) with a sound-design bed, plus a poster, a logline and a shot list. **Is it gory?** No. It aims for dread: shadows, low light, wrong details and a reveal. There's no gore. **Can I choose my own fear?** Pick the closest of the six fears on the page, then shape it with the place you type and in the chat with Emma. **Is there dialogue or a voiceover?** No. The film carries its scare through the pictures, the title card and the sound-design bed. **Can I make it longer?** The first cut is about 20 seconds. Once it's done, ask Emma in the chat for more scenes or a found-footage version. **What shape is the video?** Widescreen 16:9. The poster is a tall 3:4 image. **Can I post it on social media?** Yes, you can use what Emma makes for your own projects. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. --- ## Photo-to-Hero Video https://supercool.com/use/photo-to-hero-video **Turn one photo into a dramatic hero reveal.** Drop in one photo and pick an effect. Your AI agent stages it on a dark stage under spotlights and makes a 5-second reveal video, with a poster still. You have a great photo of a player, a car or a product that deserves a proper entrance. Upload it, pick an effect, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, stages your subject center stage on a black stage under two sweeping spotlights. First she makes a poster still, then she animates it into a 5-second hero reveal video. Choose smoke rolling away, lightning strikes, a slow-motion push-in with rim light, or a shower of sparks as the lights hit. She keeps the subject as it is: the face, the jersey number, the logo, the paint. You get the poster and the video to download, plus a short hero title and a caption to post. It's photo to hero video in one go. ### How it works 1. **Put your hero on stage.** Drop one photo onto the center of the stage, or tap 'Your hero here' to choose it. 2. **Pick the effect and the shape.** Tap a cue card: Smoke reveal, Lightning, Slow-mo or Sparks. Then switch between Vertical for Reels and TikTok, or Wide for screens. 3. **Press Stage my reveal.** Emma makes the poster still first. Tell her who or what it is and where you'll post it. 4. **Download both.** The poster still and the 5-second reveal land on the page. Download them and copy the caption. ### What you get - A 5-second dramatic reveal video - A poster still to post or print - Smoke, lightning, slow-mo or sparks - Vertical for Reels and TikTok, or wide ### Who it's for - **School and youth sports teams.** Player intro reveals for game day, senior night or a signing announcement. - **Car owners and dealers.** A dramatic reveal of a new car, a restored classic or a fresh paint job. - **Product brands.** A launch teaser from one product shot, for Reels and stories. - **Athletes.** A bold intro clip for a recruiting profile or a social page. - **Gyms and event promoters.** A fighter, a lifter or a headliner introduced like the main event. ### Ideas to try - My son's football photo in his number 12 jersey, Smoke reveal, Vertical - Our restored 1969 muscle car in candy-apple red, Lightning, Wide - A bottle of our new cold brew on a plain background, Sparks, Vertical - Our point guard mid jump shot, Slow-mo, Vertical, for the senior night post - My new road bike against a white wall, Smoke reveal, Wide - A boxer in his corner before a title fight, Lightning, Vertical - A handmade leather watch strap, Slow-mo, Vertical, for our product launch ### On your own or with Emma - **Production.** On your own: Rent a dark studio, a smoke machine and lights, then film. With Emma: One photo staged on a black stage under spotlights. - **Effects.** On your own: Learn compositing and effects software. With Emma: Pick smoke, lightning, slow-mo or sparks from four cue cards. - **What you get.** On your own: Export a still and a video separately and write the caption after. With Emma: A poster still, the video, a hero title and a caption together. - **Format.** On your own: Re-crop the edit for each place you post. With Emma: Choose vertical or wide before you start. ### Tips - Pick a photo where the subject is sharp and large in the frame. The background is replaced by the stage anyway. - Match the effect to the mood: lightning for intensity, slow-mo for polish, sparks for celebration, smoke for a classic reveal. - Tell Emma the name or number to feature so the title and caption fit. - Choose Vertical for phone feeds and Wide for screens, slideshows or a website header. - Post the poster first as a teaser, then the video when it's time for the reveal. ### Try it free The free try makes the poster still and the 5-second reveal video, with a hero title and caption. Longer or extra versions come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial makes the poster still and the 5-second reveal. Longer or extra versions use credits on your account. **What photos work best?** One clear subject that fills most of the frame: a player in action, a car from a three-quarter angle, a product on a plain background. Busy backgrounds get replaced by the stage. **Can I use it for my team or brand?** Yes. The files you download are yours to use. Use photos you have the rights to, and get permission before featuring someone else's likeness. **How long is the hero video?** 5 seconds: one dramatic reveal animated from the poster still. **What sizes can I get?** Vertical (9:16) for Reels and TikTok, or wide (16:9). The poster still comes in the same shape as the video. **What is a hero reveal video?** A short, dramatic clip that introduces one subject, like a player intro before a game or a product launch teaser. This page builds one around your photo. **Will my subject stay accurate?** Emma keeps the subject as it is, including faces, numbers, logos, paint and product details, but AI video can shift small details. Check it before you post. **Can I use more than one photo?** No, the photo to hero video page works from one photo. For several players or products, make one reveal for each. **What do I post with it?** Each reveal comes with a short hero title of a few words and a one or two line caption you can copy. **Can I make a reveal video for a product launch?** Yes. A product on a plain background works well: Emma stages it under the spotlights and keeps the logo and details as they are. Post the poster as a teaser before launch day. --- ## Pilot Episode Planner https://supercool.com/use/pilot-episode-planner **Plan your TV show's first season.** Pin up your premise, your two leads and the tone. Your AI agent writes the series bible: a logline, characters with wants and flaws, and an 8-episode first season. A series bible is the document that makes a show idea feel real. Pin up your premise, name your two leads and pick a tone, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes one: a title, a one-sentence logline, the format, the world, character profiles with what each person wants and what gets in their way, and an 8-episode first season that builds to a finale. Each episode gets a title and a two-to-three sentence logline, and the whole bible comes as a PDF you can share with a writing partner or a producer. With an account, Emma also makes key art for the show with the title lettered on it. Treat this AI series bible writer as a strong first draft that you then make your own. ### How it works 1. **Write the premise.** Type your show's idea on the big index card, like a retired spy who opens a bakery in a town full of former spies. 2. **Name your two leads.** Give each lead a name and, if you like, who they are: a burned-out surgeon, her chaotic little brother. 3. **Pick a tone and open the room.** Choose Comedy, Drama, Dramedy, Thriller, Dark comedy or Heartfelt, then press Open the writers' room. 4. **Read your season.** Emma writes while you chat about the ending you imagine. The bible lands as index cards that flip to reveal each episode, with the PDF to download. ### What you get - A sharp logline and the show's world - Character profiles with wants and flaws - An 8-episode first season, episode by episode - The whole bible as a PDF to share ### Who it's for - **Aspiring TV writers.** A structured first draft of a bible to rewrite into a pitch. - **Screenwriting students.** A way to see how a premise breaks into a season arc and character wants. - **Novelists.** A look at how a book idea might work as a series. - **Web series and podcast creators.** A season plan to shoot or record from, episode by episode. - **Writing partners.** A shared starting document so the conversation is about the show, not a blank page. ### Ideas to try - Two sisters inherit a failing ski resort and hate each other. Leads: Nora, the uptight older sister; Jess, the free spirit. Dramedy - A hospital night shift where the ghosts help with the patients. Leads: Dr. Amaka Obi, a burned-out surgeon; Walt, a ghost who died in 1962. Heartfelt - A small-town podcast host realizes her true-crime case is about her own family. Leads: Tess Moreno; her estranged dad, Ray. Thriller - Rival food trucks forced to share one parking lot. Leads: Danny, a taco purist; Priya, a fusion upstart. Comedy - Three generations run a funeral home and agree on nothing. Leads: Grandma Lou; her grandson Eli, back from culinary school. Dark comedy - A disgraced chess prodigy coaches a middle school team. Leads: Viktor Hale; Maya, a 12-year-old who never loses. Drama ### On your own or with Emma - **Getting started.** On your own: A blank page and scattered notes With Emma: A full first draft of the bible from your premise, leads and tone - **Season structure.** On your own: Break the season on a whiteboard, card by card With Emma: 8 episodes with titles and loglines, building to a finale - **Characters.** On your own: Leads who are vivid in your head but vague on paper With Emma: Each character gets a role, a want and a flaw - **Sharing it.** On your own: Format a document before anyone can read it With Emma: A PDF series bible titled with your show's name ### Tips - Put the conflict in the premise: who wants what, and what stands in the way. - Give each lead a one-line description; it sharpens their want and flaw. - Tell Emma the ending you imagine, or shows it's like, in the chat. - Rewrite it in your own voice before you pitch it. ### Try it free The free try writes the whole series bible as a PDF: logline, format, world, characters and all 8 episodes. Key art for the show comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Can I use it to pitch?** It's a strong starting draft for a pitch or a writers' room, and the ideas are yours. Expect to rewrite it in your own voice before you send it out. **Can it write the pilot script?** This page writes the bible and the season plan. Ask your agent to draft the pilot's cold open or the full script in a follow-up. **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version writes the whole series bible. Key art and more come with an account and credits. **What is a series bible?** The document that explains a TV show: the logline, the world, the characters and where the season goes. Writers use it to pitch and to keep a writers' room on the same page. **How many episodes does it plan?** Eight, for a first season, each with a title and a two-to-three sentence logline, building to a finale. **Does this AI series bible writer keep my character names?** Yes. Emma keeps your premise and your characters' names as you wrote them. **Can I have more than two main characters?** The page takes two leads, and Emma adds up to two supporting characters. Tell her about anyone else in the chat while she works. **Who owns the ideas?** The premise and characters are yours, and you can use what Emma writes for your own projects. **What format does the bible come in?** A PDF titled with your show's name, plus the bible on the page as cards you can read and copy as text. --- ## Runway Video Maker https://supercool.com/use/runway-video-maker **Send your look down a fashion-week runway.** Drop in a photo of the model or the outfit and pick the show. Your AI agent makes a lookbook still and a 5-second runway walk video. A runway walk sells a look better than a flat product photo. This runway video maker takes one photo, a model wearing the outfit or just the outfit on its own, and sends it down a fashion-week catwalk. Pick the show, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, makes a full-length lookbook still on a long white runway, then animates it into a 5-second walk toward the camera with flashes going off on both sides. Emma keeps the outfit as it is: the cut, color, fabric and details. If your photo shows a model, she keeps their face. If it shows only clothes, she dresses a model in them. The full version adds a one-page lookbook PDF with the still, a look name, every piece listed and a line of styling notes. ### How it works 1. **Put your look at the entrance.** Add a photo to the lit entrance at the top of the catwalk: the model, or the outfit on a hanger or laid flat. 2. **Pick your invitation.** Choose the show: Couture, Streetwear, Swimwear or Bridal. Each sets its own room, from a hushed salon to a sunlit poolside. Then press Send it down the runway. 3. **Chat about the brand.** While Emma styles the look and films the walk, tell her about the brand or the occasion, and she works it into the look. 4. **Watch the walk.** The lookbook still lands first, then the 5-second walk plays on the page, ready to download, with the lookbook PDF in the full version. ### What you get - A 5-second runway walk video - A lookbook still on the catwalk - A lookbook page with the pieces and styling notes - Couture, streetwear, swimwear or bridal shows ### Who it's for - **Fashion designers.** Independent designers who want to show a new piece in motion before a shoot. - **Online boutiques.** Shop owners who want short runway clips for product pages and social posts. - **Fashion students.** Students presenting a collection or portfolio piece in a runway setting. - **Bridal shops.** Stores that want a gown seen walking, not just hanging. - **Stylists and creators.** People sharing outfit ideas who want them to look like they came off a show. ### Ideas to try - A photo of an ivory silk column gown on a dress form, Bridal - My oversized hoodie and cargo pants laid flat, Streetwear - A model in a black tailored tuxedo dress, Couture - A coral one-piece swimsuit with a sheer wrap, Swimwear - A full-length photo of me in a vintage denim jacket and wide-leg jeans, Streetwear - A beaded tulle ballgown from my graduate collection, Couture - A lace two-piece bridal set on a hanger, Bridal ### On your own or with Emma - **Getting a runway shot.** On your own: Book a model, a venue and a photographer. With Emma: One photo becomes a full-length still on a fashion-week catwalk. - **Motion.** On your own: Film and edit a walk yourself. With Emma: A 5-second walk animated from the still, flashes on both sides. - **Only have the clothes.** On your own: Find someone to wear them first. With Emma: Emma dresses a model in the outfit from a hanger or flat-lay photo. - **Lookbook.** On your own: Lay out a page with the look, pieces and notes. With Emma: A one-page lookbook PDF with the still, look name, pieces and styling notes. ### Tips - A full-length photo gives the most faithful result. Make sure the whole outfit is in frame. - Shoot clothes on a plain background with good light so the color and fabric read clearly. - Pick the show that fits the piece: Couture is slow and regal, Streetwear fast with attitude, Swimwear bright and breezy, Bridal soft with petals and candlelight. - Tell Emma the brand name or occasion. It shapes the look name and styling notes. - If you want a second look, send it to Emma in the chat after the first one lands. ### Try it free The free try makes the lookbook still and the 5-second runway walk from your photo. The one-page lookbook PDF comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial makes the lookbook still and the 5-second walk. The lookbook PDF and more looks use credits on your account. **Do I need a photo of a model?** No. A photo of the outfit on a hanger or laid flat works too: Emma dresses a model in it. A full-length photo gives the most faithful result. **Can I use photos of real people?** Only with their permission. The files you download are yours, but the person in the photo gets a say in how their likeness is used. **How do I make a runway video from a photo?** Upload a photo of the model or the outfit and pick a show. Emma makes a lookbook still on a catwalk, then animates it into a 5-second runway walk. **How long is the runway video?** 5 seconds, vertical 9:16, a single walk toward the camera. **Which runway shows can I choose?** Couture, Streetwear, Swimwear or Bridal. Each has its own setting and mood. **Will the outfit look the same as in my photo?** Emma is asked to keep the cut, color, fabric and details exactly. AI can drift on small details, so check the still, and ask her for another take if something's off. **Can I use the runway video for my online store?** You can use what Emma makes for your own projects. Check the rules of the platforms you post to, and only use photos of people with their permission. **Can I make a whole collection?** This page makes one look per run. Send more looks to Emma in the chat afterwards. --- ## Short Film Studio https://supercool.com/use/short-film-studio **Make a short film from one line.** Write your logline on the slate and pick a genre. Your AI agent writes it, shoots three scenes and cuts them into a short film with a title card and a score. This AI short film maker turns one line into a finished short. Write your logline on the clapperboard, pick a genre, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, gives it a title, plans three scenes around one clear lead character, shoots them and cuts them together with a title card and an original score. The film runs about 20 seconds: three 5-second scenes plus the title and end cards. Alongside it you get a festival-style poster with the title and tagline, a one-paragraph synopsis and the shot list. Chat with her while she works about the lead, the ending you want and the feel of the film. ### How it works 1. **Write your logline on the slate.** One sentence is enough, like A lighthouse keeper finds a message from her future self. 2. **Pick a genre.** Tap a festival laurel: Drama, Thriller, Comedy, Sci-fi, Romance or Western. 3. **Press Action.** Emma writes the plan, makes the scenes, the poster and the score, then cuts the film. Tell her about the lead and the ending while she works. 4. **Watch the screening.** The film plays in a little theater on the page, with the poster beside the synopsis and the shot list as program notes. Download the film. ### What you get - A short film of about 20 seconds - A title card and an original score - A festival-style poster - A synopsis and the shot list ### Who it's for - **Aspiring filmmakers.** A quick visual test of an idea before writing a full script or planning a shoot. - **Screenwriters.** A mood piece and a poster to go with a logline when pitching. - **Teachers and students.** A lesson in story structure: setup, turn and ending in three scenes. - **Content creators.** A short cinematic piece to post, with a synopsis ready for the caption. - **Fiction writers.** A teaser that shows the mood of a story they're working on. ### Ideas to try - A lighthouse keeper finds a message from her future self, Sci-fi - Two rival food-truck owners get snowed in together, Romance - The last robot on Earth adopts a stray dog, Drama - A getaway driver who refuses to break the speed limit, Comedy - A sheriff's new deputy turns out to be the outlaw he's been hunting, Western - A night-shift nurse notices the same visitor in every patient's room, Thriller - A grandmother enters her first skateboarding contest at eighty, Comedy ### On your own or with Emma - **Writing.** On your own: Turn a logline into a scene plan and a shot list. With Emma: A title, tagline, three-scene plan and shot list written for you. - **Shooting.** On your own: Find a cast, a crew, a location and gear. With Emma: Three cinematic scenes with one lead and one consistent look. - **Post-production.** On your own: Edit, add a title card, find a score and mix it. With Emma: Cut with dissolves, a title card and an original score in the genre's mood. - **Promotion.** On your own: Design a poster and write a synopsis. With Emma: A festival-style poster and a one-paragraph synopsis. ### Tips - Put a character and a twist in your logline. A clear situation gives three scenes somewhere to go. - Give your logline a place, like a lighthouse or a snowed-in diner. A strong setting keeps all three scenes in the same world. - Pick the genre that fits the ending you want. The same logline plays very differently as a thriller or a comedy. - Describe your lead in the chat early (age, look, what they wear), so Emma can keep them the same in every scene. - Keep it visual. The first cut has no dialogue, so ideas that read in pictures work best. ### Try it free The free try writes your film's title, tagline and synopsis, and makes the festival poster plus the film's 5-second opening shot. The full short, with three scenes, the title card and the score, comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **How long is the film?** About 20 seconds: three 5-second scenes plus the title and end cards. Ask your agent to add scenes or make a longer cut afterwards. **Do the characters talk?** The first cut is visual storytelling with a score. You can ask your agent for dialogue or narration in a follow-up. **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version makes the poster and the film's 5-second opening shot. The full short comes with an account and credits. **What do I need to make a short film with AI?** Just a one-line idea and a genre. Emma writes the title, scenes and shot list, so you don't need a script, a camera or editing software. **Will the main character look the same in every scene?** Emma describes one lead the same way in every scene and keeps one look across the film. AI video can still vary small details from shot to shot. **What do I get besides the film?** A 3:4 festival-style poster with the title and tagline lettered on it, a one-paragraph synopsis, your logline tightened, and the shot list. **Does the film have music?** Yes. Emma makes an original instrumental score of about 20 seconds in the genre's mood and mixes it under the film. **Can I use my own script?** Not on this page: it starts from a one-line logline. You can add details about the lead, the ending and the feel in the chat. **Which genres can I pick?** Drama, Thriller, Comedy, Sci-fi, Romance and Western. The genre shapes the story, the look and the mood of the score. **Can I post a film from this AI short film maker?** Yes, you can use what Emma makes for your own projects. Check the rules of the platforms or festivals you submit to. --- ## Star In Your Own Movie Scene https://supercool.com/use/star-in-your-own-movie-scene **Star in your own movie scene.** Drop in a selfie and pick a scene off the poster wall. Your AI agent films a short cinematic moment with you as the hero, and a matching poster with your name on it. Pick a scene off the poster wall, drop in a selfie, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, casts you as the hero. She makes a cinematic still of you in the scene from your photo, then animates it into two shots, a wide establishing move and a closer hero moment, cut together into one short clip of about ten seconds. You also get a theatrical movie poster with the title and your name in the billing, plus a tagline, a one-line logline and a caption for sharing. Choose a sword duel, a museum heist, a red carpet arrival, a moon landing and more. It's an easy way to star in your own movie scene for a birthday, a group chat or your profile. ### How it works 1. **Pick your scene.** Tap a poster: The Duel, The Heist, Red Carpet, Moon Landing, The Chase, Rain Showdown, Dragon Slayer or Final Frontier. 2. **Drop your selfie.** Drag a selfie into the gold frame or tap to choose one. Type your name under Starring for the poster billing. 3. **Press Roll camera.** Emma films your scene. Tell her your character's name or the mood you want while she works. 4. **Watch and share.** The clip plays behind a curtain here, with the poster and caption ready to download and share. ### What you get - A short cinematic scene starring you - A movie poster with your name in the billing - A title, tagline and caption to share it - Eight famous kinds of scene to pick from ### Who it's for - **Birthday surprises.** A poster and clip that make the birthday person the star, with their photo and their blessing. - **Social media posters.** Something fun and personal to post, with a caption already written. - **Party and event hosts.** A premiere-night poster of the guest of honor for a themed party. - **Movie fans.** A chance to see yourself in the kind of scene you grew up watching. - **Gift makers.** A printed poster of a friend as an action hero, made from a photo they shared with you. - **Content creators.** An eye-catching intro or profile clip that's clearly you. ### Ideas to try - The Heist, my selfie, starring Dana Brooks - Moon Landing, starring Captain Leo Marsh - Red Carpet, my mom's photo for her 60th birthday, starring Rita Alvarez - Dragon Slayer, starring Sam the Bold - Rain Showdown, no name, just me as the hero - Final Frontier, starring Commander Priya Nair - The Chase, starring Marcus Grant ### On your own or with Emma - **Getting the shot.** On your own: Costumes, a set and a camera crew With Emma: Your selfie as the reference for a cinematic still - **Motion.** On your own: Edit footage around a photo yourself With Emma: Two animated shots cut into one short scene - **The poster.** On your own: Lay out a one-sheet in a design app With Emma: A lettered poster with the title and your name - **The words.** On your own: Come up with a title and caption With Emma: Title, tagline, logline and caption included - **Sharing.** On your own: Export, resize and write a caption separately With Emma: A clip, a poster and a caption ready to post ### Tips - Use a clear, front-facing selfie in good light. - A photo of just you makes it clear who the hero is. - Tell Emma your character's name and the mood you want in the chat. - Only upload photos of yourself, or of people who said yes. - Match the scene to the person: Red Carpet for a birthday star, The Heist for the friend who always has a plan. ### Try it free The free try makes a poster-style still of you in the scene, with a title, tagline, logline and caption. The moving scene and the lettered poster come with an account and credits. ### Questions **How long is the clip?** About 10 seconds: two 5-second shots cut together. Ask your agent for more shots or a vertical cut afterwards. **Will it look like me?** It uses your selfie as the reference, so it aims for your likeness, but AI results vary. A clear, front-facing photo in good light works best. **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version makes a poster-style still of you in the scene. The moving scene and the lettered poster come with an account and credits. **Which movie scenes can I choose?** The Duel, The Heist, Red Carpet, Moon Landing, The Chase, Rain Showdown, Dragon Slayer and Final Frontier. **Can I use a friend's photo?** Only if they've agreed. Upload only photos you have the right to use. **Does the clip have sound?** No. It's picture only, so you can add your own music when you post it. **What shape is the video?** Widescreen 16:9. The poster is a portrait 3:4 one-sheet. **What's on the poster?** You in the scene, with the movie title and “Starring” followed by your name lettered on it. **Can I share my movie scene on social media?** Yes, you can use what Emma makes for your own posts. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. **How does it make a movie scene from a selfie?** Emma uses your selfie as the reference for a cinematic still of you in the scene, then animates that still into two shots and cuts them together. **Can I put a different name on the poster?** Yes. The name you type under Starring is the one in the billing, so a nickname or a character name works too. --- ## Storyboard to Film https://supercool.com/use/storyboard-to-film **Turn your storyboard into a film.** Drop your storyboard frames onto the timeline and pick the aspect ratio. Your AI agent animates them and cuts them together into one video with a music bed. A storyboard shows the shots. This page shows them moving. Drop your storyboard frames onto the timeline, put them in order and pick wide, vertical or square. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, animates each frame into a 5-second shot that keeps its look and composition, then cuts them together into one video with a music bed underneath. It's an easy way to turn a storyboard into an animatic or a rough cut you can show a client, a team or a class. Rough pencil sketches and finished art both work, because the motion is built from what each frame already shows. Add a line of direction, like "slow push-ins, moody and quiet", and Emma works it into how every shot moves. ### Real results - Four pencil frames of a night market chase, Wide 16:9: Shot 1 of a 20-second film: the first pencil frame animated, the runner sprinting toward camera (https://supercool.com/use-examples/storyboard-to-film/1.webp) - Four watercolor fox frames, Wide 16:9, gentle motion: Shot 3 of a 19-second film: the fox mid-pounce, still in the watercolor style of the frame (https://supercool.com/use-examples/storyboard-to-film/2.webp) - Four pencil frames of a night market chase, Wide 16:9: Shot 3: the pursuer vaults a noodle stall, cut together with the other shots over a percussion bed (https://supercool.com/use-examples/storyboard-to-film/3.webp) ### How it works 1. **Drop your frames on the timeline.** Add up to four storyboard frames as image files. Reorder them with the arrows or pull one out. 2. **Pick the sequence setting.** Choose Wide 16:9, Vertical 9:16 or Square 1:1, and add an optional line of direction. Then press Cut my film. 3. **Talk mood and music.** While Emma animates the frames, she may ask about the mood and the music you hear for it. Your answers get passed along. 4. **Watch and download the cut.** The finished film plays on the page, shot by shot on the timeline, with a button to download it. ### What you get - Your frames animated as 5-second shots - Cut together in your order, with transitions - Wide, vertical or square - A music bed under the cut ### Who it's for - **Filmmakers and directors.** An animatic of a scene to check pacing and camera moves before the shoot. - **Agencies and ad teams.** Show a client how a storyboarded spot will move before anything is shot. - **Animators and illustrators.** Bring a sequence of drawings to life to test an idea or pitch a project. - **Film and design students.** Turn a storyboard assignment into a short moving cut with music. - **Social creators.** Plan a vertical video as frames, then see it cut together before filming. ### Ideas to try - Four pencil frames of a chase through a night market, Wide 16:9, fast and punchy like an action trailer - Three frames of a coffee brand spot, Square 1:1, warm morning light, gentle motion - Four watercolor frames of a fox in a snowy forest, Wide 16:9, gentle motion, keep my drawing style - Three frames for a phone app ad, Vertical 9:16, quick and upbeat - Four frames of a lonely astronaut on a red planet, Wide 16:9, slow push-ins, moody and quiet - Two comic panels of a superhero landing on a rooftop, Vertical 9:16, dramatic ### On your own or with Emma - **Animating.** On your own: Hand-animating each frame or learning motion software. With Emma: Emma animates your frames as 5-second shots that keep their style and composition. - **Editing.** On your own: Lining up clips and adding transitions in a video editor. With Emma: The shots are cut together in your order with crossfades. - **Music.** On your own: Searching for a track and trimming it to fit. With Emma: An instrumental music bed made as long as the cut. - **Format.** On your own: Re-exporting for each platform's shape. With Emma: Pick wide, vertical or square before you start and the whole cut matches. ### Tips - Put your frames in story order before you press Cut my film. The video follows the timeline exactly. - Choose your strongest three frames for the first three spots. They're the ones that get animated. - Add one line of direction about pace and mood. It shapes how every shot moves. - Draw frames in the aspect ratio you pick, so nothing important gets cropped. - Tell Emma in the chat the music you hear for the piece. ### Try it free The free try animates your first frame into a 5-second shot. Animating every frame and cutting them together with music comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **How many frames can I use?** Up to 4 on this page. The first 3 are animated; a 4th is held on screen with a slow camera move. Ask your agent to animate more in a follow-up. **Will it keep my drawing style?** It animates from your frames, so the look follows them, from rough sketches to finished art. Add a line of direction if you want a different feel. **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version animates your first frame into a 5-second shot. The full cut with music comes with an account and credits. **How long is the finished video?** Each frame becomes a 5-second shot, so up to about 20 seconds with four frames. **What aspect ratios can I choose?** Wide 16:9, Vertical 9:16 or Square 1:1. The music and every shot are cut to match. **Can I turn my storyboard into an animatic?** Yes. That's what this page does: each frame moves as its own shot, cut together in order with a music bed, so you can judge timing and flow. **Does it add new scenes or characters?** No. It doesn't make new images. Each shot is animated from your own frame. **What files can I upload?** Image files of your frames, up to four. Scans, photos of sketches and digital art all work. **Can I choose the music?** There's no music picker on the page. Tell Emma the mood or style you want in the chat while she works, and she'll pass it along. **Can I change the order of my frames?** Yes. Use the arrows on each shot in the timeline to move it earlier or later, or remove it, before you press Cut my film. --- ## Talking Animal Explainer https://supercool.com/use/talking-animal-explainer **Any topic, explained in 30 seconds by a cartoon animal.** Write a topic on the board and pick a teacher: an owl, a fox, an octopus. Your AI agent writes a clear little lesson and turns it into a captioned explainer video taught by your animal. Some ideas stick better when a cartoon owl explains them. This talking animal explainer turns any topic into a 30-second lesson taught by an animal teacher you choose. Write the topic on the chalkboard, pick your teacher, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes a clear, friendly lesson and makes it into a captioned explainer video. The script has four beats: a hook, the explanation, one concrete example and a recap, plus three key points to remember. Your animal appears as a sticker-style cartoon teacher at a green chalkboard who waves, points at the board and gives a thumbs up, with simple chalk diagrams of the key idea in between. The narration uses a character voice that suits the animal, and the captions are burned in. ### How it works 1. **Write today's lesson.** Click the chalkboard and write a topic, or tap one of the suggestions like Photosynthesis, Fractions or Compound interest. 2. **Pick your teacher.** Choose an Owl, Turtle, Fox, Panda, Octopus, Giraffe, Penguin or Frog, then press Start the lesson. 3. **Chat while Emma makes it.** Emma writes the script and makes the teacher, diagrams, voice and video. Tell her who it's for: a child, a class or adults. 4. **Watch, download, add a quiz.** The explainer plays on the page with the script and key points. Download it, or ask for a 3-question quiz card or a printable worksheet. ### What you get - A 30-second explainer video with captions - Your animal as the on-screen teacher - A clear script, beat by beat - The key points to remember ### Who it's for - **Teachers.** A short, friendly opener for a lesson on grammar, science or history that gets a class paying attention. - **Parents and homeschoolers.** Explain the thing your child is stuck on tonight, taught by the animal they like best. - **Tutors.** A quick recap video to send after a session, with key points and an optional quiz. - **Creators of educational shorts.** Bite-size lessons with a recurring animal host for your channel. - **Trainers and explainers at work.** Make a dry concept like budgeting basics approachable for adults, kept general and plain. ### Ideas to try - How volcanoes erupt, taught by the Frog - What a noun is, taught by the Owl, for my 7-year-old - How credit scores work, taught by the Fox, for high school seniors - Why we have seasons, taught by the Penguin - The water cycle, taught by the Octopus, for a third-grade class - Compound interest, taught by the Turtle - How bees make honey, taught by the Panda, for preschoolers ### On your own or with Emma - **Script.** On your own: Squeeze a topic into half a minute and still keep it accurate. With Emma: A four-beat script of about 75 words: hook, explain, example, recap. - **Animation.** On your own: Draw or animate a character, or settle for slides. With Emma: Your animal teacher in three short animated moments, with chalk diagrams in between. - **Voice and captions.** On your own: Record narration, then type and time captions. With Emma: A character voice that suits the animal and captions burned in. - **Follow-up practice.** On your own: Write a quiz or worksheet separately. With Emma: Ask Emma for a 3-question quiz card or a printable worksheet on the same lesson. ### Tips - Keep the topic to one idea. Photosynthesis works better than all of biology. - Tell Emma the age of the viewer so the words and example fit. - Match the teacher to the topic for fun: an octopus for the ocean, a penguin for cold climates. - Watch it once before showing a class, and check the facts against your own materials. - Ask for the quiz card right after the video so the lesson and questions match. ### Try it free The free try makes a picture of your animal teacher and writes the full lesson script with its key points. The narrated, captioned video comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free. The free trial makes a smaller version: a picture of your animal teacher and the full lesson script. The narrated, captioned video uses credits on your account. **What topics work?** Anything that can be explained simply: grammar, science, history, money basics. Money, health and legal topics are kept general and aren't professional advice. **Can I get a quiz or worksheet too?** Yes. Once the video is done, ask your agent for a 3-question quiz card or a printable worksheet on the same lesson. **What is a talking animal explainer video?** A short video where a cartoon animal teaches a topic. Here it runs about 30 seconds, with your chosen animal at a chalkboard, a narrated script, chalk diagrams and captions. **Is it good for kids?** Yes. It's friendly and simple, with captions. Tell Emma the child's age so she pitches the words and example right. **Which animals can teach?** An owl, turtle, fox, panda, octopus, giraffe, penguin or frog. **Is the information accurate?** The script aims to be clear and accurate, but it's short and simplified. Check important facts before you teach them. Money, health and legal topics stay general and aren't professional advice. **What shape is the video?** Widescreen 16:9, which suits classroom screens, presentations and most video players. **Can I use it in my classroom or on my channel?** Yes, you can use what Emma makes for your own lessons and projects. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. **Can a talking animal explainer cover a longer lesson?** This page makes one 30-second explainer per topic. For a bigger subject, make one per idea, or ask Emma in the chat. --- ## Song & Music Video Maker https://supercool.com/use/song-and-music-video **An original song and its music video.** Say what it's about and pick a genre. Your AI agent writes and produces an original song, then makes a short music video for it. This AI song and music video maker turns one sentence into an original track. Pick a genre, finish the line "A pop song about...", and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes the lyrics, produces the song and makes a short vertical music video for it. You chat with her while she works, so you can tell her who it's for or the mood you want. It's built for the songs you can't buy anywhere: a birthday tune with a real name in it, an anniversary song about how you met, a silly anthem about your dog. Everything lands on this page when it's ready. You get the song to play and download, the lyrics laid out verse by verse, and the music video to watch. ### Real results - My dad's 60th birthday, pop: An original pop song, Best Damn Dancer (Sixty Today), with a 15-second music video; a frame from the video (https://supercool.com/use-examples/song-and-music-video/1.webp) - My dog Biscuit who steals socks, country: An original country song, Biscuit, Sock Bandit of the South, with a music video; a frame from the video (https://supercool.com/use-examples/song-and-music-video/2.webp) ### How it works 1. **Pick a genre.** Tap one of the records at the top: pop, hip hop, R&B, gospel, country, rock, EDM or kids. 2. **Say what it's about.** Finish the sentence with who or what the song is about. Names, inside jokes and small details make it feel personal. Then press Make my song. 3. **Chat while Emma works.** Emma writes the lyrics and produces the song, then makes the video. She may ask about the mood or who it's for, and anything you tell her gets passed along. 4. **Play, read and download.** Your song, its lyrics and the music video appear right on the page. Download the song from the player. ### What you get - Original lyrics - A fully produced song - A short music video set to it ### Who it's for - **Gift givers.** A birthday, anniversary or thank-you song with the person's name and your shared memories in the lyrics. - **Parents.** A kids song about bedtime, brushing teeth or a favorite stuffed animal, made in the kids style. - **Teams and clubs.** A victory song for the season, a chant for the finals, or a send-off for a coach. - **Creators.** An original track and a short vertical video to post, made from an idea instead of a stock library. - **Churches and choirs.** A gospel song about a theme, a verse or a moment in your community. ### Ideas to try - My dad's 60th birthday, he still thinks he's the best dancer at every wedding - Our 10th anniversary and the rainy night we met at a bus stop in Chicago - My dog Biscuit who steals socks and hides them under the couch - A thank-you to my mom for raising four kids on night shifts - Our under-12 soccer team winning the finals on penalties - Monday mornings and the first cup of coffee - Moving to a new city and finally feeling at home - My grandma's kitchen on Sunday afternoons ### On your own or with Emma - **Lyrics.** On your own: Staring at a blank page trying to rhyme a name, or paying someone to write for you. With Emma: Emma writes the lyrics from your one sentence, with the names and details you give her. - **Production.** On your own: Learning music software, finding a beat, recording vocals. With Emma: Emma produces a finished song in the genre you tapped. - **Music video.** On your own: Shooting footage, then editing it to the track in another app. With Emma: Emma makes short clips in the song's mood and puts them together with the song. - **Changes.** On your own: Starting over in each tool when you want something different. With Emma: Tell Emma in the chat what to change, and she takes it from there. ### Tips - Put real names and one or two specific memories in your sentence. Details are what make a song sound like it was written for someone. - Say the feeling you want, like "slow and sweet" or "big and silly", alongside the topic. - Pick the kids record for songs aimed at young children, so the words and feel suit them. - Answer Emma's questions in the chat while she works. A line about who the song is for can change the whole lyric. ### Try it free The free try writes your lyrics, produces the song, makes cover art and one 5-second clip for the video. The full music video, cut from several clips and set to your song, comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is the song original?** Yes. Your agent writes and produces a new song from your idea. **Can it be a gift?** Yes: birthdays, anniversaries, thank-yous. Just say who it's for. **Is it free?** Yes, you can try it free. Create an account to keep your song. **Can I upload my own song and get a music video for it?** Not on this page. This AI song maker writes and produces a new song from your idea, then makes the video for that song. **How long is the music video?** It's short: up to three 5-second vertical clips put together with your song. It's made for sharing on your phone, not for a full-length video. **What genres can I pick?** The AI song maker offers pop, hip hop, R&B, gospel, country, rock, EDM and kids. You can add more about the style in your sentence, like "acoustic" or "slow ballad". **Can I choose the voice or the singer?** There's no voice picker on this page. Tell Emma in the chat what you're hoping for and she'll pass it along with the rest of your brief. **Can I post the song on social media?** You can use what Emma makes for your own projects. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. **Can I change the lyrics after it's made?** Yes, with an account. Ask Emma in the chat for different lines or a new take, and she'll make a new version. **What do I get on the page?** The song with a player and a download button, the lyrics by section, and the music video. The song's title, genre and mood show at the top. --- ## Album Cover Designer https://supercool.com/use/album-cover-designer **Three album cover concepts from three words.** Type the album title, the artist and the sound in three words. Your AI agent designs three different front-cover concepts at 3000px, with your title lettered on, to flip through like records in a crate. A release needs a cover before it needs anything else, and most artists don't have a designer on call. This album cover designer starts from three things: your album title, the artist name and the sound in three words. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, turns those into three clearly different front-cover directions, so you can compare ideas side by side instead of settling on the first one. Each concept takes its own route, for example one photographic, one illustrated and one bold typographic or abstract. Every cover is made at 3000 x 3000 px with your title and artist name lettered on it, spelled exactly as you typed them. Each one comes with a short name, a one-line idea and a three-color palette, and they land on the page like sleeves to flip through. ### How it works 1. **Letter the sleeve.** Type your album title and artist name straight onto the sleeve in the record crate. 2. **Give it three words.** Fill the three divider tabs with the sound, such as hazy, analog, tender, or tap the suggested words. Then press Design my covers. 3. **Talk about the music.** While Emma works, tell her the genre, the mood of the songs or the artists you look up to, and she passes it into the design. 4. **Flip through your covers.** Three lettered concepts land on the page with their names, ideas and palettes, ready to download. ### What you get - Three distinct front-cover concepts - 3000 x 3000 px, the size streaming services ask for - Your album title and artist name lettered on - The idea and color palette behind each one ### Who it's for - **Independent artists.** Musicians releasing a single, EP or album who need streaming-size artwork without hiring out. - **Bands choosing a direction.** Groups who want three options on the table to argue over before the release date. - **Producers and beatmakers.** People putting out beat tapes and instrumentals who want each release to look distinct. - **Podcasters and DJs.** Anyone who needs square cover art for a mix, a season or a show. - **Labels and managers.** Small teams who want quick concept directions to brief or test before final artwork. ### Ideas to try - Night Swim by June Harbor: hazy, analog, tender - Concrete Prayers by The Low Hours: gritty, heavy, restless - Golden Static by Mira Okafor: sunlit, euphoric, cinematic - After the Arcade by Pixel Saints: nocturnal, neon, playful - Small Town Weather by Caleb Rhys: dusty, warm, honest - Glass Lungs by HALCYON: icy, cinematic, sparse - Back Porch Sessions by The Hollow Pines: rootsy, warm, nostalgic ### On your own or with Emma - **Getting options.** On your own: Hire a designer for one concept, or spend nights in an editor on a single idea. With Emma: Three distinct directions from your title, artist name and three words. - **Lettering.** On your own: Find a font, place the title, fight with kerning. With Emma: Title and artist name lettered on each cover, spelled as you typed them. - **Size.** On your own: Check what streaming services ask for and resize by hand. With Emma: Every cover is made at 3000 x 3000 px. - **Colors.** On your own: Pull a palette yourself for merch and social posts. With Emma: Each concept comes with a three-color palette in hex. - **Extras.** On your own: Start a new project for a back cover or a looping visual. With Emma: Ask Emma for a back cover from your tracklist or a looping Canvas video. ### Tips - Use three words that describe the feeling, not the genre. Hazy, analog, tender gives more to work with than indie pop. - Spell the title and artist name exactly how you want them printed, including capitals and punctuation. - Tell Emma about one or two artists whose look you like. It helps her aim the directions. - Short titles letter more cleanly on a square cover than long ones. - Pick your favorite concept, then ask Emma for variations on just that one. ### Try it free The free try makes one first cover concept from your words, without lettering, and writes up two more concept directions with their ideas and palettes. The three finished, lettered covers at 3000 x 3000 px come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free. The free trial makes one cover concept from your words, plus two more ideas. The three finished, lettered covers at 3000px use credits on your account. **Can I upload them to Spotify and Apple Music?** They're made at 3000 x 3000 px, the size the big streaming services and distributors ask for. Check your distributor's rules before you upload. **Can I get a back cover too?** Yes. Send your agent your tracklist and ask for a back cover, or a short looping Spotify Canvas video from your favorite concept. **How does an AI album cover designer work?** You give it the album title, artist name and the sound in three words. Emma picks three different visual directions and makes a lettered 3000 x 3000 px cover for each. **What size are the album covers?** 3000 x 3000 px, square. That's the size the big streaming services and distributors ask for. **Will my album title be spelled right?** Emma letters the title and artist name exactly as you typed them. AI lettering can occasionally slip, so check each cover closely before you upload it, and ask her to redo any that's off. **Can I use the album cover commercially?** You can use what Emma makes for your own releases. Check the rules of your distributor and the platforms you release on. **Can I get a cover without text?** Yes. Ask Emma in the chat for a version of your favorite concept with no lettering, if you'd rather add the type yourself. **Can I upload my own photo for the cover?** Not on this page. It designs covers from your words. You can ask Emma in the chat about working from a photo after. **What if I don't like any of the three?** Tell Emma what's missing, a darker mood, a photo instead of an illustration, a different palette, and she can take another pass. --- ## Audio Documentary Narrator https://supercool.com/use/audio-documentary-narrator **Get a documentary narration, mastered with music.** Give a topic or paste your script, then pick a narrator. Your AI agent writes it (with sources) or reads yours word for word, and masters the narration over a music bed. This AI documentary narrator turns a topic or your own script into one finished narration, mastered over a quiet original music bed. Pick a voice, from a deep baritone to a crisp newsreel read, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, casts it, records it and mixes it into a single MP3 you can drop into a podcast, a video or a class project. Give her a topic and she reads a few public sources first, writes a script of about three minutes using only facts from them, and lists those sources under it. Paste your own script and she reads it word for word. Either way, you can chat with her while she works and tell her where the narration is going. ### How it works 1. **Choose Topic or My script.** Leave the deck on Topic and write tonight's documentary on the cue sheet, or switch to My script and paste your narration. 2. **Pick your narrator.** Choose Baritone, Warm, British, Gravelly, Velvet or Newsreel. The note under the channel strips describes each voice. 3. **Press Start the tape.** Emma researches and writes (for a topic), casts the voice, records the narration and masters it over a music bed. Tell her in the chat where it will be used. 4. **Play it and download.** The narration plays on a reel-to-reel on the page, with the script on a cue sheet and, for a topic, its sources. Download the MP3, and ask for chapter markers or a podcast cover after it lands. ### What you get - A mastered narration over an original music bed - A narrator cast to your pick: baritone, warm, British and more - Your script read word for word (about the first 900 words), or one written from sources - The script and its sources, ready to publish ### Who it's for - **Podcasters.** A narrated cold open or a short history segment, mixed and loudness-normalized so it's ready to publish. - **YouTubers and video editors.** A documentary voiceover to lay under b-roll, read word for word from their own script. - **Teachers and students.** A narrated piece of about three minutes on a historical event or a science topic, for a lesson or a school project. - **Museums and local historians.** A narration for an exhibit or a walking-tour stop about a town, a building or a local legend. - **Writers.** Hearing a script read aloud by a documentary narrator to judge its rhythm before recording it for real. ### Ideas to try - How the Apollo 13 crew made it home, with the Baritone narrator - The history of the old textile mill in my hometown of Lowell, Massachusetts, with the Warm narrator - Why octopuses are so clever, with the British narrator - The Great Molasses Flood of 1919 in Boston, with the Newsreel narrator - The night the Flannan Isles lighthouse keepers vanished, with the Gravelly narrator - My own 600-word script about my grandmother's crossing from Naples to New York, with the Velvet narrator - How the Brooklyn Bridge was built, with the Newsreel narrator ### On your own or with Emma - **Research.** On your own: Read sources, take notes and fact-check on your own. With Emma: For a topic, Emma reads a few public sources and lists them under the script. - **The voice.** On your own: Record yourself, or book a voice actor and a studio session. With Emma: A narrator cast to your pick: baritone, warm, British, gravelly, velvet or newsreel. - **Music.** On your own: Find a track that fits, check you can use it, and keep it from fighting the voice. With Emma: An original instrumental bed made for the piece and kept quiet under the voice. - **Mixing.** On your own: Duck the music, add an intro and a fade, and normalize the loudness in an audio editor. With Emma: Mastered into one MP3 with a short music-only intro and a fade-out after the last words. ### Tips - Write your topic as a story with a hook, like the night the lighthouse keepers vanished, rather than a single word. - For your own script, use short spoken sentences and short paragraphs. They sound more natural read aloud. - Keep your script under about 900 words. Past that, Emma narrates the first part, stops at a paragraph end and tells you where. - Write names, numbers and dates the way they should be said, so the narrator reads them the way you mean. - Tell Emma where it's going, a podcast, a video or a museum, so the follow-ups she offers fit. ### Try it free The free try narrates the first minute, about 150 words written from your topic or taken from the start of your script, mixed over a music bed. The full narration comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial narrates the first minute over a music bed. The full narration comes with an account and credits. **If I give a topic, where do the facts come from?** Your agent reads a few public sources first and writes from them, and the sources are listed under the script. Check them before you publish anything that matters. **Can I use the narration in my podcast or video?** Yes. Download the MP3 and use it in your own projects. The voice is AI-generated, not a real voice actor, so say so where the platform you publish on asks you to. **How long is the narration?** About three minutes when Emma writes it from a topic. Your own script can run to about 900 words, roughly six minutes. Past that she narrates the first part and says so. **What file do I get from the AI documentary narrator?** One MP3: the narration mastered over the music bed, loudness-normalized and ready to publish. The script, and the sources for a topic, sit on the page to copy. **Does it read my script exactly?** Yes. Emma reads your script word for word and fixes only obvious typos. **Can I hear the narrator voices before I choose?** Not on this page. Each narrator has a short description under the channel strips, and you hear the voice in your finished narration. **Can I get chapter markers for a podcast?** Yes. After the narration lands, Emma offers chapter markers, which show on the page with their start times, and a podcast cover. **Where does the music come from?** The music bed is an original instrumental made for your narration: soft and slow, with no vocals. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. **Can I use it as a voiceover for a documentary video?** Yes. Download the MP3 and lay it under your footage in any video editor. It works as a documentary voiceover with the music already mixed in. --- ## Business Jingle Maker https://supercool.com/use/business-jingle-maker **A catchy jingle for your business.** Type your business name, say what you sell and tune the dial to a style. Your AI agent writes lyrics that sing your name and produces a 15-second jingle you can use anywhere. A jingle that sings your name sticks in people's heads long after the ad ends. Type your business name, say what you sell, and tune the dial to a style. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes four to six short, singable lines with your name in them at least twice and produces a 15-second jingle with a clear vocal. It ends on a short hook line you can also use as a tagline. The jingle plays on a vintage radio on the page, with the lyrics to copy, a note on the feel of the music and three ideas for where to play it. This business jingle maker works for shops, trades, restaurants and services, in five styles from retro radio to hip hop. ### How it works 1. **Put your name on the plate.** Click the brass plate on the radio and type your business name. 2. **Say what you sell.** Finish the line 'We sell' in plain words, like 'wood-fired pizza and craft beer'. 3. **Tune the dial and press Go on air.** Spin the knob or tap a station: Retro radio, Upbeat pop, Warm acoustic, Doo-wop or Hip hop. While Emma works, tell her where you'll use the jingle. 4. **Play, copy, download.** Your jingle plays on the radio. Download it, copy the lyrics, and ask Emma for a 30-second radio spot or a 3-second sonic logo if you want more. ### What you get - A 15-second jingle that sings your business name - Five styles, from retro radio to hip hop - The lyrics and the hook line, ready to copy - Ideas for where to play it ### Who it's for - **Restaurants and cafes.** A catchy opener for Reels and short ads about the menu. - **Trades and home services.** A plumber's or roofer's name sung clearly, for the phone line's hold music or local radio. - **Shops and makers.** A 15-second sound to open product videos and stories. - **Podcasters and creators.** A short branded sting to start every episode or video. - **Marketing agencies.** Quick jingle drafts to play for a small business client before anyone books a studio. ### Ideas to try - Tony's Pizza, wood-fired pizza and craft beer, Retro radio - Rapid Rooter, same-day plumbing repairs, Upbeat pop - Biscuit & Bone, handmade dog treats, Warm acoustic - Bright Smiles Dental, family dentistry, Doo-wop - Fresh Fade Barbers, sharp cuts and hot towel shaves, Hip hop - Green Thumb Landscaping, lawn care and garden design, Warm acoustic - Sunrise Bakery, sourdough and morning pastries, Upbeat pop ### On your own or with Emma - **Lyrics.** On your own: Hunt for rhymes with your business name and hope the lines scan. With Emma: Four to six singable lines, your name sung at least twice, ending on a hook. - **Production.** On your own: Book a singer, a producer and studio time. With Emma: A produced 15-second jingle with a clear vocal, made while you chat. - **Style.** On your own: Commit to one demo before you've heard it. With Emma: Five styles on the dial. Come back to hear your name in another one. - **What next.** On your own: Work out on your own where a jingle fits. With Emma: Three ideas for where to play it, plus a 30-second spot or sonic logo on request. ### Tips - Keep the 'We sell' line short and plain. One or two things you're known for sing better than a long list. - Match the style to your brand: Warm acoustic for a cafe, Hip hop for a barbershop, Retro radio for a classic diner. - Use the hook line on its own too: on signs, in captions and at the end of your videos. - Put the jingle in the first seconds of a video so people hear your name before they scroll. - If you need something shorter, ask Emma for a 3-second sonic logo built from the hook. ### Try it free The free try makes the full 15-second jingle with its lyrics and hook line. Longer spots, like a 30-second radio spot, and more versions come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial makes the full 15-second jingle with its lyrics. Longer spots and more versions use credits on your account. **Can I use it in ads?** Yes. The jingle is made for you, so you can use it in your videos, ads, phone line and socials. **Can I get a longer version?** Yes. After it's made, ask your agent for a 30-second radio spot with a voiceover, or a 3-second sonic logo from the hook. **How long is the jingle?** 15 seconds, finishing on a clean button ending. That's a good length for the start of an ad, a video intro or hold music. **Will it sing my business name clearly?** The lyrics sing your name at least twice and the music is made to put the name front and center. Listen before you use it, and ask Emma for another take if a word sounds off. **Which jingle styles can I pick?** Five: Retro radio with 1950s close harmonies and brass, Upbeat pop, Warm acoustic with guitar and claps, Doo-wop with finger snaps and piano, and Hip hop over a laid-back boom-bap beat. **Is the music original?** Yes. The jingle is a new song made for your business from the lyrics Emma writes, not a cover of an existing tune. **Can I change the lyrics?** Yes. Copy them from the page, edit what you like, and ask Emma to produce a new version with your words. **What do I need to use this business jingle maker?** Just your business name, a few words on what you sell and a style. No music skills, recording gear or account needed to try it. --- ## Lyric Video Maker https://supercool.com/use/lyric-video-maker **A lyric video for your song, timed to every word.** Upload your song, paste its lyrics and pick an accent color. Your AI agent sets the words in bold Swiss-style type over black and white and times each word to the vocals. A lyric video is often the first video a song gets, and this lyric video maker makes yours in one go. Upload your song, paste the lyrics and pick one accent color. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, sets your words in bold Swiss-style type over black and white, and times every word to your vocals so each one appears as it's sung. Behind the words, the video moves through clean typographic frames: a strict grid with your song title and section names like VERSE and CHORUS, thin rules and one flat shape in your accent. You get one 1920 x 1080 video of the whole song, up to four minutes, ready for YouTube. Your lyrics stay exactly as you wrote them. ### Real results - Brand New Morning, yellow: A frame from the first-chorus lyric video: the word being sung lights up in yellow (https://supercool.com/use-examples/lyric-video-maker/1.webp) - Brand New Morning, yellow: The chorus line in big Swiss type, each word timed to the vocal (https://supercool.com/use-examples/lyric-video-maker/2.webp) ### How it works 1. **Drop in the song.** Add your track to field 01, The song: an MP3, WAV or M4A up to 10 MB. You can play it right there to check it. 2. **Paste the lyrics and pick a color.** Paste the lyrics in field 02, one line per line, marking sections like [Chorus] if you like. Then pick one accent: Pink, Red, Yellow, Lime, Blue or Cyan. 3. **Set it in motion.** Press Set it in motion. Emma may ask for the song title and artist name while she works; tell her in the chat. 4. **Watch and download.** The lyric video plays on the page. Download it, and ask Emma for a vertical version if you want one. ### What you get - A lyric video for your whole song (up to 4 minutes) - Words that appear as they're sung - Bold Swiss typography in black, white and your accent - Ready for YouTube at 1920 x 1080 ### Who it's for - **Independent artists.** Have a lyric video ready on release day without hiring an editor. - **Songwriters and producers.** Share a demo with the words on screen so listeners can follow along. - **Church and worship bands.** Make lyric videos of your own original songs for rehearsal or sharing. - **Bands promoting a single.** Put out a clean, typographic visual that suits a minimal release look. - **Music teachers.** Turn a song your class wrote into a sing-along video with the words timed to the singing. ### Ideas to try - My indie pop single 'Paper Planes' as an MP3, full lyrics with [Verse] and [Chorus] marked, Pink accent - A three-minute acoustic demo exported from my phone, lyrics pasted line by line, Yellow accent - Our band's punk track with two verses and a shouted chorus, Red accent - An original worship song from our church band as a WAV, Blue accent - A lo-fi hip hop track with a short hook repeated four times, Lime accent - My synthwave song with a long instrumental intro and a bridge, Cyan accent ### On your own or with Emma - **Timing.** On your own: Placing every word by hand on an editing timeline. With Emma: Your lyrics lined up with the vocals so words appear as they're sung. - **Design.** On your own: Trying fonts and layouts until something looks right. With Emma: A consistent Swiss grid in black, white and your accent color. - **Accuracy.** On your own: Typos creep in when you retype lyrics into an editor. With Emma: Your lyrics exactly as pasted, with bracketed section labels left off the screen. - **Time spent.** On your own: An evening or more per song in a video editor. With Emma: One full-song video while you chat with Emma. ### Tips - Paste the lyrics in the order they're sung, writing out a repeated chorus each time. - Mark sections like [Verse] and [Chorus]. Emma uses them for the big words on the background frames. - Keep the file under 10 MB. An MP3 export of a large WAV usually fits. - Pick an accent that matches your cover art so the video and the release look like a set. - Songs over four minutes are cut to the first four with a fade. Upload a radio edit if you want a specific ending. ### Try it free The free try makes a smaller version: your first chorus as a lyric clip, timed to the vocals in the same style. The full-song video, up to four minutes, comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free. The free trial makes a smaller version: the first chorus as a lyric clip. The full-song video uses credits on your account. **How are the words timed?** Your agent lines up the lyrics you paste with the vocals in your track, so the words appear as they're sung. Clear vocals time best; heavily layered or effected vocals can drift a little. **Can I get a vertical version?** Yes. Once the video is made, ask your agent for a 9:16 version for Reels, TikTok and Shorts. **What audio files does the lyric video maker take?** MP3, WAV or M4A, up to 10 MB. **How long can the song be?** Up to four minutes. A longer song is cut to its first four minutes with a short fade out, and the page notes it. **What size is the video?** 16:9 at 1920 x 1080, the standard landscape size for YouTube. **Can I choose my own font?** No. The style is set: bold sans-serif type in black and white with one accent from six choices: pink, red, yellow, lime, blue or cyan. **Does it change my lyrics?** No. The words on screen are your lyrics exactly as written. Section labels in brackets, like [Chorus], are left off. **Can I make a lyric video for someone else's song?** Only upload songs you have the right to use, like your own music. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. --- ## Music Video for Your Song https://supercool.com/use/music-video-for-your-song **A music video for your song, starring the artist.** Upload your track and a photo of the artist, then pick a vibe: gritty, dreamy, neon or live show. Your AI agent shoots performance shots of the artist and cuts a 20-second video to your song. You finished the song. Now every platform wants video. This page makes a music video for your song from two things you already have: the track and a photo of the artist. Load the song, pin up the photo, pick a vibe, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, makes a 20-second music video of the artist performing, cut to your own track. Emma finds the song's strongest 20 seconds, usually the chorus, and measures the beat when she can. She creates performance shots of the artist from the photo in three framings, a close-up, a mid-shot and a wide, keeping their face and look recognizable, then animates them and cuts them to the music. Your song is the only sound. The finished video plays on a studio monitor on the page. ### Real results - Best Damn Dancer, Live show: A 20-second live-show cut of the artist from the photo, set to the strongest stretch of the song (https://supercool.com/use-examples/music-video-for-your-song/1.webp) - Biscuit Sock Bandit, Dreamy: A 20-second golden-hour cut of the singer from the photo, with cuts on the beat (https://supercool.com/use-examples/music-video-for-your-song/2.webp) - Biscuit Sock Bandit, Dreamy: From the same video, a wide shot on a porch stage with a crowd (https://supercool.com/use-examples/music-video-for-your-song/3.webp) ### How it works 1. **Load your song.** Drop the track into the tape slot on the console. MP3, WAV or M4A, up to 10 MB. 2. **Pin the artist's photo.** Add a clear photo of the artist to the felt wall, then press a vibe: Gritty, Dreamy, Neon or Live show. When ON AIR lights up, press Roll camera. 3. **Chat about the song.** While Emma works, tell her the song title, the artist's name and what it's about, and she passes the details along. 4. **Watch and download.** The 20-second video lands on the page, set to your track and ready to post or share with the band. ### What you get - A 20-second music video set to your own track - The artist performing, from one photo - Cut on the song's beat, from its strongest section - Four vibes: gritty, dreamy, neon or live show ### Who it's for - **Independent artists.** Singers and rappers who want a visual for a new release without a film crew. - **Bands.** Groups who need a short clip to promote a single on social before the full video. - **Producers.** Beatmakers who want to put a face and a mood to a collaboration. - **Hobby musicians.** Bedroom recording artists who want to share a song as more than a still image. - **Managers and small labels.** Teams who need quick teaser videos for several artists' releases. ### Ideas to try - My synth-pop single midnight_drive.mp3, a photo of me in a leather jacket, Neon - Our garage rock demo, a photo of our singer on stage, Gritty - A slow R&B track, a soft portrait of the artist by a window, Dreamy - A country song for my dad's band, a photo of him with his guitar, Live show - My bedroom-pop chorus as a WAV, a selfie in golden hour light, Dreamy - A drill track, a photo of the rapper in a hoodie on a rooftop, Gritty ### On your own or with Emma - **Shooting.** On your own: Book a location, lights and a camera person, or film on a phone and hope. With Emma: Performance shots of the artist made from one photo. - **Choosing the section.** On your own: Scrub through the track to find the best 20 seconds. With Emma: Emma picks the most energetic stretch, usually the chorus. - **Editing to the beat.** On your own: Line up cuts by ear in an editing app. With Emma: When she can measure the tempo, she trims each shot to whole beats so the cuts land on time. - **Look and feel.** On your own: Grade the footage yourself to get a mood. With Emma: Four vibes: gritty warehouse light, soft hazy gold, neon-lit night or stage lights and a crowd. ### Tips - Use a clear, well-lit photo where the artist's face is easy to see. It's the reference for every shot. - If your WAV is over 10 MB, upload an MP3 version of the same track instead. - Pick the vibe that matches the song's energy, not just the genre. A sad song can still be Neon. - Tell Emma the song title and artist name so the result is labeled properly. - If you want a different 20 seconds than the chorus, tell Emma in the chat. ### Try it free The free try makes a smaller version: cover art of the artist and one 5-second performance shot set to your song. The full 20-second music video uses credits on your account. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free. The free trial makes a smaller version: cover art of the artist and one 5-second performance shot set to your song. The full 20-second video uses credits on your account. **Whose song can I use?** Your own, or one you have the rights to. Upload an MP3, WAV or M4A up to 10 MB. Your agent picks the strongest 20 seconds, usually the chorus. **Will the artist really sing the words?** The shots show the artist performing in the vibe you pick, cut to the beat. Exact lip-sync to the vocals isn't part of the first cut; you can ask your agent for it after. **How do I make a music video for my song with AI?** Upload your track and a photo of the artist, then pick a vibe. Emma makes performance shots from the photo, animates them and cuts a 20-second video to your song's strongest section. **What audio files can I upload?** MP3, WAV or M4A, up to 10 MB. **Which part of my song does the video use?** The most energetic 20 seconds, usually the chorus, starting on a beat with a short fade-out. Ask Emma if you'd rather use a different part. **What shape is the video?** Widescreen 16:9 at 1920 x 1080. Ask Emma in the chat if you need a vertical version for short-form platforms. **Can I make a full-length music video?** This page makes a 20-second cut. After it lands, you can ask Emma about a longer cut or cover art. **Do I need a photo of a real person?** You need a photo of the artist. Only upload photos and songs you have the right to use, and get permission from anyone pictured. **Can I post the music video on social media?** You can use what Emma makes for your own projects. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. --- ## Personalized Birthday Song https://supercool.com/use/personalized-birthday-song **A birthday song made just for them.** Write their name on the cake, add three things they love and pick a genre. Your AI agent writes and sings an original birthday song all about them. A card says happy birthday. A song with their name in it says you thought about them. Write their name, add up to three things they love and pick a genre, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes and sings an original birthday song about them. It has its own melody, not the traditional tune, and runs under a minute. Their name is sung clearly in the chorus and the things they love show up in the verses, so tacos, a dog named Luna or karaoke nights become part of the song. You get the personalized birthday song to play and download, the lyrics, and a warm line to send with it. There are eight genres to choose from, from pop to mariachi. ### How it works 1. **Write their name on the cake.** Type the birthday person's name where it says Their name. 2. **Add what they love and a genre.** Fill in Three things they love (at least one), then Pick a genre: Pop, Country, Rock, Jazz, Mariachi, Disco, Ballad or Kids. 3. **Press Make their song.** Emma starts writing. She may ask how old they're turning or for a fun detail like a nickname or an inside joke; share it in the chat. 4. **Blow out the candles.** Tap the cake to play the song, read the lyrics, download it and copy the message to send with it. ### What you get - An original birthday song, under a minute - Their name and the things they love in the lyrics - Eight genres, from pop to mariachi - A line to send with it ### Who it's for - **Last-minute gift givers.** Send something personal tonight when the party is tomorrow. - **Parents.** A Kids song for a child's party, with their favorite animal and toy in the lyrics. - **Faraway friends and family.** Send a song by text when you can't be there in person. - **Partners.** A ballad about the little things only you know they love. - **Coworkers and teams.** A disco number for an office birthday, played at the start of a meeting. - **Grandparents.** A jazz or country song for a grandchild, or one from a grandchild to you. ### Ideas to try - Maya, loves tacos, her dog Luna and karaoke nights, Country - Grandpa Joe, loves fishing, crossword puzzles and Sunday pancakes, Jazz - Leo, loves dinosaurs, his red scooter and bubble baths, Kids - Priya, loves yoga, spicy noodles and true-crime podcasts, Pop - Carlos, loves soccer, his abuela's tamales and road trips, Mariachi - Jen, loves roller skating, glitter and seventies music, Disco - Sam, loves hiking, black coffee and his cat Pickle, Rock - Mom, loves her garden, mystery novels and long phone calls, Ballad ### On your own or with Emma - **Lyrics.** On your own: Rhyme their name with something, then get stuck on verse two. With Emma: Writes verses about what they love and a chorus that sings their name. - **Music.** On your own: Record yourself singing the usual tune. With Emma: An original melody in the genre you pick, with a clear lead vocal. - **Sending it.** On your own: A card with a line you struggled to write. With Emma: A ready-to-send message to go with the song. - **Getting it made.** On your own: Hire a musician and wait for a custom track. With Emma: Made while you chat with her. ### Tips - Pick specific loves. 'Her dog Luna' sings better than 'dogs'. - Match the genre to them: Mariachi for a party, Ballad for someone sentimental, Kids for little ones. - Use the name they actually go by, like Grandpa Joe or a nickname. - Share their age or an inside joke with Emma in the chat while she works. - Play it at the party, or send the download along with the message line. ### Try it free The free try makes the full song, under a minute, with the lyrics and a line to send with it. More versions, a lyric video or a card use credits on an account. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial makes the full song (under a minute). More versions, a lyric video or a card use credits on your account. **Is it the usual Happy Birthday song?** No. It's an original song with its own melody, written about the person: their name, what they love, in the genre you pick. **How do I send it?** Download the song and send it by text, email or chat. You can also ask your agent for a lyric video or a card to go with it. **Can I make a personalized birthday song with their name in it?** Yes. Type their name and Emma writes it into the chorus so it's sung clearly, with the things they love in the verses. **How long is the song?** Under a minute: a short verse, a chorus with their name, a second short verse and the chorus again. **Do I get the lyrics?** Yes. The lyrics appear on the page in song order, section by section. **What genres can I choose?** Pop, Country, Rock, Jazz, Mariachi, Disco, Ballad and Kids. **Can I make one for a child?** Yes. Pick Kids for a playful song. The lyrics are always kept warm and fun. **What if I only know one thing they love?** That's enough. The page needs at least one; adding more makes the personalized birthday song more about them. **Can I use the song in a video or post it online?** You can use the song Emma makes for your own projects, like a birthday video or a post. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. --- ## Song Lyric Rewriter https://supercool.com/use/song-lyric-rewriter **New lyrics in the shape of a song you love.** Name a song whose structure you love and tell it what yours is about. Your AI agent maps that song's shape, writes original lyrics that fit it line for line, and sings you a demo. You love how a song is built but want it to be about your own life. Name the song, say what your version is about, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, maps its shape: the order of the sections, how many lines each has, roughly how many syllables per line, and the rhyme scheme. Then she writes all-new lyrics on your topic that fit it line for line. You get a section-by-section structure map, the full lyrics, and a sung demo of the first verse and chorus set to an original melody in a style that suits your topic. Only the shape is borrowed, never the words or the tune. This song lyric rewriter is made for toasts, birthdays, inside jokes and songwriters looking for a frame. ### Real results - Jolene, about my cat on my laptop: New lyrics in the shape of Jolene, with a sung demo of the first verse and chorus (https://supercool.com/use-examples/song-lyric-rewriter/1.webp) ### How it works 1. **Name the song.** Finish 'Same shape as' with a song you love, or tap one under 'Borrow the shape of', like Jolene or Hey Jude. 2. **Say what yours is about.** Finish 'but it's about' with your topic: a person, a place, a story or a running joke. 3. **Press Write my version.** Emma maps the song's structure and writes your lyrics. Chat with her about a name, a detail or a joke you want slipped in. 4. **Listen and copy.** The structure map, the lyrics and the sung demo land on the page. Play or download the demo and copy the lyrics. ### What you get - All-new lyrics on your topic - Fitted to the song's sections, line lengths and rhyme scheme - A sung demo with an original melody - The structure map, section by section ### Who it's for - **Wedding and birthday toasts.** Lyrics about the couple or the birthday person, in the shape of a song everyone knows. - **Songwriters.** A proven structure to write against when a new song won't take shape. - **Teachers.** Lyrics about the water cycle or the times tables, built on a familiar song structure. - **Office and team events.** A farewell song for a coworker or a team anthem full of inside jokes. - **Content creators.** Funny lyrics about everyday life for a video, with an original demo to start from. ### Ideas to try - Same shape as Jolene, but it's about my cat who refuses to get off my laptop - Same shape as Hey Jude, but it's about my best friend's wedding - Same shape as Africa by Toto, but it's about our first apartment - Same shape as Bohemian Rhapsody, but it's about quitting my job to bake bread - Same shape as Respect, but it's about my mom's 70th birthday - Same shape as Wonderwall, but it's about a road trip with my sister - Same shape as Happy Birthday, but it's about our dog Pepper turning 10 ### On your own or with Emma - **Structure.** On your own: Count syllables and rhymes by hand, from memory. With Emma: A structure map with sections, line counts, syllables and rhyme scheme. - **Writing.** On your own: Force new words into the old lines until they almost fit. With Emma: All-new lyrics written to fit the map line for line. - **Hearing it.** On your own: Hum it to yourself and hope it works. With Emma: A sung demo of the first verse and chorus to an original melody. - **Originality.** On your own: Easy to slip back into the original's words without noticing. With Emma: Only the shape is borrowed. The words and the melody are new. ### Tips - Pick a song with a structure you know well, so you can hear its shape in your version. - Be specific about your topic. Names, places and small details make lyrics land. - Add the artist if the title is common, like 'Africa by Toto', so Emma maps the right song. - Tell Emma any jokes or names to work in while she writes. - Use the structure map to see which lines are meant to rhyme before you edit anything. ### Try it free The free try writes the structure map and the full lyrics, with a 30-second sung demo. A longer demo and more takes come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free. The free trial writes the full lyrics with a 30-second sung demo. A longer demo and more takes use credits on your account. **Does it copy the original song?** No. Only the shape is borrowed: the order of sections, how long the lines are and how they rhyme. The words are all new, and the demo is sung to a new melody, not the original tune. **Can I get a printable lyric sheet?** Yes. Once your lyrics are written, ask your agent for a printable lyric sheet and it makes one for you. **What does the sung demo include?** The first verse and chorus of your new lyrics, sung to an original melody in a style that suits your topic. Play it on the page or download it. **What is a structure map?** A section-by-section view of the song: each section in order, how many lines it has, roughly how many syllables per line and the rhyme scheme, such as AABB. **What if Emma doesn't know my song?** She uses a common verse, chorus, verse, chorus, bridge, chorus shape instead and says so on the page. **Can I rewrite the lyrics of any song?** Yes, type any song or tap one of the suggestions. The song lyric rewriter borrows only its shape, so the new lyrics never quote the original. **Can I edit the lyrics afterwards?** Yes. Copy them from the page and change what you like, or ask Emma for another take. **Can I post my version online?** You can use what Emma makes for your own projects. The words and demo melody are new; check the rules of the platform you post to. --- ## Personalized Children's Book https://supercool.com/use/personalized-childrens-book **A storybook starring your child.** Give your child's name and a story idea. Your AI agent writes and illustrates a picture book with them as the hero, ready to read or print. A personalized children's book puts your child at the center of the story. Type their name on the cover, pick an adventure or describe your own, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes an 8-page story and illustrates every page with your child as the hero. Add a photo if you want the hero to look like them, or let Emma create a friendly look that stays the same on every page. The finished book lands on this page as a reader you can page through, with a cover and a print-ready PDF. Use it for a bedtime story, a birthday gift, or a gentle way to talk about something new, like a first day at school or a trip to the dentist. Tell Emma a little about your child while she works and she folds it into the story. ### How it works 1. **Write their name on the cover.** Click the cover and type your child's name. Tap “add a face” to include a photo if you want the hero to look like them. 2. **Pick an adventure.** Choose a tile like Dinosaur adventure, Trip to space or First day of school, or dream up your own idea in the box below. 3. **Press Write the book.** Emma starts writing and illustrating right away. Tell her your child's age and favorite things in the chat and she works them in. 4. **Read, download, print.** The cover and pages appear here as a book, with a print-ready PDF to download. ### What you get - An 8-page story written for your child - An illustration on every page - Your child as the hero throughout - A print-ready PDF with a cover ### Who it's for - **Parents at bedtime.** A story where their own child is the brave one, read together at the end of the day. - **Grandparents and godparents.** A gift that feels made for one child, because it was, ready to print and wrap. - **Families facing something new.** A gentle story about a new baby, a new school or a visit to the doctor, with your child getting through it. - **Birthday and holiday gift givers.** Something more personal than a toy, with the child's name on the cover. - **Teachers and caregivers.** A story to welcome a child or mark a milestone, made with their family's say-so. ### Ideas to try - Leo, a dinosaur adventure where he finds a baby triceratops in the backyard - Amara, learning to be brave at her first swimming lesson - Theo, learning to be a big brother when his baby sister comes home - Sofia, a trip to space to help the moon find its lost glow - Jack, who loves trucks, helping build a bridge across the river in his town - Mia and a friendly dragon who is scared of the dark - Noah, his first day of school and the class hamster who escapes ### On your own or with Emma - **The story.** On your own: Fill-in-the-name books swap in a name and keep the same plot for everyone With Emma: Emma writes a new story around your child and the idea you give her - **Illustrations.** On your own: Commission an illustrator or draw each page yourself With Emma: An illustration on every page in one warm picture-book style - **Keeping the hero consistent.** On your own: Hard to make a character look the same from page to page With Emma: The hero keeps the same look throughout, from your photo if you add one - **Getting it printed.** On your own: Lay out text and pictures yourself before you can print With Emma: A print-ready PDF with a cover ### Tips - If you add a photo, use a clear, front-facing one in good light. - Give one specific detail: a pet's name, a favorite toy, or a fear to get past. - Tell Emma your child's age in the chat so the words fit them. - For a big change coming up, frame the idea around it, like “starting at a new school”. - Read it through once before you print it as a gift. ### Try it free The free try writes a 4-page story with 4 illustrations and a cover, put together as a PDF. An account with credits gives you the full 8-page book with an illustration on every page. ### Questions **Do I have to upload a photo?** No. Without one, your agent invents a friendly look for the hero and keeps it the same on every page. **Can I print it?** Yes. You get a print-ready PDF. **Is it free?** Yes. The free try makes a 4-page illustrated story with its cover, as a PDF. Create an account with credits for the full 8-page book. **How long is the book?** The full book is 8 pages, each with its own illustration and a short passage of story, plus a cover. The free try makes a shorter 4-page version. **What age is it for?** The story is written to be age-appropriate for a picture book. Tell Emma your child's age in the chat and she writes for it. **Can I choose what the story is about?** Yes. Pick one of the six adventures on the page, or type your own idea, like a first trip to the dentist or a new baby in the family. **What does the photo do?** Emma uses it as the reference for the hero's look, so the illustrations resemble your child. Only upload a photo you have the right to use, such as one of your own child. **What style are the illustrations?** A warm, consistent picture-book style, the same on every page, so the book feels like one story. **Is the personalized children's book a printed, shipped book?** No, this page doesn't ship printed books. You get a print-ready PDF to print at home or take to a print shop. **How is this different from other personalized children's book makers?** The story itself is written for your child and your idea, not a fixed plot with a name swapped in, and you can chat with Emma about your child while she writes. --- ## Bedtime Story Audio https://supercool.com/use/bedtime-story-audio **A bedtime story starring your child, read aloud tonight.** Give your child's name and a favorite thing. Your AI agent writes a gentle 3-minute story and narrates it over soft music, ready to play at lights out. Some nights you want a new story and have nothing left to read. Type your child's name and the thing they love most, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes an original bedtime story with your child as the hero, about three minutes long. Pick calm and cozy or silly and giggly. Either way, it winds down to a sleepy ending. Emma narrates it in a warm, soft storyteller voice over a quiet lullaby of music box and warm pads, mixed into one bedtime story audio file. It plays on a moon-shaped player with a sleep timer, and the words sit underneath so you can read along. With an account you also get a printable illustrated page of the story's main scene. ### How it works 1. **Write their name.** Tap the line under 'Tonight's story is for' and type your child's name. 2. **Add what they love.** Under 'who loves', type their favorite thing or tap one, like dinosaurs, trains or fairies. Then pick Calm & cozy or Silly & giggly. 3. **Press Make tonight's story.** Emma writes the story and records it. Chat with her about your child's age, a pet or a bedtime ritual, and she can use those details. 4. **Press play at lights out.** The story plays on the moon player. Set the sleep timer, read along with the words, or download the audio for later. ### What you get - An original 3-minute story starring your child - Warm narration over a soft lullaby - A moon player with a sleep timer - The words to read along - A printable illustrated page ### Who it's for - **Parents at bedtime.** A fresh story starring their child when the bookshelf feels worn out. - **Grandparents far away.** A story with the grandchild's name and favorite things, downloaded and sent over for bedtime. - **Babysitters and caregivers.** A calm audio story to settle a child who won't drift off. - **Families on the road.** A downloaded story for the car, a hotel room or a night at a relative's house. - **Preschool teachers.** A gentle story for quiet time, with the class pet as the favorite thing. ### Ideas to try - Maya, who loves her stuffed bunny, Mr. Hops, calm and cozy - Leo, who loves big red tractors, silly and giggly - Ava, who loves the moon, calm and cozy - Sam, who loves a dinosaur who is scared of the dark, silly and giggly - Noor, who loves whales and her baby brother, calm and cozy - Theo, who loves fire trucks and pancakes, silly and giggly - Isla, who loves the fairies she thinks live in the garden, calm and cozy ### On your own or with Emma - **The story.** On your own: Invent a new story at the end of a long day, or reread the same book again. With Emma: An original story built around your child's name and favorite thing. - **Reading aloud.** On your own: Read it yourself every time, tired voice or not. With Emma: Warm narration over a soft lullaby, ready to play again any night. - **Winding down.** On your own: Silly stories can wind kids up instead of down. With Emma: Even silly stories end sleepily, and the music fades out after the last words. - **Extras.** On your own: Find or draw a picture to go with it. With Emma: The words to read along, plus a printable illustrated page with an account. ### Tips - Be specific about the favorite thing: 'her stuffed bunny, Mr. Hops' gives Emma more to work with than 'toys'. - Pick Calm & cozy on nights when they're already tired, and Silly & giggly when they need a laugh first. - Tell Emma their age and a best friend or pet while she works, so the story feels like theirs. - Read the words on the page before you play it the first time. - Set the sleep timer so the story fades out and stops on its own after they fall asleep. ### Try it free The free try makes the full narrated story with its soft lullaby, the words to read along and the moon player. The printable illustrated page comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial makes the narrated story with music. The printable illustrated page comes with an account and credits. **Is the story safe for little ones?** Stories are written to be gentle and age-appropriate, and even the silly ones wind down to a sleepy ending. You can read the words on the page before you play it. **Can I make another one tomorrow?** Yes. Ask your agent for a new adventure, a different favorite thing or a longer story whenever you like. **How long is the bedtime story?** About three minutes of narration, around 430 words. The lullaby fades in at the start and fades out a few seconds after the last words. **Can I download the bedtime story audio?** Yes. The story comes as one MP3 file you can download and play offline on a phone, a tablet or a speaker. **How does the sleep timer work?** Pick 5, 10 or 15 minutes on the moon player. When the time is up, it fades the story out and stops. There's a repeat switch too. **What age is it for?** The stories are written for young children: short sentences, gentle and age-appropriate. Tell Emma your child's age in the chat so she can pitch it right. **Can the story be read in my voice?** Not on this page. The story is read by a warm, gentle storyteller voice that Emma designs for it. **Can I print the story?** With an account, you get a printable illustrated page of the story's main scene with the title on it. The words are on the page to read along either way. --- ## Greeting Card Studio https://supercool.com/use/greeting-card-studio **Make a greeting card that's really about them.** Pick the occasion, say who it's for and something they love. Your AI agent paints a custom card front and writes the message inside, funny or sweet. Most cards on the rack are written for anyone. This AI greeting card maker starts with one person. Pick the occasion, say who it's for and something they love, and choose funny or sweet. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, paints a hand-painted card front built around that detail, with a short greeting lettered on it, and writes the message inside in your tone. You also get two alternate messages to swap in, a print-ready folded 5x7 card as a PDF, and a 5-second animated e-card made from the front, with gentle motion like confetti or petals. Tell Emma an inside joke, a nickname or how you'd like to sign it while she paints, and she can use it. ### How it works 1. **Pick the occasion.** Tap a card in the rack: Birthday, Thank you, Anniversary, Congrats, Get well, New baby, Mother's / Father's Day or Just because. 2. **Finish the sentence.** On the shelf tag, flip sweet or funny, type who it's for, then something they love, like “bad puns and golf”. 3. **Press Make my card.** Emma paints the front and writes the inside. Share a nickname or an inside joke in the chat while she works. 4. **Open, print or send.** The card lands here and opens. Download the front, print the PDF, or send the animated e-card. ### What you get - A custom illustrated card front - The message inside, in your tone - Alternate messages to swap in - A printable card and an animated e-card ### Who it's for - **Last-minute birthday senders.** A card that feels thought through, made the same day. - **Couples.** An anniversary card built around the things only the two of you would get. - **Coworkers and teams.** A thank-you or farewell card for a colleague that's about them, not the office. - **Faraway family.** An animated e-card to send when the mail won't make it in time. - **Parents and grandparents.** New baby, get well and Mother's or Father's Day cards with a personal touch. - **Teachers and coaches.** A thank-you card for a class helper or an end-of-season card for the team. ### Ideas to try - Birthday, funny, for Grandpa Joe who loves bad puns and golf - Get well, sweet, for my best friend Priya who loves tacos and road trips - Thank you, sweet, for Coach Rivera who loves the Lakers - Anniversary, sweet, for my wife Elena who loves gardening and her cat Mochi - New baby, sweet, for the Okafor family who love hiking and their old dog Biscuit - Mother's / Father's Day, funny, for my dad who loves grilling and terrible jokes - Just because, funny, for my sister who loves true crime podcasts and iced coffee ### On your own or with Emma - **The picture.** On your own: Pick whatever is left on the rack With Emma: A one-of-a-kind hand-painted front built around what they love - **The words.** On your own: Stare at a blank inside With Emma: A message in your tone, plus two alternates to choose from - **Printing.** On your own: Size and lay out a folded card yourself With Emma: A print-ready 5x7 folded card PDF - **Sending far away.** On your own: Mail it and hope it arrives on time With Emma: An animated e-card to download and send ### Tips - Be specific about what they love: “her cat Mochi” gives Emma more than “cats”. - Tell Emma how you'd like to sign it; otherwise the sign-off is a warm closing. - Funny works best with one real detail to tease about. - Check how names are spelled before you print. - Print the folded card on heavy card stock so it stands up. ### Try it free The free try paints your card's front picture and writes the message inside, with a sign-off and two alternates. The printable folded card and the animated e-card come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial makes the illustrated card front and writes the message inside. The printable folded card and the animated e-card come with an account and credits. **Can I print it?** Yes. With an account, your agent lays the front and inside out as a print-ready PDF. You can also download the front picture and print it yourself. **Can I change the message?** Yes. You get a few alternates to swap in, and you can ask your agent in the chat to rewrite it or redo the picture. **What size is the printable card?** A 5x7 folded card, laid out as a print-ready PDF with the front and the inside message. **What is the animated e-card?** A 5-second clip made from your card front, with gentle motion like confetti, sparkles or petals. Download it and send it by text or email. **Does the front have writing on it?** Yes. The full card has a short greeting lettered on the front, like “Happy Birthday, Mom”, spelled the way you gave it. **Which occasions does it cover?** Birthday, Thank you, Anniversary, Congrats, Get well, New baby, Mother's / Father's Day and Just because. **Can I tell it what to say?** Yes. Tell Emma in the chat what you want the message to say and she fits it to the card. **What style does the AI greeting card maker use?** A charming hand-painted look with generous margins, like a card from a small stationery shop. **Can I make a card for a group?** Yes. Type the group, like “the night shift crew”, and something they share, and Emma writes it to all of them. --- ## Invitation Designer https://supercool.com/use/invitation-designer **A beautiful invitation for your occasion, ready to print.** Write the names, the date and the place and pick a style. Your AI agent designs a printable invitation, plus a matching RSVP card and a version to text to guests. The Invitation Designer makes a printable invitation for a wedding, birthday, baby shower, graduation, dinner party or retirement. Write the names, the date and time and the place right on the card, pick a style, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, designs it on textured paper with your wording lettered in, spelled exactly as you wrote it. The full set adds a 5x7 inch print PDF, a matching RSVP card, a tall phone-friendly version to text to everyone you're inviting, and a short message to send with it. The wording sits beside the card so you can check every letter before you print. While she works, tell her about a reply-by date or a dress code to add. ### How it works 1. **Write on the card.** Type the names, the date and time, and the place right on the invitation, like Ana & Luis, Saturday, June 12 at 4 pm, The Garden House, Napa. 2. **Pick the occasion and the style.** Choose the occasion (Wedding, Birthday, Baby shower, Graduation, Dinner party or Retirement) and the style: Classic, Botanical, Modern, Whimsical or Art deco. 3. **Press Design my invitation.** Emma designs it with every detail spelled as you wrote it. Tell her in the chat about a reply-by date or dress code. 4. **Check, then print or send.** The invitation slides out of its envelope with its wording beside it. Download the image or the print PDF, and open the RSVP card and phone version. ### What you get - A printable invitation with your details - A print-ready PDF - A matching RSVP card - A phone-friendly version and a message to send with it ### Who it's for - **Couples.** A wedding invitation with a matching RSVP card, in a style that fits the day. - **Parents.** A birthday or baby shower invite to print at home and send to the group chat. - **Graduates and their families.** A graduation party invitation with the date, time and place clear at a glance. - **Hosts.** A dinner party invitation that looks considered, sent straight to phones. - **Coworkers and friends.** A retirement party invitation for a colleague, ready the same day you plan it. ### Ideas to try - Ana & Luis, Saturday, June 12 at 4 pm, The Garden House, Napa: a Botanical wedding invitation - Maya turns 30, Friday, March 5 at 8 pm, The Blue Room, Austin: a Modern birthday invitation - Priya & Sam, Sunday, April 25 at 1 pm, Grandma's backyard in Pasadena: a Whimsical baby shower - Jordan Lee, Saturday, May 22 at 3 pm, 14 Elm Street, Columbus: a Classic graduation party - The Okafors, Saturday, November 6 at 7 pm, our place on Linden Avenue: an Art deco dinner party - Linda Park, Thursday, December 9 at 5 pm, Rosie's Tavern, Portland: a Classic retirement party ### On your own or with Emma - **Design.** On your own: Start from a template and fight the layout to fit your names. With Emma: Designed around your details in the style you pick. - **Matching pieces.** On your own: Find or build an RSVP card and a phone version separately. With Emma: A matching RSVP card and a phone-friendly version from the same design. - **Printing.** On your own: Resize and export for the right card size. With Emma: A 5x7 inch print PDF with a thin white border. - **Sending.** On your own: Write the text to go with it yourself. With Emma: A short message to send with the phone version, ready to copy. ### Tips - Write the names, date and place exactly as they should appear, with the capitals and punctuation you want. Emma letters them as written. - Keep the place short, like the venue and the city. Put longer directions in the message you send with it. - Check the wording beside the card letter by letter before you print, and ask Emma to fix anything that slipped. - Mention a reply-by date or a dress code in the chat while she works, so it can go on the card. - Print on heavier card stock for a more finished feel. ### Try it free The free try designs the invitation with your details, writes its wording and a short message to send with it. The 5x7 print PDF, the matching RSVP card and the phone-friendly version come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial designs the invitation with your details and its wording. The print PDF, the RSVP card and the phone version come with an account and credits. **Will the names and date be spelled right?** Your agent letters them exactly as you wrote them, but AI images can occasionally slip a letter, so the page shows the wording beside the card for you to check. Ask your agent to fix anything before you print. **What size does it print?** The print PDF is a 5x7 inch card, the standard invitation size, which any print shop or home printer can handle. **What occasions can I design an invitation for?** Weddings, birthdays, baby showers, graduations, dinner parties and retirements. Pick the occasion on the page and Emma writes the wording to match. **What styles are there?** Classic, Botanical, Modern, Whimsical and Art deco. Each changes the lettering, the decoration and the feel of the card. **Can I text the invitation instead of printing it?** Yes. The phone-friendly version is a tall image made to send by text or messaging app, and Emma writes a short message to go with it. **Can I add a reply-by date or an RSVP?** Yes. Tell Emma the reply-by date while she works and it goes into the wording. The matching RSVP card has a Kindly reply line with space for a name and whether they're attending. **Can I change the wording after it's made?** Yes. Ask Emma in the chat to change a line or fix a letter before you print. **Is this an invitation maker I can print at home?** Yes. The printable invitation comes as a 5x7 inch PDF with a thin white border, so a home printer or any print shop can handle it. --- ## Kids' Cartoon Episode https://supercool.com/use/kids-cartoon-episode **A little cartoon starring your child's favorite animal.** Tap a star and a lesson (sharing, bedtime, brushing teeth). Your AI agent writes, draws, animates and narrates a 30-second cartoon you can watch together. Little kids learn a lot from a short story with a friendly star. Pick your child's favorite animal and a lesson, like sharing, bedtime or brushing teeth, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes, draws, animates and narrates a 30-second cartoon episode about it. The star is an original character, drawn the same way in every scene. The episode is five scenes in a bright picture-book style, told by a warm narrator over soft music, with captions on screen. Under the player you get the scenes and narration as a read-along, plus a one-line moral your child can repeat. This kids' cartoon episode maker uses big picture tiles, so a child who can't read yet can choose. ### How it works 1. **Pick the star.** Under 'Who's the star?', tap a tile like Puppy, Dinosaur or Robot, or type their own favorite, such as the family dog. 2. **Pick the lesson.** Under 'What's the lesson?', tap Sharing, Bedtime, Brushing teeth, Being brave or another tile, or type a lesson of your own. 3. **Press Make the cartoon.** Emma writes a five-scene story and starts drawing. Chat with her about your child's age or what they call the character. 4. **Watch together.** The cartoon plays on the TV on the page. Download it, read the story along, or ask Emma for a sing-along chorus or a coloring page of the star. ### What you get - A 30-second narrated cartoon with captions - Your child's favorite animal or character as the star - A gentle lesson told as a story - The scenes and narration as a read-along ### Who it's for - **Parents of toddlers and preschoolers.** A short cartoon that turns a tricky routine, like the potty or brushing teeth, into a story. - **Grandparents.** A cartoon starring the grandchild's favorite animal, to watch together on a visit or a video call. - **Preschool and kindergarten teachers.** A quick episode about sharing or tidying up to start a circle-time talk. - **Childcare providers.** A gentle way to introduce a routine like naps or washing hands. - **Families facing a first.** Starting school or being brave at the dentist, told as a calm story before the day comes. - **Parents of picky eaters.** A Trying new food episode where the favorite animal bravely tastes something green, watched right before dinner. ### Ideas to try - Our dog Biscuit, learning to wait your turn - A shy octopus, being brave on the first day of school - Dinosaur, trying new food - Rosie the firetruck, tidying up toys before bed - A sparkly mermaid, saying sorry to a friend - Bunny, using the potty - Robot, gentle hands with a new baby sister ### On your own or with Emma - **Story.** On your own: Make up a story about the lesson on the spot. With Emma: A five-scene story with narration that ends on the lesson. - **Pictures.** On your own: Draw it yourself or search for a video that almost fits. With Emma: Original picture-book scenes starring the character your child chose. - **Sound and motion.** On your own: Juggle drawing, voice recording and editing apps. With Emma: Animated scenes, warm narration, soft music and captions in one video. - **The star.** On your own: Fall back on studio characters your child already knows. With Emma: An original star made in the spirit of your child's idea. ### Tips - Let your child tap the star and the lesson. Choosing it themselves makes them keener to watch. - Make the star specific: 'our dog Biscuit, brown with a blue collar' gives a character your child will recognize. - Pick one lesson per episode. A short story works best with one clear message. - Tell Emma your child's age and the name they use for the character while she works. - Watch it together and say the moral out loud at the end. ### Try it free The free try makes a smaller version: a short three-sentence story with its moral, a storybook picture of the star and a 5-second animated moment. The full 30-second cartoon with narration, music and captions comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free. The free trial makes a smaller version: a storybook picture of the star and a 5-second animated moment. The full 30-second cartoon uses credits on your account. **Can my child pick without reading?** Yes. The stars and lessons are big picture tiles, so little ones can tap their own. You can also type any character or lesson you like. **Can I use a famous cartoon character?** It works best with your child's own ideas: an animal, a pet, a made-up friend. Characters owned by studios can't be copied, so your agent makes an original character in the same spirit. **How long is the cartoon?** About 30 seconds, told in five scenes with narration, a soft music bed and captions. **Is the cartoon wide or vertical?** Wide, in 16:9, so it fits a TV, a laptop or a tablet held sideways. **Does the cartoon have sound?** Yes. A warm storyteller narrates over cheerful, soft music, and the narration also appears on screen as captions. **Can I put my child's photo in the cartoon?** Not on this page. The star is a character your child picks or describes, like an animal, a pet or a made-up friend. **What age is it for?** It's made for young children: bright, gentle and simple, with the lesson told as a story rather than a lecture. **Can I download the cartoon for kids to watch offline?** Yes. The finished episode has a download button, so you can save it and watch it without a connection. **Can I get a coloring page of the star?** Yes. After the cartoon lands, ask Emma for a printable coloring page of the star or a short sing-along chorus. --- ## Kids Learning Video https://supercool.com/use/kids-learning-video **A sing-along learning video starring their favorite character.** Pick what they're learning, how old they are and who sings it. Your AI agent writes a catchy song and animates a 30-second sing-along video, while you chat with it. This kids learning video maker writes the song too. Pick what your child is learning, how old they are and who sings it. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes an original, catchy song that teaches the topic at their level, then animates a 30-second sing-along in a bright, toy-like style, with the character looking the same in every shot. The words appear on screen as they're sung, karaoke style, so little ones can follow along. You also get a one-page printable activity sheet on the same topic: tracing, counting, matching or coloring, pitched for their age. Tell Emma your child's name or what they love while she works and she can slip it in. ### How it works 1. **Pick what they should learn.** Tap a block like The alphabet, Counting to 10 or Animal sounds, or type your own topic, like brushing our teeth. 2. **Choose an age and a singer.** Tap their age, 2 to 6, then pick who sings it: a friendly dinosaur, a bouncy bunny, a silly robot, a wise owl, a teddy bear, or your own idea. 3. **Press Make the sing-along.** Emma writes the lyrics, produces the song and animates the show. Chat with her about your child meanwhile. 4. **Play, sing, print.** The video plays on the toy TV here, with the song, the lyrics and the activity sheet to download. ### What you get - A 30-second animated sing-along video - An original, age-right song that teaches the topic - The words on screen to sing along with - A printable activity sheet to go with it ### Who it's for - **Parents of toddlers.** A short song about exactly what their child is working on this week. - **Preschool and kindergarten teachers.** A sing-along to open a lesson, with a matching worksheet for afterwards. - **Homeschooling families.** A fresh song for each new topic, from shapes to days of the week. - **Grandparents and babysitters.** Something to watch and sing together that teaches a little along the way. - **Kids' content creators.** Original songs and characters rather than borrowed ones. ### Ideas to try - Counting to 10, age 3, a friendly dinosaur - The alphabet, age 5, a silly robot - Brushing our teeth, age 2, a bouncy bunny - Days of the week, age 4, a wise owl - Opposites: big and small, age 3, a dancing pineapple named Pip - The planets, age 6, an astronaut cat named Comet - Saying please and thank you, age 4, a teddy bear ### On your own or with Emma - **The song.** On your own: Hunt for a song that teaches exactly this topic With Emma: An original song written for the topic and your child's age - **The character.** On your own: Settle for whoever is in the video you find With Emma: The character your child picks, the same in every shot - **Reading along.** On your own: Add captions by hand, or go without With Emma: The words on screen, following the singing - **Practice off screen.** On your own: Search for a worksheet that matches With Emma: A printable activity sheet on the same topic - **Matching the age.** On your own: Videos pitched at a broad age range With Emma: Words, line length and repetition set for the age you pick ### Tips - Pick their real age: the song is simpler for a 2-year-old and covers more at 5 or 6. - Give Emma your child's name in the chat so she can work it into the song. - Narrow the topic: “counting to 5” or “colors of the rainbow” teaches better than “math”. - Describe your own character in a few words: what it is and one fun detail. - Watch it first, then sing along together. ### Try it free The free try writes and produces the sing-along song and makes a cover picture of your character. The animated 30-second video and the printable activity sheet come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial makes the sing-along song and a cover picture. The animated 30-second video and the printable activity sheet come with an account and credits. **Is it right for my child's age?** Your agent writes for the age you pick: simple words, short lines and lots of repetition for toddlers, a little more to learn for older kids. Have a listen before you play it for them. **Can I use a character from a TV show?** It makes original characters, not copyrighted ones. Describe the kind of character your child loves and your agent makes one in that spirit. **How long is the video?** 30 seconds, widescreen 16:9, with the song sung all the way through. **Is the song sung, or just music?** It's sung, with a clear, friendly vocal in a bright kids' sing-along style. **What's on the activity sheet?** A one-page US Letter PDF with a big title and a tracing, counting, matching or coloring exercise on the topic, pitched for your child's age. **Can I make a video about any topic?** Yes. Type your own, from brushing teeth to the planets. Simple, concrete topics work best for a 30-second song. **Can I download the song on its own?** Yes. The song is its own file you can download and play anywhere, alongside the video. **What ages is this kids learning video maker for?** The page offers ages 2 to 6, and Emma pitches the words, the length of the lines and the repetition to the age you pick. **What do the visuals look like?** Bright, rounded, toy-like 3D scenes in a colorful playroom, with no letters in the pictures themselves; the words come from the lyrics on screen. --- ## Nursery Rhyme Video Maker https://supercool.com/use/nursery-rhyme-video-maker **Turn any nursery rhyme into a sing-along video.** Pick a classic rhyme (or write your own words) and a world. Your AI agent sings it and animates it in a soft, plush style, with the words on screen to sing along. Little ones love a song they can sing along to. This nursery rhyme video maker turns a classic rhyme, or a little rhyme you write yourself, into a 30-second animated video. Pick the rhyme and a world like a farm, the ocean or space. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, sings it as a gentle children's song and animates it in a soft, pastel plush-toy style. The words appear on screen as they're sung, so kids can follow along. Classic rhymes use their traditional words. Your own words are sung exactly as you wrote them, which makes it easy to slip in a child's name or a daily routine. The video plays inside a music box on the page, and you can download the video and the song. ### How it works 1. **Pick a rhyme.** Tap a classic like Twinkle, Twinkle, Little Star or The Wheels on the Bus, or tap My own words and write your rhyme. 2. **Pick a world.** Choose where it happens: Farm, Ocean, Space, Jungle, Candy land or Snowy forest. 3. **Open the music box.** Press Open the music box. While Emma sings and animates, tell her who it's for, their age or a name to slip in. 4. **Sing along and download.** The video plays in the music box with the lyrics on screen. Download the video or the song, or copy the words. ### What you get - A 30-second animated rhyme video - The rhyme sung as a gentle song - On-screen lyrics that follow the singing - Your own words welcome, not just the classics ### Who it's for - **Parents and grandparents.** Make a sing-along for a toddler, with their name in the song or their favorite animals in the world. - **Preschool and kindergarten teachers.** Turn a classroom routine, like tidy-up time or handwashing, into a song kids remember. - **Nannies and childminders.** Have a new song ready for circle time or the car ride. - **Kids' channel creators.** Make short animated rhyme videos in one consistent, gentle style. - **Gift givers.** Make a personal song video for a first birthday or a new baby. ### Ideas to try - Twinkle, Twinkle, Little Star in Space - Old MacDonald Had a Farm, set in the Jungle for a twist - My own words: Little Mia brushes, brush brush brush, round and round without a rush. Snowy forest. - The Wheels on the Bus in Candy land - My own words about putting shoes on: left foot, right foot, out the door we go. Farm. - Row, Row, Row Your Boat in the Ocean - My own words for Leo's second birthday, about his toy dinosaur and his big sister Ava. Jungle. - Itsy Bitsy Spider in a Snowy forest ### On your own or with Emma - **The song.** On your own: Recording yourself singing, or hunting for a track you can use. With Emma: The rhyme sung as a gentle children's song with music box, ukulele and soft bells. - **Animation.** On your own: Generic cartoons that don't match your rhyme or world. With Emma: Scenes in a soft plush-toy style set in your world, the same characters throughout, with gentle motion. - **Lyrics on screen.** On your own: Typing and timing captions by hand. With Emma: Words that follow the singing. - **Personal touch.** On your own: Ready-made videos that can't include your child's name. With Emma: Your own words, sung exactly as you wrote them. ### Tips - Keep your own words short. A verse or two fills about 30 seconds of singing. - Rhyme the line endings and keep a steady beat so it sings naturally. - Match the world to the rhyme, or mix them on purpose: Old MacDonald in space is a fun surprise. - Tell Emma the child's name and age in the chat so she can make it theirs. ### Try it free The free try sings your rhyme as a song and makes a cover picture in your chosen world. The animated video with on-screen lyrics comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free. The free trial makes a smaller version: the rhyme sung as a song with a cover picture. The animated video with on-screen lyrics uses credits on your account. **Can I use my own words?** Yes. Tap "My own words" and write a little rhyme about your child, a routine or anything at all. Your agent sings exactly what you write. **Can I post it on YouTube?** The classic rhymes are traditional and your video is yours to share. Ask your agent afterwards for a thumbnail and a description to go with it. **How long is the nursery rhyme video?** About 30 seconds, in landscape 1920 x 1080, with the song, the animation and the lyrics on screen. **Which nursery rhymes can I pick?** Twinkle, Twinkle, Little Star; Old MacDonald Had a Farm; The Wheels on the Bus; Itsy Bitsy Spider; Row, Row, Row Your Boat; Baa, Baa, Black Sheep; and Humpty Dumpty. For any other rhyme, choose My own words and type it in. **What does the animation look like?** Soft pastel scenes in a plush, felt-toy style, set in the world you picked, with the same characters in every scene and gentle movement. **Can I put my child's name in the song?** Yes. Write your own words with their name in them, and Emma sings exactly what you wrote. **Can I download just the song?** Yes. The song and the video each have their own download, and you can copy the words. **Can I use it in my classroom?** Yes, you can use what the nursery rhyme video maker makes for your own lessons and projects. --- ## Old Photo Restorer https://supercool.com/use/old-photo-restorer **Bring an old family photo back to life.** Drop in an old or damaged photo. Your AI agent repairs the scratches and fading, sharpens it and brings its colors back, with a before/after slider. The Old Photo Restorer brings a faded, scratched or torn family photo back to life. Drop in a scan or a phone picture of the print, add who and when if you know, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, repairs the damage, gently sharpens faces and colorizes it, keeping every person and the composition exactly as they are. You get the repaired photo in its original black-and-white or sepia tone and a naturally colorized version, with a before/after slider to compare against the original. Name a color you remember, like a sky blue dress, and Emma uses it. If you'd like, she can also make a gentle living-photo animation: a blink or a slight smile, with nothing added. ### How it works 1. **Drop the old photo here.** Add a scan, or a phone picture of the print, between the album's photo corners. 2. **Write a caption (optional).** Under the photo, note who, when and what colors, like Grandma Rose, 1952, her dress was sky blue. 3. **Press Restore my photo.** Emma repairs and colorizes it while you chat about the people in it. Tell her if you'd like a living photo too. 4. **Compare and download.** Drag the before/after slider, switch between the restored and colorized versions, see what was fixed, and download them. ### What you get - Scratches, tears, dust and fading repaired - A colorized version, with your hints about the colors - A before/after slider to compare - A gentle living-photo animation, if you ask for one ### Who it's for - **Family historians.** Repairing prints for a family tree, a reunion display or a shared album. - **Grandchildren.** A colorized photo of grandparents as a gift, framed or printed in a card. - **Families planning a memorial.** A clear, repaired photo of a loved one for a service program or slideshow. - **Scrapbookers.** Clean versions of fragile prints to reprint, so the originals can stay safely stored. - **Local historians.** Restoring old photos of a town, a shop front or a community event. ### Ideas to try - Grandma Rose, 1952, her dress was sky blue - Dad's first car, summer of '68, it was cherry red - Our wedding day, 1979, the bridesmaids wore yellow - My great-grandparents on their farm in Iowa, around 1915 - Mom's high school graduation, 1964, a creased and faded print - Uncle Joe in his Navy uniform, 1944 - The whole family at the lake in the 1950s, the boat was green ### On your own or with Emma - **Repair.** On your own: Clone out scratches and tears by hand in a photo editor. With Emma: Scratches, dust, creases and tears repaired, and faded contrast recovered. - **Color.** On your own: Paint color layer by layer and guess at skin tones. With Emma: Natural, period-appropriate colors, using any you name. - **Keeping it true.** On your own: Easy to over-smooth faces until they look like someone else. With Emma: Every person and face kept as they are, with no beautifying. - **Comparing.** On your own: Flip back and forth between two files. With Emma: A before/after slider right on the page. ### Tips - Take the print out of a glossy album sleeve or frame before you photograph it, to avoid reflections. - Name the colors you know in the caption. Anything you don't name is a guess from the photo and the era. - Add the year or decade, so the colors fit the period. - Crop close to the photo itself, one print at a time, so the restoration focuses on it. - Chat about the people in the photo while Emma works. Names, dates and colors you mention get passed along to the restoration. ### Try it free The free try gives you one restored, colorized version of your photo with the before/after slider. A separate restoration in the original black-and-white or sepia tone, and the living-photo animation, come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial gives you one restored, colorized version with the before/after slider. A separate black-and-white restoration and the living photo use credits on your account. **How accurate are the colors?** They're an AI's best guess from the photo and the era. If you know a color (a blue dress, a red car), write it in the caption and Emma uses it. Badly damaged areas are filled in, so check faces against the original. **What kind of photo works best?** A flat, well-lit scan works best, but a phone photo of the print is fine: hold the phone straight above it and avoid glare. Your original is never changed. **Can it fix a torn or creased photo?** Yes. Emma removes scratches, dust, creases and tears and recovers faded contrast. Where part of the photo is missing she fills it in, and the result notes anything she had to guess. **Will it change how people look?** It's made not to. Faces are gently sharpened, but every person, face and the composition are kept as they are, with no beautifying. Check faces against the original all the same. **Can I keep the photo black and white?** Yes. The full version includes a restored copy in the original black-and-white or sepia tone, alongside the colorized one. **Does it work on faded color or sepia photos?** Yes. Fading and lost contrast are recovered either way. The restored version keeps the photo's original black-and-white or sepia tone, and the colorized version brings natural color back. **What is a living photo?** A 5-second animation made from the colorized version, with subtle natural motion like a blink, a slight smile or a small head turn. Ask Emma for one in the chat. **Can I restore several old photos at once?** This old photo restorer works on one photo at a time. When one is done, start again with the next. **Can I colorize old photos of people I don't know?** Only upload photos you have the right to use. You can use what Emma makes for your own projects, like a family album or a gift. --- ## Bible Story Shorts https://supercool.com/use/bible-story-shorts **Turn a Bible story into a narrated short.** Pick a story from the stained glass and a style. Your AI agent makes a narrated vertical short with the key verse and its reference on screen, ready for Reels, TikTok or Shorts. Bible Story Shorts turns a passage you love into a narrated vertical video for Reels, TikTok or YouTube Shorts. Pick a story from the stained-glass tiles, or name another, and choose a style. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes a plain-language retelling, makes three reverent shots in that style, and records warm narration over a gentle music bed. The story and its reference appear at the start, and the key verse closes the short on screen, quoted word for word from the World English Bible, a public-domain translation. You also get a caption and hashtags to post it. It's a short retelling, not a substitute for the passage, so it works best alongside reading the full text together. ### Real results - The Good Samaritan, gentle animation: A frame from the 33-second narrated short: the Samaritan binds the traveler's wounds (https://supercool.com/use-examples/bible-story-shorts/1.webp) - David and Goliath, live-action epic: A frame from the 28-second short: David with his sling before Goliath, verse 1 Samuel 17:45 at the end (https://supercool.com/use-examples/bible-story-shorts/2.webp) - The Good Samaritan, gentle animation: The closing shot, with Luke 10:37 from the World English Bible on screen (https://supercool.com/use-examples/bible-story-shorts/3.webp) ### How it works 1. **Pick a story.** Tap one of the twelve stained-glass tiles, from Creation to The Empty Tomb, or type another story, like Ruth and Naomi. 2. **Choose a style.** Press a wax seal: Live-action epic for cinematic, sweeping shots, or Gentle animation for something soft and family-friendly. 3. **Press Make my short.** Emma looks up the key verse, then makes the shots, narration and music. Tell her who it's for, like a Sunday school class or your church page. 4. **Watch and post.** The short plays here in a stained-glass window, with the verse, its reference, the narration, a caption and hashtags to copy, and the video to download. ### What you get - A narrated vertical short of about 30 seconds - The key verse quoted exactly, with its reference - Live-action epic or gentle animation - A caption and hashtags to post it ### Who it's for - **Sunday school and children's ministry teachers.** A short opener for the week's lesson that holds young attention. - **Church social media volunteers.** A steady stream of Scripture-centered posts without a video team. - **Youth leaders.** A quick, vertical retelling to start a conversation in the format teens already watch. - **Parents.** A gentle animated story to watch together before family devotions. - **Christian creators.** Story-based shorts that pair a familiar passage with its key verse. - **Small group leaders.** A short story video to open a Bible study before you read the passage together. ### Ideas to try - David and Goliath, live-action epic - The Good Samaritan, gentle animation, for my kids' Sunday school class - Ruth and Naomi, gentle animation - Jesus calms the storm (Mark 4), live-action epic - Esther before the king, live-action epic - The Prodigal Son, gentle animation, for our family devotion night - Zacchaeus in the sycamore tree (Luke 19), gentle animation - The Nativity, gentle animation, for our Christmas Eve family service ### On your own or with Emma - **The script.** On your own: Squeeze a whole passage into a few spoken lines yourself With Emma: A short plain-language retelling that ends on the key verse - **Verse accuracy.** On your own: Copy the verse by hand and hope there are no slips With Emma: The key verse fetched word for word from the World English Bible, with its reference - **Visuals.** On your own: Search for footage that fits or animate scenes yourself With Emma: Three shots made for the story, in the style you choose - **Editing.** On your own: Cut clips, add voice, music and text in an editor With Emma: Narration, music, the story title and the verse on screen, in one vertical video - **Posting.** On your own: Write a caption and choose hashtags With Emma: A caption and hashtags included ### Tips - For a story that isn't on the tiles, add the book and chapter, like “Ruth 1”. - Choose Gentle animation for younger children. - Tell Emma who will watch it so she can pitch the narration to them. - If you'd like a different key verse, ask Emma afterwards. - Read the full passage before using the short for teaching. ### Try it free The free try makes an illuminated key frame of the story's central moment with the verse set over it, and one 5-second shot narrated with the verse and its reference. The full 30-second short with three shots, the retelling and music comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Which translation is the verse from?** The World English Bible, a public-domain translation, looked up word for word for your story's key verse. Ask your agent for a different passage afterwards. **Is the narration faithful to Scripture?** It retells the passage in plain words for a short video and quotes the key verse exactly. It's a retelling, so read the full passage alongside it, especially for teaching. **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version makes an illuminated key frame with the verse and one 5-second narrated shot. The full 30-second short comes with an account and credits. **How long is the video?** About 30 seconds, in vertical 9:16 format for Reels, TikTok and YouTube Shorts. **Which Bible stories can I make?** Twelve are on the page, including Noah's Ark, Daniel and the Lions and The Nativity. You can type any other story into the box. **What's the difference between the two styles?** Live-action epic looks cinematic and real-world. Gentle animation is soft and warm, made with families and children in mind. **Does it have music?** Yes. The full short has a gentle instrumental bed under the narration. The free try has the verse reading only. **Can I post Bible story shorts on my church's accounts?** Yes, you can use what Emma makes for your church's own channels. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. **How are biblical figures shown?** Reverently, in the style you choose. Emma is asked to be respectful of the text and of every tradition. --- ## Devotional Reel Maker https://supercool.com/use/devotional-reel-maker **Turn today's verse into a reel worth sharing.** Type a verse or paste your devotional and pick a tone. Your AI agent makes a 20-second vertical reel with narration and the verse on screen, while you chat with it. This devotional reel maker turns the verse you're sitting with today into a short video worth sharing. Type a reference like Psalm 23:1, paste the verse itself, or paste a whole devotional, then pick a tone. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, makes a 20-second vertical reel: golden-hour sunrise scenes with soft light, warm narration of the verse and a short reflection, and a glowing verse card to close. If you give a reference, the verse is quoted word for word from the World English Bible, a public-domain translation. If you paste your own text, Emma keeps your exact words. You also get the verse card as its own image and a caption with hashtags, ready for Reels, TikTok or Shorts. A gentle music bed sits under the narration. ### How it works 1. **Type today's verse.** Tap the card and type a reference, the verse itself, or paste your devotional. Or tap a quick verse like Isaiah 40:31. 2. **Pick the tone.** Choose Hope, Strength, Peace, Gratitude or Comfort. It shapes the reflection and the feel of the scenes. 3. **Press Make my reel.** Emma looks up the verse, writes the reflection and makes the scenes, narration and music. Tell her who it's for while she works. 4. **Share it.** The reel plays here in a phone frame, with the verse card, narration, caption and hashtags to download or copy. ### What you get - A 20-second vertical reel with the verse on screen - Warm narration of the verse and a short reflection - A verse card image to post on its own - A caption with hashtags, ready to copy ### Who it's for - **Church social media teams.** A daily or weekly verse post that looks cared for, without filming anything. - **Pastors and ministry leaders.** A short word of encouragement for the congregation between Sundays. - **Small group leaders.** The week's memory verse as a reel to send before you meet. - **Christian creators.** Consistent devotional content in a calm, recognizable style. - **Anyone encouraging a friend.** A comforting verse, narrated, to send someone going through a hard week. - **Care teams and prayer chains.** A gentle reel to send someone who is grieving or in the hospital, alongside a personal note. ### Ideas to try - Psalm 46:10, tone: peace - Isaiah 41:10, for a friend in a hard week, tone: comfort - Lamentations 3:22-23, tone: hope - My devotional from this morning on waiting well, pasted in full, tone: strength - 1 Thessalonians 5:18, tone: gratitude - Joshua 1:9 for our youth group before exams, tone: strength - Romans 8:28 for a church family who just lost a loved one, tone: comfort ### On your own or with Emma - **Footage.** On your own: Hunt for sunrise clips that fit your verse With Emma: Two golden-hour scenes made for your verse and tone - **Narration.** On your own: Record yourself, re-take, clean up the audio With Emma: Warm, unhurried narration of the verse and a short reflection - **Verse on screen.** On your own: Design a text card in another app With Emma: A typeset verse card with the reference, also as its own image - **Putting it together.** On your own: Edit clips, voice, music and text in an editor With Emma: One 20-second vertical cut with music underneath - **Posting copy.** On your own: Write a caption and hunt for hashtags With Emma: A caption with hashtags, ready to copy ### Tips - Give a reference when you want an exact quote; paste text when you want your own wording. - Short is better: a 20-second reel has room for a verse and a sentence or two of reflection. - Pick the tone with the person who'll watch in mind. - Post the verse card on its own as a second post. - Tell Emma who it's for so the reflection fits them. ### Try it free The free try makes your verse card image and its narration, the verse with a one-sentence reflection. The full 20-second reel with moving scenes and music comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial makes your verse card image and its narration. The full 20-second reel with motion, music and the caption comes with an account and credits. **Which Bible translation does it quote?** If you give a reference, your agent quotes the World English Bible, a public-domain translation, and says so on the result. If you paste your own text, it uses your words exactly. **Can I use my own devotional instead of a verse?** Yes. Paste your devotional and your agent narrates it and puts its key line on the card, keeping your wording. **How long is the reel?** 20 seconds, vertical 9:16, sized for Instagram Reels, TikTok and YouTube Shorts. **Does the reel show people?** No faces. The scenes are golden-hour landscapes: a sunrise over hills, or a quiet path, field or water in warm morning light. **What tones can I choose?** Hope, Strength, Peace, Gratitude and Comfort. The tone guides the reflection Emma writes and the feel of the scenes. **Can I post the verse card without the video?** Yes. The verse card comes as its own image you can download and post as a still. **Is there music?** Yes. The full reel has a gentle instrumental bed under the narration. The free try has the narration only. **Is this devotional reel maker suited to a church page?** Yes, it's built for sharing encouragement on church and ministry pages. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. **Can I use a different Bible translation?** Yes. Paste the verse from the translation you prefer and name it, and Emma uses your text exactly and labels it with that version. A reference on its own is quoted from the World English Bible. --- ## Sermon Builder https://supercool.com/use/sermon-builder **Build a sermon outline from any passage.** Give the passage, the one thing you want people to carry home, who's gathered and how long you have. Your AI agent builds an outline with illustrations and application points. This sermon outline builder is for pastors, teachers and lay leaders with a passage and a week to prepare. Enter the passage, finish the sentence about the one thing you want people to carry home, and choose who's gathered and how long you have. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, reads the passage and builds an outline faithful to it in context, timed to your length. You get the passage quoted word for word with verse numbers, a title, a one-sentence big idea, an introduction, two to four points with cross-references, illustrations and applications, a conclusion and a short closing prayer. It respects every tradition and follows a denomination only if you say. It's a starting point for your own study and prayer, not a replacement for them. ### How it works 1. **Write the passage.** Type a reference like John 15:1-11 at the top of the page, or tap one of the suggested passages. 2. **Finish the sentence.** Complete 'The one thing I want them to carry home is that…', or leave it blank and Emma draws the key point from the passage. 3. **Choose who's gathered and how long.** Pick Sunday service, Youth group, Small group, Children's church or Funeral or memorial, then 10, 20, 30 or 40 minutes. Press Build my outline. 4. **Chat, then copy.** While Emma works, tell her about your congregation and what's happening in your community. The outline lands with the passage and its verse numbers; copy it in one tap. ### What you get - The passage text, with verse numbers - A big idea and a clear, timed outline - Illustrations, honestly labelled - Application points for real life - A printable PDF of the outline ### Who it's for - **Pastors.** Get a solid first structure for Sunday, then spend your hours on study, prayer and your people. - **Youth leaders.** Build a talk that fits the time and speaks plainly to teenagers. - **Small group leaders.** Turn a passage into a short teaching with applications for everyday life. - **Children's church teachers.** Get a simple outline with everyday pictures children can follow. - **Chaplains and ministers.** Begin a gentle, hopeful message for a funeral or memorial service. - **Lay preachers.** Prepare a faithful outline when the week leaves little time. ### Ideas to try - Psalm 23: God stays with us in the valley, not only on the mountaintop. Funeral or memorial, 10 minutes. - John 15:1-11: staying connected to Jesus is how fruit grows. Sunday service, 30 minutes. - Luke 15:11-32: no one is too far gone to come home. Youth group, 20 minutes. - Romans 8:28-39, key point left blank. Small group, 20 minutes. - Matthew 5:1-12: the Beatitudes turn our idea of blessing upside down. Sunday service, 40 minutes. - Isaiah 40:28-31: God gives strength to people who are tired. Children's church, 10 minutes. - Ruth 1:1-18: loyal love in a season of loss. Sunday service, 30 minutes. ### On your own or with Emma - **The text.** On your own: Copying verses from several tabs and checking the numbers. With Emma: The passage quoted word for word with verse numbers, and the translation named. - **Structure and time.** On your own: Notes that run long or short on the day. With Emma: A big idea, 2 to 4 points and timings that add up to your length. - **Illustrations.** On your own: Stories passed around online that may not be true. With Emma: Each illustration labelled by type, so nothing made up is told as fact. - **Application.** On your own: Added at the last minute, if at all. With Emma: An application for every point, suited to who's gathered. - **Handout.** On your own: Formatting a document to print. With Emma: With an account, a clean printable PDF of the outline. ### Tips - Write the key point as a full sentence. It sharpens the big idea and every point after it. - Choose the gathering carefully: the tone becomes gentle and hopeful for a memorial and simpler for children. - Keep the passage to a manageable length. Over 40 verses, the outline quotes the first 40. - Tell Emma what's happening in your community this week so the applications land close to home. - Check each cross-reference in your own Bible as you study. ### Try it free The free try builds the full outline on the page: the passage, big idea, points, illustrations, applications and closing prayer. The printable PDF, plus a small-group guide or slides on request, come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial builds the full outline on the page, with the passage, points, illustrations and applications. The printable PDF, plus a small-group guide or slides on request, come with an account and credits. **Which Bible translation does it use?** It quotes the passage from the World English Bible, a public-domain modern translation, and names it. If that isn't available it uses the King James Version and says so. **Are the illustrations true stories?** Each one is labelled: a made-up story you could tell, an everyday picture, or a well-documented piece of history. Nothing invented is presented as fact. It's a starting point for your own study and prayer, not a replacement for them. **How long should a sermon outline be?** Long enough to fit your time. Emma times each part so the minutes add up to the length you pick: 10, 20, 30 or 40. **Can it help with a funeral sermon?** Yes. Choose Funeral or memorial and the tone is gentle and hopeful. Tell Emma about the person and the family in the chat if you want it to feel personal. **Is the outline tied to a denomination?** No. It's written to respect every tradition and follows a particular denomination only if you say so. **Does it write the whole sermon word for word?** No. It builds a detailed outline: an introduction, points with explanations, illustrations and applications, a conclusion and a prayer. You preach it in your own words. **Which passages can I use?** Any Bible passage you can give as a reference, like Psalm 23 or Luke 15:11-32. Passages over 40 verses are quoted up to the first 40, and the outline says so. **Does the AI sermon outline builder use real cross-references?** Emma only includes cross-references she is sure of, given as book, chapter and verse. Look each one up as part of your own study. --- ## 3D Figurine Maker https://supercool.com/use/3d-figurine-maker **Turn a photo into a 3D figurine.** Drop in a photo or describe what you want, then pick a style. Your AI agent designs the figurine and makes it into a 3D model you can spin and download. The 3D Figurine Maker turns a photo, or a few words, into a 3D model you can spin in your browser. Drop in a picture of your dog, your grandpa or yourself in your work clothes, pick a finish, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, designs a full-body figurine and sculpts it in 3D. You get a GLB file to download and a boxed-toy product shot to go with it. There's no 3D software to learn. Emma first draws one clean figurine design in your style (vinyl toy, clay or realistic), standing on a round base, then turns that exact design into a textured model. It takes a few minutes, and you can chat with her the whole time: tell her what it's for, a gift, a 3D print or a game, and any detail you want added. ### How it works 1. **Add a photo or a description.** Drop a photo on the glass pedestal, or write what to make on the exhibit card, like my golden retriever, Biscuit. You can do both. 2. **Pick a finish.** Choose a toy box: Vinyl toy for glossy chibi proportions, Clay for a soft handmade look, or Realistic for a detailed collectible statue. 3. **Press Make my figurine.** Emma designs the figurine, then sculpts and paints it in 3D. Chat with her while it works and mention any detail to add. 4. **Spin it and download.** The model lands on the pedestal: drag to spin, pinch or scroll to zoom. Download the GLB, a print file when one comes with it, and the boxed-toy shot. ### What you get - A 3D model you can spin right in your browser - A GLB file to download, plus a print file when the model comes with one - Vinyl toy, clay or realistic finish - A boxed-toy product shot of your figurine ### Who it's for - **Pet owners.** A little figurine of a dog or cat made from a favorite photo, to keep on a shelf, give as a gift or print. - **Gift givers.** A one-off present: a best friend as a vinyl toy, a couple in clay, or a grandparent as a small collectible statue. - **3D printing hobbyists.** A starting mesh from a picture instead of sculpting from scratch, ready to check and tidy in a slicer. - **Game and app makers.** A quick textured GLB of a character or prop for a prototype, a mockup or a scene. - **Small businesses.** A mascot figurine and a boxed-toy shot for social posts or to test a merch idea. ### Ideas to try - My golden retriever, Biscuit, with his red bandana, as a vinyl toy - A photo of my grandpa in his fishing hat, realistic - A knight holding a pizza slice as a shield, in clay - Me in my chef whites holding a whisk, as a vinyl toy - A tiny astronaut cat with a fishbowl helmet, in clay - Our bakery's cupcake mascot with little arms and a big smile, as a vinyl toy - A photo of my daughter in her soccer kit, in clay ### On your own or with Emma - **Skills needed.** On your own: Learn a 3D sculpting app, or pay a modeler for each figure. With Emma: Describe it or drop a photo, and Emma designs and sculpts it. - **Getting the look right.** On your own: Sketch a concept, model it, then texture and paint it by hand. With Emma: One design in your chosen finish first, then that design becomes the model. - **Time.** On your own: Many hours of sculpting and texturing, plus revisions. With Emma: A few minutes while you chat with Emma. - **Product shot.** On your own: Set up a separate render or photo shoot. With Emma: A boxed-toy shot of your figurine comes with the model. ### Tips - Use a clear photo with the whole subject in view and a plain background. The figurine is full-body, so a tight head shot leaves the rest to guesswork. - Add one memorable detail in your description, like a bandana, a hat or a favorite object. Small, specific props read well on a figurine. - Pick the finish for the job: Vinyl toy for a fun desk toy, Clay for a handmade feel, Realistic for true proportions. - Tell Emma what it's for while she works. A gift, a print and a game each call for slightly different choices. - Before printing, open the file in your slicer and check the scale, the supports and that the base sits flat. ### Try it free The free try gives your figurine a name and makes a product shot of it from your photo or description. The spinnable 3D model, the GLB and print downloads and the boxed-toy shot come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version makes a product shot of your figurine. The spinnable 3D model and its downloads come with an account and credits. **Can I 3D print it?** When the model comes with a print file you get it alongside the GLB, which is a good start. Most models need a quick check in your slicer (scale, supports, a flat base) before printing. **How long does the 3D model take?** A few minutes: your agent designs the figurine first, then sculpts and paints it in 3D. You can chat with it while it works. **Can I turn a photo of my pet into a 3D model?** Yes. Drop the photo on the pedestal and Emma uses it as the reference for the figurine's design, then turns that design into the model. A clear, full-body photo gives the best likeness. **Do I need a photo?** No. The 3D figurine maker works from words too. Write what to make on the exhibit card, like a tiny astronaut cat, and Emma designs it from your description. **What file formats do I get?** A GLB, the standard 3D format for the web and most 3D apps, plus a mesh file for printing when the model comes with one. The boxed-toy shot is an image you can download. **What's the difference between the styles?** Vinyl toy is glossy designer vinyl with chunky chibi proportions. Clay has a soft handmade look with visible sculpted texture. Realistic is a detailed collectible statue with true proportions. **Can I open the model in other 3D software?** Yes. GLB opens in most 3D tools and game engines. It comes as a static, textured figure on a round base, so expect some tidying if you want to pose or animate it. **Will there be text or a logo on the figurine?** No. The design and the boxed-toy shot are made without text or logos, so you can add your own name or branding later. **Can I make a figurine of someone else?** Only upload photos you have the right to use, and ask before you turn a real person into a figurine. You can use what Emma makes for your own projects. --- ## AI Headshot Studio https://supercool.com/use/ai-headshot-studio **Professional headshots from your selfies.** Drop in a few selfies, pick a look and a background. Your AI agent shoots 8 professional headshots in that style, cropped for LinkedIn and your resume. You need a professional headshot and don't want to book a photographer. Upload a few selfies, pick a look and a backdrop, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, shoots 8 AI headshots in that style. She keeps your face shape, skin tone, hair and eye color, and varies the wardrobe and pose so you have real choices. Your shots land on a contact sheet where you can star favorites and download each one. Emma also crops the best two for LinkedIn, as a 400 by 400 square, and for a resume, at 600 by 750. While she works, tell her where you'll use them and anything to avoid, like glasses or a certain jacket color. ### Real results - Corporate look, Studio grey: Eight corporate headshots from two selfies; this one in a navy blazer (https://supercool.com/use-examples/ai-headshot-studio/1.webp) - Creative look, Warm beige: Eight creative headshots from one selfie; this one in a charcoal blazer over a tee (https://supercool.com/use-examples/ai-headshot-studio/2.webp) - Creative look, Warm beige: From the same set, a chambray shirt for a more relaxed take (https://supercool.com/use-examples/ai-headshot-studio/3.webp) ### How it works 1. **Add your selfies.** Drop 1 to 4 selfies onto the contact sheet, or tap Add selfies. Three or four from slightly different angles work best. 2. **Pick a backdrop and a look.** Tap Studio grey, Soft office, Outdoor green or Warm beige for the backdrop, then choose Corporate, Creative or Actor. 3. **Press Shoot my headshots.** Emma starts the shoot. Chat with her about where the photos are going, glasses on or off, or a color you'd rather not wear. 4. **Pick and download.** Eight headshots land on the contact sheet. Star your favorites, download the ones you like, and grab the LinkedIn and resume crops. ### What you get - 8 professional headshots in the look you pick - Your choice of backdrop: studio grey, office, outdoor or warm beige - LinkedIn and resume crops of the best two - A contact sheet to star your favorites ### Who it's for - **Job seekers.** A clean, current photo for LinkedIn and a resume without a studio booking. - **Founders and consultants.** Headshots for a website, a pitch deck or a speaker bio, in one consistent look. - **Actors starting out.** Try the Actor look, natural and true to life with eyes forward, to see which style suits you. Check whether a casting call wants real photos. - **Small teams.** Matching headshots for a company page when everyone picks the same look and backdrop. - **Creatives and freelancers.** The Creative look brings warmer light and smart-casual clothes for a portfolio or a social profile. ### Ideas to try - Four window-lit selfies, Corporate look, Studio grey, for my LinkedIn and resume - Three selfies with my glasses on, Creative look, Warm beige, for my design portfolio - Two selfies facing the camera in a plain black t-shirt, Actor look, Studio grey - Corporate look on the Soft office backdrop for the team page on our firm's website - Creative look with Outdoor green behind me, for my podcast host bio - Corporate look, Warm beige, for my real estate business cards ### On your own or with Emma - **Booking.** On your own: Book a photographer, travel to a studio and wait for the edits. With Emma: Upload selfies from your phone and get headshots back on the page. - **Choice.** On your own: Pick from whatever the session produced. With Emma: Eight shots with varied wardrobe and pose, in the look and backdrop you chose. - **Crops.** On your own: Crop and resize each photo for every site yourself. With Emma: LinkedIn and resume crops of the best two, already sized. - **Likeness.** On your own: A real photo is exactly you. With Emma: AI headshots aim to keep your likeness but can change small details, so check each one. ### Tips - Use selfies taken facing the camera in soft daylight, without sunglasses or heavy filters. - Include a straight-on shot and a slight turn. Different angles help Emma get your face right. - Tell Emma in the chat if you always wear glasses, or if there's a color you never wear. - Pick the backdrop for where the photo will live: Studio grey or Soft office for corporate profiles, Outdoor green or Warm beige for a friendlier feel. - Look at each shot at full size and only use the ones that look like you. ### Try it free The free try makes two headshots in the look and backdrop you pick. The full shoot of 8 headshots, with LinkedIn and resume crops of the best two, comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial makes two headshots. The full shoot, with 8 headshots and crops, uses credits on your account. **How many selfies should I upload?** Three or four, if you can: facing the camera, good light, no sunglasses, and a couple of angles. It works from one, but more photos help it get your likeness right. **Will they look exactly like me?** They're AI-generated, so they can soften or change small details. Look each one over and use only the ones that look like you. Some employers and casting calls ask for real photos, so check what yours expect. **What size are the headshots?** Each one is a 3:4 head-and-shoulders portrait. The LinkedIn crop is a 400 by 400 square and the resume crop is 600 by 750. **Can I use AI headshots on LinkedIn?** Yes, that's one of the main uses, and the page makes a square LinkedIn crop of the best two. You can use what Emma makes for your own profiles; check the rules of any site you post to. **What's the difference between the three looks?** Corporate is a blazer or smart shirt, confident and approachable. Creative is relaxed smart-casual with warmer light. Actor is a natural, true-to-life headshot in a plain top with eyes forward. **Will the AI headshot generator retouch my skin?** It aims for natural skin texture and good studio lighting rather than heavy beautifying, so you still look like you. **Can I upload photos of someone else?** Only upload photos of yourself, or of someone who has said yes. Headshots of another person need their permission. **Can I get headshots in a different look?** Yes. Come back and pick another look or backdrop, or ask Emma in the chat for a new set. --- ## Anime Avatar Maker https://supercool.com/use/anime-avatar-maker **Turn your selfie into an anime character.** Drop in a selfie and pick a style. Your AI agent draws you as an anime character in that style and two more, ready to use as a profile picture. This anime avatar maker turns one selfie into a set of anime portraits of you. Drop in a photo, tap a style (shonen, shojo, chibi or 90s cel) and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, draws you as an anime character in that style. She keeps the things that make you recognizable: your face shape, hair, skin tone, eye color, and glasses or jewelry. You get three square head-and-shoulders portraits: your chosen style first, then two more styles that suit you. Each one also comes as a 400 by 400 profile-picture copy, sized for Discord, X, Twitch or a game profile. Want it to move? Ask Emma for a short animated loop of your favorite, with a gentle blink and a sway of the hair. ### How it works 1. **Drop your selfie.** Drag a photo into the panel marked This is me, or tap to choose one from your phone or computer. 2. **Pick a style.** Tap Shonen, Shojo, Chibi or 90s cel, then press Draw me in anime. 3. **Chat while Emma inks you.** Emma draws your chosen style first, then two more. Tell her where you'll use it, or ask for an animated loop. 4. **Download your avatars.** The portraits and their profile-size copies land on the page, ready to download. ### What you get - Your portrait in the anime style you pick - The same portrait in two more styles - Square profile-picture sizes of each - A short animated loop, if you ask for one ### Who it's for - **Gamers and streamers.** A profile picture for Discord or Twitch that looks like you, drawn in a style that fits your channel. - **Anime fans.** See yourself as a shonen hero, a shojo lead or a tiny chibi, and keep the one you like best. - **Friends and couples.** Matching anime avatars for a group chat or a server, each drawn from its own selfie. - **Creators who stay off camera.** A recognizable drawn version of you for X, a newsletter or a podcast cover. - **Gift makers.** A fun portrait of someone who said yes to having their photo used, for a card or a print. ### Ideas to try - A front-facing selfie in my hoodie, drawn in Shonen for my Twitch profile - My graduation photo in Shojo, with the cap and the earrings kept in - A selfie with my round glasses, in Chibi for our Discord server - A beach photo in 90s cel, for an X profile picture - My new short haircut in Shonen, then a looping version of my favorite - A well-lit window selfie in Chibi for a gaming forum avatar ### On your own or with Emma - **Getting the drawing.** On your own: Commission an artist and wait, or try to draw yourself. With Emma: Emma draws your portrait in the style you pick while you chat with her. - **Trying styles.** On your own: Pay for each extra style, or settle on one. With Emma: Your chosen style plus two more, from the same selfie, side by side. - **Profile sizes.** On your own: Crop and resize each image by hand for every site. With Emma: A square 400 by 400 copy of each portrait comes with the set. - **Changes.** On your own: Go back and forth over messages for revisions. With Emma: Ask Emma for another take in the same chat if a detail is off. ### Tips - Use a clear, well-lit selfie facing the camera. Side angles and dark rooms lose detail. - Keep your face unblocked. Glasses are fine and will be kept, but hands and big hats can confuse the drawing. - One person per photo gives the cleanest portrait. - If you plan to use it as a small icon, Chibi and Shonen read well at tiny sizes because of their bold shapes. - Ask Emma for the animated loop once you've seen all three portraits, so you can pick your favorite first. ### Try it free The free try draws your portrait in the style you pick. The two extra styles, the profile-picture copies and an animated loop come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial draws your portrait in the style you pick. The full set, with three styles and profile sizes, uses credits on your account. **Will it still look like me?** It keeps your face shape, hair, skin tone and accessories as close as the style allows. A clear, well-lit selfie facing the camera works best. AI drawings can change small details, so ask Emma for another take if one is off. **Can I use it as my profile picture?** Yes. The files you download are yours, and the profile sizes are square so they fit Discord, X, Twitch and the rest. Only upload photos of yourself, or of people who said yes. **What's the best anime avatar maker for a Discord profile picture?** One that keeps you recognizable and gives you a square image. Here you get square portraits plus a 400 by 400 copy of each, which suits Discord and similar sites. **Which anime styles can I choose?** Shonen (bold ink lines, sharp eyes), shojo (sparkling eyes, soft pastels, petals), chibi (tiny body, big head) and 90s cel (retro cel shading and film grain). You pick one, and Emma adds the two others that suit you best. **Can I make an animated anime avatar?** Yes. Ask Emma for a loop after your portraits land and she makes a 5-second clip of your favorite with a gentle blink and hair sway. **Can I make one of a friend?** Only with their permission. Upload photos of yourself, or of people who said yes. **What if I want a different style?** This anime avatar maker works with the four styles on the page. Ask Emma in the chat for another take on any of them. **Can I use it on social media?** Yes, you can use what Emma makes for your own profiles and projects. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. --- ## Background Swap Studio https://supercool.com/use/background-swap-studio **Put your photo anywhere in the world.** Drop in a photo and pick a place. Your AI agent puts you there, relit to match the scene, with a before/after slider, variations and a transparent cutout. You took a good photo in the wrong place. A plain wall, a cluttered kitchen, a gray day. Background Swap Studio puts you somewhere better: a Paris café, a golden-hour beach, a white studio or anywhere you can name. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, keeps you, your pose and your clothes as they are and changes the place around you. The difference from a simple cut-and-paste is the light. Emma relights you to match the new scene, so the background swap looks like you were really there. You get the new photo with a before/after slider, two more variations of the scene, like another angle or time of day, and a transparent cutout of you to use in your own designs. ### How it works 1. **Add your photo.** Tap the luggage tag that says Your photo, or drop a photo onto it: a person, a group or a product. 2. **Pick a destination.** Tap a sticker like Paris café, Tokyo neon street or White studio, or write your own place on the blank sticker. 3. **Press Take me there.** Emma starts right away. Tell her in the chat what the photo is for, like a profile picture, a listing or a post. 4. **Compare and download.** Drag the before/after slider, then save the new photo, the two variations and the transparent cutout. ### What you get - Your photo in the new place, relit to match - A before/after slider to compare - Two more variations of the scene - A transparent cutout of you ### Who it's for - **Anyone updating a profile picture.** Swap a messy room for a clean studio or a bright café for a social, dating or work profile. - **Online sellers.** Move a product shot on a kitchen table onto a white studio background for a listing, or into a lifestyle scene. - **Social media posters.** Put a selfie on a New York rooftop or in a Tuscan vineyard for a fun post. - **Small businesses.** Restage team or product photos in a setting that fits your brand without a reshoot. - **Designers and makers.** Use the transparent cutout in flyers, thumbnails and collages. ### Ideas to try - A selfie from my office, to a Paris café at a sidewalk table - My headshot against a hallway wall, to a white studio - Our family photo from the backyard, to a golden-hour beach - A handmade ceramic mug on my counter, to a sunlit Scandinavian kitchen - Me in a winter coat, to a snowy mountain lodge with a fire behind me - My dog on the couch, to a tropical jungle - A group shot of my running club, to a New York rooftop at sunset ### On your own or with Emma - **Cutting out.** On your own: Trace around hair and edges by hand in a photo editor. With Emma: Separates the subject from the background and gives you a clean transparent cutout. - **Matching the light.** On your own: Fiddle with color, shadows and brightness until it stops looking pasted on. With Emma: Relights you to match the new scene's light. - **Finding a backdrop.** On your own: Hunt for a stock photo you're allowed to use, at the right angle. With Emma: Creates the place you name, plus two variations to choose from. - **Comparing.** On your own: Flip back and forth between two files. With Emma: A before/after slider right on the page. ### Tips - Start with a sharp, well-lit photo with your whole subject in frame. Clear edges make a cleaner swap. - Be specific with your own place: 'a rainy Tokyo street at night with neon signs' gives Emma more to work with than 'Tokyo'. - Pick a place whose light suits your photo. A softly lit portrait fits a café or studio better than harsh noon sun. - For product listings, choose White studio and use the cutout, so the product itself stays unchanged. - If a detail looks off, tell Emma in the chat what to fix. ### Try it free The free try puts your photo in the new place, relit to match, with the before/after slider. The two extra variations and the transparent cutout come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial puts your photo in the new place with the before/after slider. The variations and the cutout use credits on your account. **Will I still look like me?** It keeps you, your pose and your clothes and changes the place and the light around you. AI edits can shift small details, so check faces before you post. **Can I use it for product photos?** Yes. A product on a plain background swaps well, and the white studio and cutout are made for listings. Be honest in ads about where a photo was taken if it matters to buyers. **How do I change the background of a photo?** Upload the photo, pick or type a place and press Take me there. Emma replaces the background and relights you to match, and you compare the result with the before/after slider. **Can I swap the background on a group photo?** Yes. The page takes a person, a group or a product. Make sure everyone is clearly in frame so nobody gets cut off. **Can I pick a place that isn't on the stickers?** Yes. Write any place on the blank sticker, from a real city to a scene you make up. **Does it change my clothes or pose?** No. Emma keeps the subject as it is, including face, pose, clothes and product details, and changes only the background and the light. **Do I get a transparent background version?** Yes, with an account. Along with the two variations, you get a transparent cutout of the subject from your original photo. **How many photos can I swap at once?** One photo per run on this page. Start again with another photo for the next background swap. **Can I use photos of other people?** Only upload photos you have the right to use, and get permission before you place someone else somewhere new. Check the rules of any platform you post to. --- ## Hairstyle & Look Try-On https://supercool.com/use/hairstyle-and-look-try-on **See a new hairstyle on you before you commit.** Drop in a selfie and pick a cut, a color or both. Your AI agent shows you in that look, with three variations side by side and a card to show your barber. Thinking about a big chop, braids, a beard or a bold new color? This hairstyle try-on shows it on you first. Drop a selfie into the mirror, tap a cut, a color or both, or type your own look, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, shows you in it. Only your hair or beard changes: your face, skin tone, expression, clothes and background stay as they are. Emma then makes three variations of the look, a little shorter or longer, a different shape or a shade lighter or darker, so you can swipe through them side by side. She also writes a card to show your barber or stylist, with what to ask for in their words, the specifics, and the upkeep it takes. It's a preview to help you decide, not a promise of the result. ### How it works 1. **Add your selfie.** Drop a photo into the mirror. Face the camera with your hair and hairline visible, in good light. 2. **Pick the look.** Tap a cut like Braids, Bob or Buzz cut, a color like Copper red or Silver grey, or both. Or type your own, like "curtain bangs with a soft layered cut". Then press Try it on. 3. **Chat about your hair.** While Emma styles it, tell her about your hair's texture, how much upkeep you want and the occasion. She passes it along. 4. **Swipe and save.** Your new look and its variations land on the page to swipe through and download, with the show-my-barber card underneath. ### What you get - Your photo in the look you pick - 3 variations of it, side by side - A show-my-barber card with exactly what to ask for - Any cut, beard or hair color you can describe ### Who it's for - **Anyone before a big change.** See a pixie cut, a shaved head or long waves on yourself before you sit in the chair. - **Color curious.** Try platinum blonde, copper red or pastel pink on your own photo before booking a color appointment. - **Beard growers.** Preview a full beard, a goatee or a clean fade before committing weeks to growing it out. - **Wedding and event prep.** Compare a few styles for the big day and bring a clear card to your stylist. - **Barbers and stylists.** Show a client a preview on their own photo during a consultation, with their permission. ### Ideas to try - Box braids, shoulder length - A short bob with copper red color - Bald, to see if I can pull it off - A full beard with a buzz cut - Curtain bangs with a soft layered cut - A short fade with a sharp line-up - Long waves in chestnut brown - A curly afro with silver grey tips ### On your own or with Emma - **Seeing it on you.** On your own: Saving photos of other people's hair and imagining it on your face. With Emma: Your own selfie in the look you picked, with your face kept the same. - **Comparing options.** On your own: Booking a cut and hoping it's the right length. With Emma: Three variations side by side, so you can compare length, shape or shade. - **Talking to your barber.** On your own: Trying to describe a style in words you're not sure of. With Emma: A card with what to ask for in a stylist's words, the specifics and the upkeep. - **Trying colors.** On your own: Guessing from a color swatch or a photo of someone else's hair. With Emma: Only the hair changes. Your skin tone, expression and background stay put. ### Tips - Wear your hair the way you usually do in the selfie, so the preview starts from your everyday look. - Combine a cut and a color in one try, like Bob plus Copper red, to see the full look at once. - Be specific when you type your own look: length, where the part sits, and whether you want it sleek or textured. - Tell Emma your hair's texture in the chat. It helps the barber card suggest realistic products and upkeep. - Only upload photos of yourself, or of someone who said yes. ### Try it free The free try shows you in the look you pick, with a show-my-barber card. The three variations use credits on an account. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial shows you in the look you pick, with a card for your barber. The three variations use credits on your account. **Will it look exactly like this in real life?** It's an AI preview to help you decide. How a cut or color actually turns out depends on your hair's texture and thickness and on your stylist, so take the barber card along and talk it through. **What photo works best?** A clear selfie facing the camera in good light, with your hair and hairline visible. Only upload photos of yourself, or of someone who said yes. **Which hairstyles can I try on?** Tap Bald, Braids, Bob, Full beard, Buzz cut, Long waves, Pixie cut or Curly afro, or type any haircut you can describe. **Can I try a new hair color on my photo?** Yes. Pick Platinum blonde, Copper red, Jet black, Chestnut brown, Pastel pink or Silver grey, or describe another shade. You can pair it with a cut. **Does it work for beards?** Yes. Pick Full beard or describe the beard you want, like a neat goatee, and only your facial hair changes. **What's on the barber card?** What to ask for in a stylist's words, two to four specifics like length, technique and products, and how much upkeep the look takes. **Will my face change in the hairstyle try-on?** Emma is told to keep your face, skin tone, expression, clothes and background and change only the hair or beard. AI images can still shift small details. **Can I download the images?** Yes. Each look on the page has a download button. --- ## Movie Poster of You https://supercool.com/use/movie-poster-of-you **Put yourself on a movie poster.** Drop in a photo of you or your crew, pick a genre and type the title. Your AI agent designs a theatrical one-sheet with your title and billing, plus a teaser and a banner. Ever wanted to see your name above the title? Drop a photo of you or your whole crew into the frame, pick a genre and type your movie's title. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, designs a theatrical one-sheet movie poster starring you, using your photo as the reference so the people on it look like the people in it. The one-sheet comes in the genre's classic poster style, with your title, a tagline and a billing block lettered on it. Emma also makes a minimal teaser version with one striking image and the title, and a wide 16:9 banner for social. It's an easy way to turn your photo into a movie poster for a birthday, a team, a friend group or a joke that deserves a premiere. ### How it works 1. **Drop your photo.** Add a photo of you, or your whole crew, into the big lit frame. Clear, well-lit faces work best. 2. **Pick a genre.** Tap one of the smaller frames: Action, Romance, Horror, Sci-fi, Comedy, Western, Fantasy or Heist. 3. **Type the title.** Write your movie's title across the bottom of the poster, then press Print my poster. 4. **Chat, then download.** Tell Emma who plays who, the plot in a line or a release date while she works. Your posters hang on the lobby wall on the page, each one tap to download. ### What you get - A theatrical one-sheet starring you - Your title, tagline and billing block - A minimal teaser version - A wide banner for social ### Who it's for - **Birthday and party hosts.** A poster starring the guest of honor for the invite, the wall or the cake table. - **Friend groups.** Turn the group chat's best photo into a heist or comedy poster everyone wants to share. - **Couples.** A romance poster for an anniversary, with your story as the tagline. - **Teams and offices.** An action poster for the launch team or the end-of-season party. - **Student filmmakers.** A one-sheet, teaser and banner to promote a short film or class project. ### Ideas to try - A photo of my three college roommates, Heist, "The Rent Is Due" - Me and my husband on our wedding day, Romance, "Ten Years Later" - My dad holding a giant fish, Action, "The One That Didn't Get Away" - Our office team photo, Sci-fi, "Q4" - My best friend in a cowboy hat, Western, "Last Stand at Brunch" - Our family at the cabin, Horror, "Don't Go in the Basement" - My daughter in her knight costume, Fantasy, "The Dragon of Maple Street" ### On your own or with Emma - **Design.** On your own: Cutting yourself out of a photo and fighting layers in a design app. With Emma: Emma designs the poster around the people in your photo, in the genre's classic style. - **Lettering.** On your own: Hunting for movie fonts and laying out a billing block by hand. With Emma: Your title, a tagline and a billing block lettered onto the one-sheet. - **Formats.** On your own: Rebuilding the design for a teaser and a social banner. With Emma: A one-sheet, a minimal teaser and a 16:9 banner from one request. - **Copy.** On your own: Writing a tagline that sounds like a real trailer voice. With Emma: Emma writes the tagline and billing block for you. ### Tips - Pick a photo where every face is clear, well-lit and not too small. - Keep the title short and punchy. Short titles letter bigger and read better. - Match the genre to the photo's energy: a serious group shot makes a great heist, a goofy one makes a great comedy. - Tell Emma everyone's names in the chat if you want them in the billing block. - Only upload photos of people who are happy to be on the poster. ### Try it free The free try makes your poster art from your photo, with your title set over it on the page, plus a tagline and billing block. The lettered one-sheet, the teaser and the social banner come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Can I put my whole crew on it?** Yes. Use a group photo and your agent builds the poster around everyone in it. Clear, well-lit faces give the best likeness. **Can I print it?** Yes, download it and print it or post it wherever you like. **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version makes your poster art, with your title set over it on the page. The lettered one-sheet, the teaser and the social banner come with an account and credits. **How do I turn my photo into a movie poster?** Drop your photo into the frame, pick a genre, type a title and press Print my poster. Emma designs the one-sheet with your photo as the reference. **What genres can I choose?** Action, Romance, Horror, Sci-fi, Comedy, Western, Fantasy and Heist. **Will it use real studio names or logos?** No. The billing block uses your names if you give them, or credits the film as a production of your title, and the poster has no real studio names or logos. **What's the difference between the one-sheet, teaser and banner?** The one-sheet is the full theatrical poster with title, tagline and billing. The teaser is minimal: one striking image and the title. The banner is a wide 16:9 version for social headers and posts. **Can I add a release date or a plot line?** Tell Emma in the chat while she works: who plays who, the plot in a line or a release date. She'll pass it along. **Can I use a photo of someone else?** Only upload photos you have the right to use, of people who are fine being on a movie poster. --- ## Pixar-Style You https://supercool.com/use/pixar-style-you **Turn your photo into a 3D animated movie character.** Drop in a photo of you, your kid or your pet and pick a scene. Your AI agent turns them into a warm, 3D animated-style character, ready to download. Ever wondered what you'd look like as the star of an animated movie? Drop in a photo of yourself, your kid or your pet, pick a scene, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, will turn your photo into a 3D animated character: big expressive eyes, soft studio lighting, warm background, and still recognizably them. The portrait is set in the scene you choose, from a cozy living room to outer space, and comes with a fun character name and a one-line movie-style intro. With an account you also get a matching phone wallpaper and a 5-second animated clip of your character blinking, smiling or turning toward the camera. It's a Pixar-style look made by AI, not affiliated with any studio. ### Real results - My golden retriever Biscuit, Beach day: Biscuit as a 3D animated character on the beach, with a wallpaper and a short clip (https://supercool.com/use-examples/pixar-style-you/1.webp) - A selfie of me, Outer space: A 3D animated portrait in a spaceship cabin with a starfield behind her (https://supercool.com/use-examples/pixar-style-you/2.webp) ### How it works 1. **Drop a photo on the sheet.** Add one photo to the character sheet on the easel. A clear face works best. 2. **Say who it is and pick a scene.** Choose Me, My kid or My pet, then a scene: Cozy living room, Big adventure, Enchanted forest, Outer space, Beach day or Holiday morning, or type your own. 3. **Press Make me a 3D character.** The portrait starts the moment you begin. Meanwhile Emma asks about their personality or a favorite thing to slip into the scene. 4. **Download your character.** The portrait lands on a character card with its name and intro, alongside the wallpaper and animated clip, each with a download button. ### What you get - A 3D animated-style portrait from your photo - Set in the scene you pick - A character name and intro line to go with it - A matching phone wallpaper - A 5-second animated clip of your character ### Who it's for - **Parents.** Moms and dads who want to see their kid as an animated hero, for a bedroom print or a birthday invite. - **Pet owners.** People who want their dog or cat as a movie character, for a wallpaper or a fun gift. - **Gift givers.** Anyone making a personal present for a friend, a grandparent or a partner. - **Social media users.** People who want a fresh profile picture or a post that gets a reaction. - **Families at the holidays.** Households making a holiday-morning portrait for cards and the family chat. ### Ideas to try - A photo of my daughter, My kid, Big adventure - My golden retriever Biscuit, My pet, Beach day - A selfie of me, Me, Outer space - My son in his dinosaur pajamas, My kid, Holiday morning - My cat curled on the couch, My pet, Cozy living room - A photo of me, Me, my own scene: baking cookies with grandma - My twin boys, My kid, Enchanted forest ### On your own or with Emma - **Getting the look.** On your own: Commission a 3D artist, or learn modeling software. With Emma: One photo and a scene, turned into a 3D animated-style portrait. - **Likeness.** On your own: Filters that flatten faces into a generic cartoon. With Emma: Keeps their recognizable features, hair and coloring. - **More than one picture.** On your own: Crop and resize separately for a phone background. With Emma: A matching 9:16 phone wallpaper with room for the clock. - **Motion.** On your own: Animation is a whole separate project. With Emma: A 5-second animated clip made from the portrait. ### Tips - Use one clear, well-lit photo with the face easy to see. Avoid sunglasses and heavy shadows. - For pets, a photo at their eye level shows their face best. - Type your own scene for something personal, such as baking cookies with grandma or a first day of school. - Tell Emma a favorite toy, hobby or color. She can work it into the scene. - If it's not quite them, ask Emma for another take. ### Try it free The free try makes the 3D animated-style portrait from your photo, with a character name and intro line. The phone wallpaper and the 5-second animated clip come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version makes the 3D-style portrait. The phone wallpaper and the animated clip come with an account and credits. **Is this made by Pixar?** No. It's an AI image in a 3D animated-movie look, not affiliated with or endorsed by Pixar or Disney. **What photo works best?** One clear, well-lit photo where the face is easy to see. Pets work great too. AI results vary, so ask your agent in the chat for another take if it's not quite them. **How do I turn my photo into a Pixar-style character?** Upload a photo, say whether it's you, your kid or your pet, and pick a scene. Emma makes a 3D animated movie-style portrait that keeps their features. The look is inspired by animated films; it isn't connected to any studio. **Does it work with pets?** Yes. Choose My pet and upload a clear photo where their face is easy to see. **How long does it take?** The portrait starts the moment you press Make me a 3D character. With an account, the wallpaper and the animated clip follow while you chat with Emma. **What size is the portrait?** The portrait is 3:4, a little taller than it is wide. The phone wallpaper is 9:16. **Can I choose my own scene?** Yes. Pick one of the six scenes or type your own on the line under them. **Can I use a photo of someone else?** Only upload photos you have the right to use, and ask before turning another adult into a character. **Can I print the 3D character portrait?** Yes. Download it from the page and print it for your own use, such as a frame or a card. --- ## Book Cover Designer https://supercool.com/use/book-cover-designer **Design a cover that sells your book.** Type your title, your name and one line about the story. Your AI agent designs three front-cover concepts in your genre, lettered and ready to compare on a shelf. Readers decide in a glance whether a book looks like their kind of story. This book cover designer gives you three ways to win that glance. Type your title and your name onto the cover, pull your genre off the shelf, add one line about the story, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, designs three front-cover concepts with your title and name lettered on them. Each concept takes a different direction that fits your genre's shelf, such as a bold central image, a typographic cover or an illustrated scene. Next to each you get a short name, the idea behind it and notes on the lettering. If you like one, ask for a 3D mockup of it as a standing hardcover, or a full print wrap once you know your page count, trim size and paper. ### How it works 1. **Type on the cover.** Click the book on the display and type your title, then your author name underneath. 2. **Pick your genre and story.** Pull a spine from the shelf (Thriller, Romance, Fantasy, Sci-fi, Literary, Horror, Memoir or Business) and write the story in one line on the shelf card. Press Design my covers. 3. **Chat while Emma designs.** Tell Emma about the book's mood and readers. Say if you want a mockup or a print wrap, and give her the page count, trim size and paper for the wrap. 4. **Compare and download.** Your three covers land on a shelf on the page. Download the one you like, plus the mockup and wrap if you asked for them. ### What you get - Three front-cover concepts, title and name lettered - Each in a different direction for your genre - A 3D mockup, if you ask for one - A full print wrap sized for KDP, once you give your page count, trim and paper ### Who it's for - **Self-publishing authors.** Try several directions for a debut or the next book in a series before you commit to one. - **Writers pitching or querying.** A cover concept makes a pitch, a newsletter announcement or a launch page feel real. - **Business and expertise authors.** A clean, readable cover for a nonfiction book that has to look credible in a thumbnail. - **Small presses.** Quick concepts to discuss with an author before a final design. - **Memoir writers.** A cover for a family history or life story you want to print for relatives. ### Ideas to try - The Salt House by Mara Quinn, Literary: three sisters return to the island cottage their mother never left - Dead Air by J. T. Okafor, Thriller: a late-night radio host takes a call from a man who says he's already dead - Flour and Fire by Bea Lindqvist, Romance: two rival bakers fall for each other on a reality show - The Cartographer's Daughter by Ellis Wren, Fantasy: a girl inherits a map that redraws itself every night - Signal Lost by Priya Raman, Sci-fi: the last crew of a mining station hears a voice from the empty ring - Small Shop, Big Margins by Carlos Medina, Business: how a corner hardware store tripled its profit - Bread on the Table by Rosa Ferreira, Memoir: growing up above my father's bakery in Lisbon ### On your own or with Emma - **Concepts.** On your own: Hire a designer for one concept and pay more for alternatives. With Emma: Three front covers in clearly different directions, from one short brief. - **Genre fit.** On your own: Study bestseller lists and try to copy the look in a template. With Emma: Each concept is designed to sit on your genre's shelf. - **Lettering.** On your own: Pick fonts and place the title yourself in an image editor. With Emma: Your title and name lettered on every cover, with notes on the type used. - **Print wrap.** On your own: Work out spine width and bleed from a calculator and build the file by hand. With Emma: Give Emma your page count, trim size and paper, and she builds the wrap to KDP's measurements. ### Tips - Make your one-line story concrete: a person, a problem and a setting give the cover something to show. - Short titles letter bigger and read better in small thumbnails. - Pick the genre readers would shelve it under, not the one you wish it were. The cover's job is to signal the right shelf. - Check the spelling of your title and name on every concept before you use it. - Have your final page count, trim size and paper type ready before asking for a print wrap. Emma won't guess them. ### Try it free The free try designs one front-cover concept with your title and name lettered on it. The other two concepts, the 3D mockup and the print wrap come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial designs one front-cover concept. The other two concepts, the mockup and the print wrap use credits on your account. **Can I print it on Amazon KDP?** The front covers are ready for ebooks. A print cover needs the full wrap (back, spine and front), and its size depends on your final page count, trim size and paper, so tell Emma those and she builds the wrap to KDP's measurements. Check it in KDP's previewer before you publish. **Who owns the design?** You do: the files you download are yours. AI lettering can occasionally misspell a word, so check the title and your name before you print. **Can an AI book cover designer letter my title correctly?** It letters the exact title and author name you type, large and legible. AI lettering can still slip on a letter now and then, so read each cover closely before you use it. **What size are the covers?** The front covers are tall 2:3 rectangles, the usual shape for an ebook cover. A print cover is a separate full wrap sized to your book. **Can I get a back cover and spine?** Yes, as a full print wrap. Tell Emma your final page count, trim size and paper type and she builds the back, spine and front together. **Can I get a 3D mockup for my launch posts?** Yes. Ask for a mockup of your favorite concept and Emma shows it as a standing hardcover on a table. **Which genres does it handle?** The shelf on the page has Thriller, Romance, Fantasy, Sci-fi, Literary, Horror, Memoir and Business. Pick the closest one and describe the mood in your story line or in the chat. **Can I use the cover commercially?** You can use what Emma makes for your own projects, including your book. Check the rules of the store you publish on, and check the lettering before you print. --- ## Brand Kit Starter https://supercool.com/use/brand-kit-starter **Your brand kit, packed and ready in minutes.** Tell your AI agent your business name and its vibe in three words, and add your logo if you have one. It makes a one-page brand guide plus a mood board and social templates. Brand Kit Starter gives a new or growing business the basics of a brand guide on one page. Type your business name and three words for its vibe, add your logo if you have one, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes your palette, fonts, logo rules and brand voice, then makes a mood board, two social post templates and a PDF of the guide. It's the brand kit you want before a website, a menu or a first round of posts: five colors with hex codes and a job for each, a heading and body font pairing, clear do's and don'ts for your logo, and a voice with words to use, words to avoid and sample lines. While she works, tell her who your customers are and a brand you admire. ### How it works 1. **Address the box.** Write your business name on the Ship to line, then fill Contents with your vibe in three words. Type them, or tap chips like warm, bold or calm. 2. **Add your logo (optional).** Drop it on the Fragile, logo inside sticker. Emma builds the palette and logo rules around it. 3. **Press Pack my brand kit.** Emma writes the guide, then makes the mood board, templates and PDF. Chat with her about your customers and the brands you like. 4. **Unpack it on the page.** Tap a swatch to copy its hex, follow each font's link, copy the sample lines, and download the mood board, templates and one-page PDF. ### What you get - A color palette with hex codes and when to use each - A heading and body font pairing - Logo do's and don'ts - Your brand voice, with words to use and sample lines - A mood board, social post templates and a PDF guide ### Who it's for - **New business owners.** A starting point for colors, fonts and tone before the first sign, site or menu goes out. - **Freelancers and consultants.** One look and voice across a portfolio, proposals, invoices and social profiles. - **Online shop sellers.** Product pages, packaging inserts and posts that look and sound like the same shop. - **Podcasts, newsletters and side projects.** A clear identity for a project that needs to look put together without hiring a studio. - **Marketers.** A quick first draft of a brand guide to react to with a client or a team. - **Clubs and nonprofits.** One page that every volunteer who posts or prints something can follow. ### Ideas to try - Rise & Grind Coffee: warm, bold, cozy - Fernwood Yoga Studio: calm, earthy, clean - Pixel Pup Games: playful, techy, rebellious - Harbor & Pine Realty: premium, calm, modern - Little Sprouts Daycare: joyful, warm, playful - Northline Plumbing, with our current logo: honest, bold, clean - Velvet Fork Supper Club: premium, warm, rebellious ### On your own or with Emma - **Where to start.** On your own: Browse palette and font sites and hope the pieces go together. With Emma: Three words in, a matched palette, font pairing and voice back. - **Staying consistent.** On your own: Colors and tone drift from one post to the next. With Emma: One page with hex codes, color roles and sample lines anyone can follow. - **Time and help.** On your own: Hire a designer for a brand guide, or piece one together over several weekends. With Emma: Written while you chat with Emma. - **Templates.** On your own: Build social templates by hand in a design app. With Emma: Two social post templates in your palette, plus a mood board. ### Tips - Choose three words that pull in slightly different directions, like warm, bold and honest. They give the palette and voice more character than three near-synonyms. - Upload your logo as a clean image on a plain background so its colors read clearly. - Tell Emma who your customers are while she works. The voice and sample lines get more specific. - Follow the role written next to each color, so your accent stays special instead of ending up everywhere. - Keep the PDF where anyone who posts or prints for you can find it. ### Try it free The free try gives you the palette with hex codes, the heading and body fonts and your brand voice. The logo do's and don'ts, mood board, social templates and one-page PDF come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial gives you the palette, fonts and brand voice. The logo rules, mood board, social templates and PDF guide come with an account and credits. **Do I need a logo?** No. If you add one, your agent builds the palette and logo rules around it. If not, it suggests colors and fonts that fit your vibe, ready for when you make one. **Where do the fonts come from?** Your agent suggests fonts from Google Fonts, which are free to use, and each one links to its page so you can download it. **What's in the brand kit?** A one-page brand guide: five colors with hex codes and roles, a heading and body font pairing, logo do's and don'ts with clear-space guidance, and your brand voice. With it come a mood board, two social post templates and the guide as a PDF. **Does it design a logo?** No. This page builds the brand around a logo you already have, or gets your colors and fonts ready for when you make one. For a new logo, try SuperCool's Logo Studio page and bring the result back here. **What is a brand voice?** It's how your business sounds everywhere you write. Here you get three traits with what each means, words to use and to avoid, and sample lines for a headline, a social caption and an email sign-off. **What size are the social post templates?** They're 4:5 portrait posts in your palette, with placeholder areas for your headlines and your business name as the only real lettering. **Can I use the hex codes on my website?** Yes. Tap any swatch to copy its hex code, then paste it into your site builder, design app or print order. **Can I change a color or the fonts afterwards?** Yes. Ask Emma in the chat to adjust a color, swap a font or try a different direction for the brand guide. --- ## Character Sheet Studio https://supercool.com/use/character-sheet-studio **A consistent character sheet for your character.** Describe your character or clip a reference, then pick an art style. Your AI agent draws a model sheet: a front, side and back turnaround plus 6 expressions. Drawing a character once is easy. Drawing them the same way from every angle is the hard part, and it's what a character sheet is for. Describe your character, or clip a reference image, and pick an art style. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, draws a front view first, then builds the rest of the sheet from it so the design stays consistent. The full character sheet has a front, side and back turnaround, a sheet of six expressions, a sheet with the character in three outfits, a color palette with hex codes, a short bio and notes for keeping them on model. It's a reference you can work from yourself, share with a collaborator or hand to an artist. ### How it works 1. **Describe who they are.** Write your character on the tracing paper under Who are they?: their look, clothes and anything distinctive. You can also clip a reference image in the corner. 2. **Pick an art style.** Choose Anime, Cartoon, Comic book, Semi-realistic, Chibi or Pixel art, then press Draw my character sheet. 3. **Tell Emma their story.** While she draws, chat about the character's personality and what the sheet is for, a comic, a game or a book, and she works it in. 4. **Get the sheet.** The views, expressions, outfits, palette and notes land on the page as a model sheet, each image ready to download. ### What you get - Front, side and back views of the same character - Six expressions, drawn to match - Outfit variants - A color palette with hex codes - Notes for keeping them on model ### Who it's for - **Comic and webcomic creators.** Artists who need a model sheet to keep a lead character consistent across pages. - **Indie game developers.** Small teams who want a turnaround and expressions to brief an artist or plan sprites. - **Authors.** Novelists who want to see their characters, or give an illustrator a clear starting point. - **Tabletop players.** Players and game masters who want a proper sheet for a hero, villain or recurring NPC. - **VTubers and streamers.** Creators planning a persona who want a reference before commissioning a full model. - **Animation students.** Learners studying turnarounds and expression sheets on their own designs. ### Ideas to try - A scrappy teen inventor with goggles, a red scarf and a robot arm, Anime - An elderly elf librarian with round glasses and moss-green robes, Semi-realistic - A cheerful corgi knight in oversized armor, Chibi - A retired space pirate captain with a prosthetic leg and a long gray coat, Comic book - A shy forest spirit made of moss and mushrooms with glowing eyes, Cartoon - A street racer in a cropped bomber jacket with neon pink hair, Pixel art - My tabletop rogue: half-orc, scar over one eye, leather armor, twin daggers, Comic book ### On your own or with Emma - **Consistency.** On your own: Redraw the character for each angle and watch the proportions drift. With Emma: Every view and sheet is drawn from the front view as its reference. - **Expressions.** On your own: Draw six heads by hand, keeping the face recognizable in each. With Emma: One sheet of six: happy, sad, angry, surprised, thinking and laughing. - **Colors.** On your own: Eyedrop colors and keep a separate note of hex codes. With Emma: A palette with named colors and hex codes. - **Time to a reference.** On your own: Days of sketching, or a commission and a wait. With Emma: A full sheet while you chat with Emma. ### Tips - Describe what makes them recognizable: a silhouette, a signature item, a color. Those details carry across every view. - If you have a sketch or reference, clip it. Emma uses it when drawing the front view. - Pick the style that matches where the character will live. Pixel art suits a game; Comic book suits a webcomic. - Tell Emma what the sheet is for. A game character and a picture-book hero need different notes. - If one view is off, ask Emma to redo just that one. ### Try it free The free try draws the front view of your character and three expressions (happy, angry and surprised). The side and back views, all six expressions, the outfits sheet and the palette come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free version draws the front view and 3 expressions. The side and back views, all 6 expressions, outfits and palette come with an account and credits. **How consistent are the drawings?** Every view is drawn from the front view as its reference, so they match closely, but AI drawings can drift on small details. Ask your agent in the chat to redo any view that's off. **Can I use it for my comic, game or book?** Yes, it's made for that: a reference sheet you can work from or hand to an artist. Check the terms of any platform you publish on for AI-assisted art. **What is a character sheet in art?** A reference sheet, sometimes called a model sheet, that shows one character from several angles with expressions and colors, so anyone drawing them keeps them on model. **Can I make a character sheet from a reference image?** Yes. Clip a reference image on the page, with or without a description, and Emma uses it to draw the front view. **What expressions are included?** Six: happy, sad, angry, surprised, thinking and laughing, drawn as heads on one sheet. **Which art styles can I choose?** Anime, Cartoon, Comic book, Semi-realistic, Chibi or Pixel art. **What file formats do I get?** Each view and sheet is an image you can download from the page. The palette comes as named colors with hex codes. **Can I get more poses or a specific outfit?** The sheet has front, side and back views and three outfits. Ask Emma in the chat afterwards for extra poses or a particular outfit. **Is this AI character sheet good enough to hand to an artist?** That's what it's for: a clear starting reference with views, expressions, colors and on-model notes. Small details can drift, so mark anything that should change. --- ## Daily Specials Board https://supercool.com/use/daily-specials-board **Today's specials, posted in minutes.** Write today's dishes and prices on the board and add your logo. Your AI agent turns them into a styled specials post for Instagram, with a caption ready to go. Writing the specials on the board is quick. Turning them into a good-looking Instagram post every day is not. Type today's dishes and prices, add your logo if you have one, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, designs a styled specials image with every dish and price lettered just as you wrote it, plus a caption and hashtags to post with it. In the full version she places your actual logo file on the design instead of redrawing it, and adds a chalkboard-style menu image and a printable A4 PDF for the window or the tables. Think of it as a daily specials board for your feed: cafes, bistros, bakeries, bars and food trucks can come back with tomorrow's dishes. ### How it works 1. **Write the specials on the board.** Type each dish on its own line with its price beside it. Use 'add a special' for up to six lines. 2. **Add your logo or name.** Tap 'your logo' to add your logo image, or type the restaurant name. Both are optional. 3. **Press Make today's post.** Emma starts the design. Tell her what's special about today, like a local farm, the season or a family recipe, and she can use it in the caption. 4. **Check, copy, post.** The image lands on the page with your dishes and prices listed beside it to check. Download it, copy the caption and hashtags, and post. ### What you get - A styled specials image sized for Instagram - Your own logo on it, exactly as it is - A chalkboard-style menu image - A printable A4 for the window or the tables - A caption and hashtags to post with it ### Who it's for - **Cafes and bistros.** A fresh specials post each morning without opening a design app. - **Bars and pubs.** Happy hour deals and tonight's food specials, styled and posted before the doors open. - **Food trucks.** Today's menu and prices as a post followers can check before they come find you. - **Bakeries.** The day's bakes and prices, plus a printable A4 for the counter with an account. - **Restaurant social media managers.** A consistent daily post for each client, with the caption already written. ### Ideas to try - Braised short rib with creamy polenta $24, Roasted tomato soup $8, Lemon ricotta pancakes $12 - Fish tacos, two for $9, Elote cup $5, Horchata $4, for Casa Lupita - Wild mushroom risotto $19, Burrata with peaches $14, Tiramisu $9, with our logo - Pumpkin spice latte $5.50, Almond croissant $4.25, Breakfast sandwich $8 - Lamb shank $28, Grilled octopus $22, Sticky toffee pudding $10, tonight only - Pho tai $14, Banh mi $11, Thai iced tea $5, for Saigon Corner - Happy hour margaritas $6, Sliders $5, Wings $4 ### On your own or with Emma - **Design.** On your own: Open a template app, fight the layout and redo it every day. With Emma: A styled specials image designed from what you typed. - **Accuracy.** On your own: Retype dishes and prices into a design and hope nothing slips. With Emma: Every dish and price copied as written and listed beside the image for a quick check. - **Your logo.** On your own: Resize and place the logo by hand on each post. With Emma: In the full version, your logo file placed on the design as it is, not redrawn. - **Print.** On your own: Make a separate version for the window. With Emma: A chalkboard menu image and a printable A4 PDF with an account. - **Caption.** On your own: Write a caption and pick hashtags at the last minute. With Emma: A caption and up to eight hashtags, ready to copy. ### Tips - Write each dish exactly as you want it to appear, with the same price format on every line. - Keep lines short. A dish name and a few words read better on a post than a full description. - Use a logo file with a clean or transparent background so it sits well on the design. - Check the dishes and prices against the list on the page before you post, and ask Emma to fix anything. - Tell Emma the story behind a dish while she works. It makes for a better caption. ### Try it free The free try makes the Instagram specials image from your dishes and prices, plus a caption and hashtags. The chalkboard menu and the printable A4 come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial makes the Instagram specials image and a caption. The chalkboard menu and the printable A4 come with an account and credits. **Will the prices be right?** Your agent letters your dishes and prices exactly as you wrote them, but AI images can occasionally slip a character, so the page lists them beside the picture for you to check. Ask your agent to fix anything before you post. **Can I do this every day?** Yes. Come back with tomorrow's specials, or ask your agent to keep the same look and just swap the dishes. **How many specials can I add?** Up to six lines on the board, each with a dish and a price. **Do I need a logo?** No. Without one, Emma letters your restaurant's name at the top if you typed it. With one, your logo goes at the top of the design. **Can I leave out the prices?** Yes. Leave the price box empty and that dish goes on the board without one. **Can I print the specials for the window?** Yes, with an account. You get a printable A4 PDF of the chalkboard menu to hang in the window or set on the tables. **Does it work for drinks or happy hour?** Yes. Anything you can write as a line and a price works: drinks, happy hour, a set menu or weekend brunch. **Is this a daily specials board template?** Not a template you fill in yourself. Emma designs each image from your dishes, and you can ask her to keep the same look and just swap the dishes next time. --- ## Event Poster Studio https://supercool.com/use/event-poster-studio **A poster for your event, designed and ready to print.** Type the event name, date and place and pick a vibe. Your AI agent designs the poster, then sizes it for Instagram and tries two more styles. You have an event and a date, and you need a poster people will actually stop for. Type the event's name, when it is and where, then pick a vibe. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, designs a print-size event poster with your details lettered large and spelled exactly as you typed them, so it reads from across a street or a feed. From that one design, Emma re-lays it out for an Instagram post and an Instagram story, tries two alternate styles so you have options, and writes a short caption with hashtags to share it. It works as an event poster maker for night markets, jazz nights, galas, block parties, club nights, farmers markets, comedy shows and kids' parties, or any vibe you can describe. ### How it works 1. **Type your details on the poster.** Write the event name right onto the poster on the wall, then when it is and where. Spell them exactly how you want them printed. 2. **Pick the vibe.** Tap a tile like Night market, Jazz night or Gala, or describe your own, like "80s roller disco". Then press Paste up my poster. 3. **Chat while Emma designs.** She may ask about tickets, the headliner, or a website or handle to share. Anything you tell her gets passed along. 4. **Check and download.** Your poster lands on the page next to your details as typed, so you can check every word, with a download button, the sizes and styles, and your caption. ### What you get - A print-size poster with your event's details - Instagram post and story versions - Two alternate styles to choose from - A caption and hashtags to share it ### Who it's for - **Venues and bars.** A poster for every live night, sized for the door, the window and Instagram. - **Community organizers.** Block parties, fundraisers and farmers markets that need a bold flyer for noticeboards and group chats. - **Promoters and DJs.** Club night posters plus story versions to post the week of the show. - **Schools and clubs.** Talent shows, bake sales and game nights with a poster to print and pin up. - **Party hosts.** A kids' party or a milestone birthday announced with something better than a text message. ### Ideas to try - Moonlight Night Market, Sat, Nov 8 · 7pm, Riverside Park, Austin, night market vibe - Blue Note Fridays, every Friday · 9pm, The Copper Room, jazz night vibe - The Spring Gala, April 18 · 6:30pm, Grand Hotel Ballroom, gala vibe - Elm Street Block Party, Sun, Jun 1 · noon to 6pm, Elm Street, block party vibe - Open Mic Comedy, Thursdays · 8pm, Lucky's Bar, comedy show vibe - Maya Turns 5, Saturday · 2pm, Oak Hill Community Center, kids party vibe - Harvest Saturday, Oct 25 · 8am to 1pm, Main Street Lot, farmers market vibe - Roller Disco Night, Aug 9 · 8pm, Skateland, 80s roller disco ### On your own or with Emma - **Design.** On your own: Starting from a blank canvas or a template that looks like everyone else's. With Emma: Emma designs a bold layout in your vibe with your details as the headline. - **Getting the text right.** On your own: Retyping details in a design app and catching typos after printing. With Emma: Your details are lettered exactly as typed and shown beside the poster so you can check them. - **Social sizes.** On your own: Rebuilding the layout by hand for a post and a story. With Emma: The same design re-laid out for an Instagram post and story. - **Options.** On your own: Making a second and third version from scratch to compare. With Emma: Two alternate styles with the same text. - **Sharing it.** On your own: Writing the caption and hashtags at the last minute. With Emma: A short caption and hashtags ready to post. ### Tips - Keep the event name short. Fewer words letter larger and read better from a distance. - Write the date and time the way you want them printed, for example "Sat, Nov 8 · 7pm". - If none of the vibe tiles fit, describe yours in a few words, like "moody indie gig" or "tropical pool party". - Check the details beside the poster before you print. AI images can occasionally slip a letter, and Emma can fix it in a follow-up. ### Try it free The free try designs your poster with your event's details on it, plus a caption and hashtags to share it. The Instagram post and story sizes and the two alternate styles come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial makes the poster with your details and a caption to share it. The Instagram sizes and the extra styles come with an account and credits. **Will the text on the poster be right?** Your agent letters your details exactly as you typed them, but AI images can occasionally slip a letter. The page lists your details next to the poster so you can check before printing, and your agent can fix anything in a follow-up. **How big can I print it?** It's a high-quality image that prints well at everyday poster and flyer sizes and looks sharp online. It isn't meant for billboard-size prints. **Can I add a ticket price, headliner or website to the poster?** The poster keeps to the event name, date and time, place and at most one short tagline, so it stays easy to read. Tell Emma about the rest in the chat and she'll pass it along. **Can I put my logo on the poster?** Not on this page. The event poster is designed without logos. **What sizes do I get?** With an account: a print poster in a tall 2:3 shape, an Instagram post at 4:5 and an Instagram story at 9:16, plus two alternate styles. **What vibes can I choose?** Night market, jazz night, gala, block party, club night, farmers market, comedy show and kids party, or type your own. **Can I use it for a recurring event?** Yes. Type the schedule in the When line, like "every Friday · 9pm", and it's lettered just as you wrote it. **Can I use the poster commercially, for a paid event?** You can use what Emma makes for your own projects, including promoting your event. Check the rules of the platforms you post to. --- ## Game Key Art & Loading Screen https://supercool.com/use/game-key-art-and-loading-screen **Key art, a loading screen and store capsules for your game.** Give it your game's name and genre (and your logo or colors, if you have them). Your AI agent paints the key art, then a matching loading screen, a logo lockup and store capsules. Your game deserves art that looks as good as it plays, but key art and store assets can take more time and money than a small team has. Type your game's name and genre into the launcher, add your brand kit if you have one, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, paints your game key art: a wide, cinematic hero scene with no text on it. From that key art she makes a matching loading screen with a calm lower third for the progress bar, a logo lockup with your game's name spelled exactly, and store capsules at Steam's sizes. She also writes a short store description, a 4 to 5 color palette and loading-screen tips. It works as a key art painter and a loading screen maker in one place. ### How it works 1. **Name your game.** Click the hero banner and type your game's name, then add a line about what it's about if you like. 2. **Pick a genre and add your brand kit.** Tap a genre capsule like Fantasy RPG, Cozy farming or Roguelike. Optionally drop up to 4 images (logo, colors, screenshots) into the Brand kit slot. 3. **Press Paint my key art.** Emma starts with the key art. Tell her in the chat about the main character or setting and the mood you want. 4. **Download your art.** The key art, loading screen, logo and capsules slide into the launcher below, each ready to download, along with the store description, palette and tips. ### What you get - Hero key art for your game - A matching loading screen with room for the progress bar - A logo lockup of your game's name - Store capsules at Steam's sizes - A store description and loading-screen tips ### Who it's for - **Solo indie developers.** Get a store page and a loading screen that look finished while you're still polishing the game. - **Game jam teams.** Make key art and a title lockup for your jam page without pulling anyone off the build. - **Small studios pitching.** Put a strong hero image on a pitch deck or a publisher email. - **Devlog creators and streamers.** Use the key art for devlog thumbnails, channel banners and announcement posts. - **Game design students.** Give a portfolio project a proper title screen and store mockup. ### Ideas to try - Lanternfall, Fantasy RPG, a lone lighthouse keeper fights sea monsters - Neon Ronin, Sci-fi shooter, neon samurai in a flooded megacity - Shellback Gardens, Cozy farming, grow a garden on the back of a giant turtle - The Quiet Ward, Horror, a night nurse alone in an abandoned hospital - Dust Circuit, Racing, hover bikes tearing across desert salt flats - Pip and the Clockwork Tower, Platformer, a tiny robot climbs a tower of gears - Ashen Crown, Strategy, rival kingdoms fight over a dying volcano - Bonefire, Roguelike, a skeleton crawls through endless catacombs ### On your own or with Emma - **Key art.** On your own: Commission an artist and wait on sketches, or paint it yourself. With Emma: Paints cinematic key art in your genre from your game's name and a line about it. - **A matching set.** On your own: Brief each asset separately and hope they match. With Emma: The loading screen, logo and library art are made from the key art, so they share one look. - **Store sizes.** On your own: Crop and resize every capsule by hand to the store's specs. With Emma: Cuts header, small, main and library capsules at Steam's sizes, with your logo on. - **Store copy.** On your own: Write the store blurb last, in a hurry. With Emma: Writes a store description, palette and loading-screen tips alongside the art. ### Tips - Add a one-line pitch. 'A lone lighthouse keeper fights sea monsters' gives the key art a clear subject. - Upload your logo or a few screenshots as the brand kit so the art follows your game's real look. - Shorter names read better on the small capsule, so use the name players will see in the store. - Describe the mood in the chat: cozy and warm, tense and dark, or bright and silly. - Check the spelling on the logo lockup before you publish anything. ### Try it free The free try paints your key art and writes a store description, a color palette and loading-screen tips. The loading screen, logo lockup and store capsules come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial paints your key art and writes a store description, palette and loading tips. The loading screen, logo lockup and store capsules come with an account and credits. **Can I use the art commercially?** The images are generated for you to use for your game. Check that nothing in them is too close to existing characters or trademarks before you publish, and check your store's rules on AI-generated art (Steam asks you to disclose it). This isn't legal advice. **Will it match my existing style?** Add your logo, colors or a few screenshots as your brand kit and your agent uses them as reference. Ask for changes on anything that's off. **What is game key art?** Key art is the main promotional image for a game: the hero scene used on store pages, trailers and posters. Here it's a wide 16:9 image with no text, so your logo and titles can sit on top. **What sizes are the store capsules?** Header 920x430, small 462x174, main 1232x706 and library 600x900, the sizes Steam uses. The first three are cut from the key art with your logo on; the library capsule comes from tall portrait art of your hero. **Does the loading screen have room for a progress bar?** Yes. It's a 16:9 scene from the same world as the key art, with a quiet lower third left clear for your progress bar and tips. **Is the logo on a transparent background?** Yes. Emma makes the logo lockup on a plain background, then removes it so you can place the logo on any art. **Can I use my own characters?** Yes. Add art of your characters to the brand kit and describe them in the chat, and Emma uses it as reference for your game key art. **Does it make sizes for mobile or console stores?** Not on this page. It makes 16:9 key art and a 16:9 loading screen, plus capsules at Steam's sizes. --- ## Local Service Flyer https://supercool.com/use/local-service-flyer **A flyer for your local business, ready to print today.** Write your business, your services, where you work and your number. Your AI agent designs a flyer people will keep on the fridge, as a print-ready PDF. A good flyer still works for local businesses. It goes on the fridge, the community board and the coffee shop counter, and people call the number. Write your business name, your services, the area you serve and your phone number on the flyer, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, designs it with a bold headline, your services as short bullets and your number large at the bottom. The full local service flyer comes as a print-ready US Letter PDF, plus a square Facebook post version, a tall door hanger version and a short caption to post it with. Emma only puts on what you give her: no made-up prices, offers, licenses, reviews or guarantees. If you want an offer or a license number on it, just tell her. ### How it works 1. **Write on the flyer.** Type your business name and your services on the flyer on the fridge, then the area under Serving and your number under Call. 2. **Press Design my flyer.** Emma settles the words first, a headline, up to five service bullets, your area and your number, then designs the flyer around them. 3. **Add anything extra in the chat.** She asks about an offer for new customers, a website or a license number to show, and adds what you give her. 4. **Check, download and print.** The flyer lands on the page with your number shown beside it to check, along with the PDF, the Facebook post, the door hanger and the caption. ### What you get - A designed flyer with your services and number - A print-ready letter-size PDF - A Facebook post version - A door hanger version - A caption to post it with ### Who it's for - **Home service pros.** Window cleaners, handymen, painters and lawn crews who canvass neighborhoods. - **Pet care businesses.** Dog walkers, pet sitters and groomers who advertise on community boards and in local groups. - **New local businesses.** Anyone starting out who needs something to hand out this week. - **Seasonal services.** Snow removal, leaf cleanup and pool openings that need a fresh flyer each season. - **Tutors and lessons.** Music teachers, tutors and coaches who post at libraries, schools and cafes. ### Ideas to try - Sparkle Window Cleaning: windows, gutters, pressure washing. Serving Westside & Maple Hills. (555) 014-2398 - Green Thumb Lawn Care: mowing, edging, leaf cleanup. Serving north Austin. (512) 555-0182 - Paws & Go Dog Walking: daily walks, pet sitting, drop-in visits. Serving Capitol Hill. (206) 555-0147 - Handy Dan Repairs: drywall, fixtures, furniture assembly, small plumbing. Serving Oak Park and Forest Park. (708) 555-0133 - Snow Pros: driveway plowing, walkway shoveling, salting. Serving Eagan and Apple Valley. (651) 555-0110 - Piano lessons with Ms. Lee: beginners and kids, in your home. Serving Pasadena. (626) 555-0199 ### On your own or with Emma - **Design.** On your own: Fiddle with a template until the text fits and the photo looks right. With Emma: A designed flyer with a headline, service bullets and an illustration of your service. - **Printing.** On your own: Export, resize and hope the margins hold. With Emma: A print-ready US Letter PDF with the flyer centered on the page. - **Other formats.** On your own: Rebuild it for a Facebook post and a door hanger. With Emma: A square Facebook post and a tall door hanger made from the same flyer. - **Accuracy.** On your own: Easy to slip in claims you can't back up. With Emma: Only what you give her, with your number shown beside the flyer to check. ### Tips - Keep services short: three to five words each reads best from across a room. - Type your phone number exactly how you want it shown, including the area code. - Name the neighborhoods or towns people know, such as Westside & Maple Hills, rather than a ZIP code. - If you have a first-time discount, tell Emma in the chat. She won't add one on her own. - Check the number on the flyer against the one shown beside it before you print. ### Try it free The free try designs your flyer as an image, with a caption to post it with. The print-ready PDF, the Facebook post and the door hanger come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial designs the flyer as an image with a caption. The print-ready PDF, the Facebook post and the door hanger come with an account and credits. **Will my phone number be right?** Your agent letters it exactly as you typed it, but AI images can occasionally slip a digit, so the page shows your number beside the flyer to check. Ask your agent to fix anything before you print. **Will it add discounts or claims I didn't give?** No. Your agent only puts on what you tell it. If you want an offer, a license number or reviews on the flyer, tell it in the chat and it adds them. **How do I make a flyer for my local business?** Type your business name, services, service area and phone number on this page and press Design my flyer. Emma designs the flyer and, with an account, a print-ready PDF and two other versions. **What size is the flyer?** The flyer is a portrait design, placed on a US Letter page (8.5 x 11 in) with small margins in the print PDF. **Can I print it at home?** Yes. The PDF is US Letter, so it prints on a standard home or office printer, or you can take it to a print shop. **What is a door hanger version?** A tall, narrow layout of your flyer that fits a door hanger, made from the same design. **Can I add my logo?** Not on this page. The flyer uses your business name as lettering. Ask Emma in the chat afterwards about working your logo in. **Can I change the wording after it's made?** Yes. Ask Emma in the chat to change the headline, a service or any detail, and she redoes it. **Do I need a business name?** No. You can start with just your services, your area and your number. --- ## Logo Studio https://supercool.com/use/logo-studio **Three logo concepts for your business, pitched in minutes.** Type your business name, what you do and the feel you're after. Your AI agent designs three distinct logo directions with colors and fonts, and puts the strongest on real-world mockups. A good logo starts with options. Logo Studio pitches you three logo concepts for your business, the way a design agency would. Type your business name, say what you do, pick the feel you want, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, designs three distinct directions, each with your name spelled exactly as you typed it. The concepts go in clearly different directions, such as a symbol beside the name, a pure wordmark, and a badge or emblem. Each comes with a color palette of three to four colors with hex codes and a heading and body font pairing. Then Emma puts the strongest concept on three mockups: a storefront sign, a business card on a desk and an app icon on a phone, so you can judge it in real use. ### Real results - Little Ember Roasters, Vintage: Three vintage logo concepts; this is the emblem badge on a storefront sign (https://supercool.com/use-examples/logo-studio/1.webp) - Northline Electric, Bold: Three bold logo concepts; this is the lightning bolt lockup on a lit shop sign (https://supercool.com/use-examples/logo-studio/2.webp) - Little Ember Roasters, Vintage: The hand-lettered script wordmark, another of the three concepts (https://supercool.com/use-examples/logo-studio/3.webp) ### How it works 1. **Type your business name.** Click the board in the middle of the pitch wall and type the name exactly as it should appear. 2. **Write the brief and pick the feel.** On the sticky note, say what you do. Then pick the feel: Bold, Friendly, Luxe, Minimal, Playful or Vintage. Press Pitch me three logos. 3. **Chat while Emma designs.** Tell Emma where the logo will be used most (signage, social, packaging) and any colors you love or hate. 4. **Compare the boards.** Your three concepts land on the page with their colors and fonts. Tap the strongest to see it on the storefront, card and app icon, and download what you like. ### What you get - Three distinct logo concepts to choose from - A color palette with hex codes for each - A heading and body font pairing for each - The strongest concept on a storefront, a business card and an app icon ### Who it's for - **New small businesses.** See three directions for your first logo before you print signs, cards or a menu. - **Side projects and shops.** A clean mark for an online store, a market stall or a newsletter, with colors and fonts to match. - **Freelancers and consultants.** A professional-looking identity for your proposals, invoices and profile. - **Businesses due for a refresh.** Explore new directions for an old logo and see them on a sign and a card before committing. - **App makers.** Check how a concept holds up as a small app icon on a phone home screen. ### Ideas to try - Little Ember Roasters, a neighborhood coffee roaster, Vintage - Pawsh Mobile, mobile dog grooming, Friendly - Hartwell and Lane, a boutique accounting firm, Luxe - ByteSized, kids' coding classes, Playful - Northline Electric, residential electricians, Bold - Stillwater, a yoga and breathwork studio, Minimal - Mesa Verde Tacos, a family taco truck, Playful ### On your own or with Emma - **Concepts.** On your own: Hire a designer for one round, or click through generic templates. With Emma: Three distinct directions from one short brief, each with your name spelled exactly. - **Colors and type.** On your own: Pick colors and fonts separately and hope they match. With Emma: Each concept comes with a palette with hex codes and a heading and body font pairing. - **Seeing it in use.** On your own: Build mockups yourself in an image editor. With Emma: The strongest concept on a storefront sign, a business card and an app icon. - **Revisions.** On your own: Wait for each round of changes. With Emma: Ask Emma in the same chat for changes or more variations of the one you like. ### Tips - Type the name exactly as you want it shown, including capitals and spaces. - Keep the brief short and specific: what you sell and to whom. - Pick the feel your customers should get. The one you like best may not be the one that sells. - Tell Emma colors to avoid as well as colors you love. It narrows the palettes quickly. - Check that the logo still reads on the app icon mockup. If it's clear tiny, it'll work almost anywhere. ### Try it free The free try gives you one logo concept with a suggested color palette and font pairing. All three concepts and the mockups come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial gives you one logo concept with suggested colors and fonts. All three concepts and the mockups come with an account and credits. **What files do I get?** Images of each logo concept and its mockups, ready to download. Ask your agent for changes, a transparent background or more variations of the one you like. **Can I trademark a logo made this way?** The logos are generated for you, but your agent doesn't run trademark searches. Before you register or print at scale, check that it isn't too close to an existing mark. This isn't legal advice. **How many logo concepts do I get?** Three, in clearly different directions. The strongest one is also shown on three mockups. **Can I get a transparent background?** Each logo comes on a plain background. Ask Emma for a transparent version of the one you like. **Will my business name be spelled right?** Emma spells it exactly as you typed it. AI lettering can still slip on a letter, so check each concept before you use it. **What makes a good logo for a small business?** A simple mark that reads at small sizes, a name people can spell, and two or three colors that work on a sign and a screen. The mockups help you check all three before you choose. **Can I use the fonts it suggests?** The pairings are fonts you can look up and use online. Check each font's license for your use. **Is this an AI logo maker or a full brand identity?** It's an AI logo maker with colors and fonts for each concept. For a broader brand kit, ask Emma in the chat. **Can I use the logo for my business?** Yes, you can use what Emma makes for your own projects. Before you register it or print at scale, check it isn't close to an existing mark. --- ## Merch & Jersey Designer https://supercool.com/use/merch-and-jersey-designer **Your team's jersey, designed front and back.** Pick your colors, name your team and choose a mascot. Your AI agent designs the jersey with a name and number on the back, then puts the look on a hoodie and a cap. Design a custom team jersey without a design program. Type your team name right onto the jersey, pick the jersey and trim colors, and choose a mascot or symbol. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, designs the front with your team name across the chest and the mascot as a crest, then the back of the same jersey with the player name and number you gave. From the same look she makes a hoodie mockup and a cap mockup, plus your crest as a transparent PNG print file. Everything hangs in the locker on this page, turnable front to back and ready to download, with your colors' hex codes and a line of printing advice. This merch and jersey designer suits rec leagues, clubs, gaming teams and small brands. ### How it works 1. **Type your team.** Click the jersey in the locker and type the team name across the chest. 2. **Pick colors and a mascot.** Tap a Jersey color and a Trim and lettering color, then a mascot like Wolf or Lightning, or type your own. 3. **Turn it around.** Tap “Turn it around” and type the player name and number for the back. 4. **Press Design my jersey.** Emma designs the front, back, mockups and crest while you tell her the sport or occasion. They land in the locker below, ready to download. ### What you get - A custom jersey front in your colors - The back with the player name and number - Hoodie and cap mockups - Your crest as a transparent print file ### Who it's for - **Rec and amateur teams.** A real team look for the season, with a file the print shop can work from. - **Coaches and team parents.** A jersey design to share with the team before anyone orders. - **Esports and gaming teams.** A crest, a jersey and a hoodie that match on stream and in person. - **Small brands.** A first merch drop: a jersey, a hoodie and a cap in one consistent look. - **Friend groups and fantasy leagues.** A jersey with everyone's names for the reunion, the trip or the draft party. ### Ideas to try - Harbor City Hawks, navy with gold trim, an eagle, back: REYES 7 - Northside Wolves, black with silver trim, a wolf, back: KOWALSKI 23 - Pine Hill Picklers, forest green with white trim, a pine tree - Team Glitch, black with lime trim, lightning, back: NOVA 1 - Sunday Dads FC, maroon with gold trim, a lion, back: COACH 50 - Desert Dogs, teal with white trim, a howling coyote, back: MARTINEZ 12 - Brew Crew Runners, royal blue with hot pink trim, a flame ### On your own or with Emma - **Mockups.** On your own: Find templates and place your design on each one With Emma: Front, back, hoodie and cap in the same look - **Lettering.** On your own: Set the name and number by hand in a design app With Emma: Team name, player name and number spelled exactly as you typed them - **Print file.** On your own: Cut the crest out of its background yourself With Emma: The crest as a transparent PNG - **Color matching.** On your own: Guess at color codes for the printer With Emma: Each color listed with its hex code ### Tips - Pick a trim color that contrasts with the jersey so the lettering reads from a distance. - Keep the team name short; it has to fit across the chest. - Simple mascots make cleaner crests for printing. - Ask your print shop what file they need before you order. - For a full roster, ask Emma afterwards for more names and numbers. ### Try it free The free try designs your jersey front in your colors, with your team name and mascot, and gives you your color codes and a printing tip. The back with name and number, the hoodie and cap mockups and the crest print file come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial designs the jersey front in your colors. The back, the hoodie and cap mockups and the print files come with an account and credits. **Can I send these to a printer?** You get high-resolution images and your crest on a transparent background, which most print shops can work from. For screen printing they may ask for a vector file, which they can trace from the crest. **Can I make a whole roster?** Yes. Ask your agent in the chat for more names and numbers on the back, or for an away version in reversed colors. **Which colors can I choose?** Twelve, for the jersey and for the trim and lettering, from navy and maroon to hot pink and lime. The result lists each with its hex code so you can match it at the print shop. **Does it put a name and number on the back?** Yes. Turn the jersey around on the page and type them. If you leave the name blank the team name goes on the back, and the number defaults to 10. **Can I upload my own logo?** Not on this page. Emma designs a crest from the mascot or symbol you pick or describe, and adds no brand logos. **What do the mockups show?** A hoodie and a cap in the same look as your jersey, so you can see the whole set together. **Can I design a custom team jersey for any sport?** The design is a classic sports jersey. Tell Emma the sport or occasion in the chat while she works. **Can I sell merch made with the merch and jersey designer?** You can use what Emma makes for your own projects. Make sure the team name and symbol are yours to use, and check with your print shop. --- ## Retail Ad Generator https://supercool.com/use/retail-ad-generator **Turn a product page into a sale ad.** Paste a product link or drop a screenshot, and type the deal. Your AI agent makes a bold square ad for each product with the price and offer on it, ready for the feed. Running a sale is easy. Making an ad for every product on it is the slow part. This AI retail ad generator works like a weekly sale circular: paste a product page link or drop a screenshot or photo, write the price on its tag, and type the deal. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, makes a bold square ad for each product with the price and the offer on it, ready for the feed. Each ad shows your product large and crisp on a bold backdrop, with the price on a yellow tag and the offer on a red sale sticker, set as real text exactly as written. Emma writes a short headline and a post caption for each ad, and makes story and banner sizes of the first product's ad. If you leave the price blank, she reads it from the product page and never makes one up. ### How it works 1. **Add your products.** In each tile, drop a screenshot or photo, or paste the product page link. Add up to three products with Add a product. 2. **Set the price.** Write the price on the yellow tag, or leave Price (optional) blank and Emma reads it from the page. 3. **Type the deal.** Write the offer on the sale sticker, like "20% OFF this weekend" or "Buy one, get one free". Then press Make my sale ads. 4. **Download and post.** While Emma works she may ask your store's name and when the sale ends. Your ads land on the page with a download button and a caption for each. ### What you get - One square ad per product - The exact price and your offer on it - A post caption for each ad - Story and banner sizes of the first ad ### Who it's for - **Online store owners.** Sale ads for your best sellers, straight from their product pages. - **Local shops.** A square ad for this week's deals to post on Instagram and Facebook, from a photo of the product. - **Resellers and marketplace sellers.** Price-forward ads for listings you want to move, from a screenshot of the listing. - **Social media managers.** Consistent sale ads for a client's promo without rebuilding a template for each product. - **Market stall and pop-up vendors.** A bold price-and-offer post to share before the weekend. ### Ideas to try - Link to my ceramic mug product page, $24, offer: 20% OFF this weekend - Screenshot of our running shoes, price from the page, offer: Free shipping over $50 - Three products: a backpack, a lunchbox and a water bottle, offer: Back to school: $10 off - Photo of our scented candle, $18, offer: Buy one, get one free - My handmade leather wallet listing, $45, offer: 15% off for Father's Day - Link to a cordless drill on our store, price from the page, offer: Clearance, this week only ### On your own or with Emma - **Making the ad.** On your own: Cutting out product photos and laying out a sale graphic in a design app. With Emma: Emma makes a bold square ad around your product's own photo. - **Getting the price right.** On your own: Retyping prices and catching mistakes after posting. With Emma: The price and offer are set onto the ad as text exactly as written. - **Several products.** On your own: Repeating the whole process for every item. With Emma: Up to three products, one square ad each, in one go. - **Captions.** On your own: Writing a fresh caption for every post. With Emma: A headline and a post caption for each ad. - **Other sizes.** On your own: Rebuilding the layout for stories and banners. With Emma: Story and banner sizes of your first product's ad. ### Tips - Put your most important product first. It's the one that gets story and banner sizes. - Use a clear photo or screenshot where the product fills most of the frame. - Type the price yourself when you can. A typed price is used over whatever the page shows. - Keep the offer short enough to read on a sticker: "20% OFF" reads faster than a full sentence. - Check the price and offer on every ad before you post. ### Try it free The free try makes one square ad for your first product, with its price and your offer on it. Ads for more products and the story and banner sizes come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial makes one square ad for your first product. Ads for more products and the story and banner sizes come with an account and credits. **Where does the price come from?** From the price tag you type, or read from the product page or screenshot you give. The price is set onto the ad as text exactly as written, so check it before you post. **Can I use the ads for my store?** Yes. The files you download are yours to use. Use product photos you have the rights to. **How many products can I make ads for?** The retail ad generator takes up to three products per run, with one square ad each. The story and banner sizes are made for the first product's ad. **What sizes are the retail ads?** Every product gets a square 1:1 ad for the feed. The first product also gets a tall 9:16 story version and a wide banner version. **What if the product page doesn't show a price?** Emma leaves the price off the ad and tells you, rather than guessing. Type the price on the tag to make sure it's on there. **Can I use a screenshot instead of a link?** Yes. Drop a screenshot or photo into the product's tile. You can also add both a link and a screenshot. **Does it show the original price too?** When the product page shows a was price, Emma picks it up and the page lists it crossed out next to your ad. The ad itself carries the sale price and your offer. **Will the product look like my real product?** Emma uses your product's own photo or screenshot as the reference and is told to keep it looking exactly like it. Compare the ad with your product before you post. --- ## Small Business Website Builder https://supercool.com/use/small-business-website **A live website for your business, in minutes.** Say what your business is and what you do. Your AI agent builds and publishes a site with your services and a way for customers to reach you. Most small businesses need one good page: what you do, why people pick you, and a way to get in touch. This AI website builder for small businesses gets you there without templates, plugins or a designer. Type your business name and what you do, pick a look, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, builds the site and publishes it. You get a one-page site with a clear headline and call to action, your services, a short section on why customers choose you, a note on the area you serve, and a contact form for new leads. When it's live, the link comes back and the site opens right on the page, so you can click through it and share it straight away. ### How it works 1. **Type your name and what you do.** Write your business name as the headline, then a line on what you do, such as your trade, your town and anything that sets you apart. 2. **Pick a look.** Choose Clean, Bold, Warm or Premium for the overall style, then press Build my site. 3. **Chat while Emma builds.** Emma builds the page in one go while you talk to her. Give her the phone number or email customers should use, and she adds it. 4. **Open your live site.** The published link lands on the page with a live preview, plus your site's copy, what's on it and a few next steps, such as connecting your own domain. ### What you get - A published one-page website - Your services and why customers choose you - A contact form for new leads - A link you can share right away ### Who it's for - **Trades and home services.** Electricians, plumbers, cleaners and landscapers who need a page to send people to from a truck sign, a flyer or a quote. - **Clinics and studios.** Dentists, salons, fitness studios and therapists who want their services and a contact form in one place. - **New businesses.** Founders who just registered a name and want something real online before the first customer asks for a link. - **Side businesses.** Dog walkers, tutors, photographers and bakers who have outgrown a social profile and want their own page. - **Owners with an outdated site.** Anyone whose old site is broken or embarrassing and who wants a clean replacement without starting a long project. ### Ideas to try - Harbor Light Electric: residential electrician in Denver, panel upgrades and EV chargers - Bright Smile Family Dental: family dental clinic in Tampa, open Saturdays - Muddy Paws: dog grooming and daycare in Portland, with pickup in the Pearl District - Oak & Ember Bakery: sourdough and custom cakes in Asheville, order ahead for weekends - Second Wind Physio: sports injury physical therapy in San Diego, same-week appointments - Clearview Window Washing: homes and storefronts across Columbus, gutters too - Rosa Martinez Tutoring: math and SAT prep for high schoolers, online or in Austin ### On your own or with Emma - **Getting started.** On your own: Pick a platform, a template and a plan, then learn the editor. With Emma: Type your name and what you do, pick a look, press Build my site. - **Writing the copy.** On your own: Stare at blank sections for headline, services and why choose us. With Emma: Emma writes the headline, services and why-choose-us section from your description. - **Contact form.** On your own: Find a form add-on, set it up and test where messages go. With Emma: A contact form is part of the page she builds. - **Publishing.** On your own: Sort out hosting and publishing settings before anyone can see it. With Emma: She publishes the site and the link opens on the page. - **Changes later.** On your own: Log back in and hunt for the right block to edit. With Emma: Tell Emma what to change, or ask her to connect a domain you own. ### Tips - Put your town or service area in the what-you-do line. It helps the page speak to the customers you actually serve. - Name two or three services you most want to be hired for, rather than everything you've ever done. - When Emma asks, give her the phone number or email you check most, so new leads reach you. - Pick the look that matches your business: Warm for a bakery or salon, Premium for a law office or boutique, Bold for something loud and young. - After it's live, read the copy once as a customer would and ask Emma to fix anything that sounds off. ### Try it free The free try writes your site's copy (headline, tagline, three services, why choose us and a call to action) and shows a first look at your homepage design. The live, published site with its contact form gets built once you have an account with credits. ### Questions **Do I need any technical skills?** No. Describe your business and your agent does the rest. **Can I use my own domain?** Yes. After it's built, ask your agent to connect a domain you own or buy a new one. **Is it free?** Yes. The free try writes your site's copy and shows a design of your homepage. Create an account with credits and Emma builds and publishes the live site. **What is the best AI website builder for a small business?** The one that gets a real page live with your services and a way to contact you. Here you describe the business and Emma, your AI agent, builds and publishes a one-page site with a contact form. **How many pages does the website have?** One. It's a single page with a hero and call to action, your services, why choose us, your service area and a contact form. **Can I edit the website after it's built?** Yes. Ask Emma in the chat to change wording, swap a service or adjust the look, and she updates it. **Where do contact form messages go?** While she builds, Emma asks which phone number or email customers should use. Once the site is live, send a test message through the form and tell her if anything doesn't arrive. **Does it include photos?** The site can include one generated hero image for your business. If you have your own photos, ask Emma about adding them after the first build. **Can it build an online store or booking system?** Not on this page. It builds a one-page site with a contact form. Ask Emma in the chat if you need more. **How long does it take?** A few minutes. You can chat with Emma while she builds, and the link appears on the page when the site is published. --- ## Meta Ad Account Analyzer https://supercool.com/use/ad-account-analyzer **Find out what's wasting your ad budget.** Connect your Meta ad account. Your AI agent reviews your campaigns and ads and gives you the changes that matter most, with the numbers behind them. Most ad accounts leak money in a few places: a campaign that spends without converting, an ad that tired out weeks ago, a budget split across too many ad sets. This Meta ads analyzer finds those spots for you. Connect your Facebook and Instagram ad account, pick what you want to know, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, reads your campaigns and ads and reports back. The report covers the last 30 days. You see your spend, results, cost per result and return on ad spend where your account tracks it, plus a health score for the account. Then the useful part: what's working, what's wasting money, and five concrete changes ranked by impact, each with the numbers behind it. Emma reads the account for the analysis and changes nothing unless you ask. ### How it works 1. **Connect with Meta.** Create your free SuperCool account, then press Connect with Meta and approve access to your Facebook and Instagram ad account. 2. **Pick your question.** Choose Where am I wasting money?, Which ads are working best? or What should I change this week?, then press Analyze my ads. 3. **Chat while Emma reviews.** Emma reads your campaigns, ad sets and ads. Tell her your goal (sales, leads or traffic) and your budget so she can weigh the advice. 4. **Read the report.** Your report lands on the page: headline numbers, a health score, what's working, what's wasting money and the ranked changes. ### What you get - What's working and what's wasting money - Your best and worst ads - 5 concrete changes ranked by impact - The numbers behind every recommendation ### Who it's for - **Small business owners.** You run your own Facebook and Instagram ads and want a second pair of eyes on where the budget actually goes. - **Ecommerce stores.** See which campaigns bring purchases at a cost you can live with and which ones just spend. - **Freelance marketers.** Get a quick read on a client's account before a call, with the numbers to back up what you recommend. - **Lead generation businesses.** Find the ads with the lowest cost per lead and the ones dragging the average up. - **Founders running their first ads.** Understand what your results mean in plain language, and what to try next week. ### Ideas to try - Where am I wasting money? We sell handmade candles and spend most of our budget on two prospecting campaigns. - Which ads are working best? My goal is leads for a roofing company in Tampa. - What should I change this week? I'm spending about the same every day and sales have dropped off. - Where am I wasting money? I run a yoga studio and boost posts a lot. - Which ads are working best? I want more bookings for my dog grooming van. - What should I change this week? We're launching a summer sale soon and want to know what to cut first. ### On your own or with Emma - **Getting the numbers.** On your own: Export reports, build columns, and line up campaigns, ad sets and ads by hand. With Emma: Emma reads the last 30 days of campaign and ad results straight from your connected account. - **Spotting waste.** On your own: Scan rows of spend and results and hope the problem stands out. With Emma: A short list of what's wasting money, with how much it spent and why it isn't paying off. - **Deciding what to change.** On your own: Guess which fix matters most, or wait for an agency audit. With Emma: Five concrete changes ranked high, medium or low impact, each with the numbers behind it. - **Follow-up questions.** On your own: Go back into the reports every time you wonder about something. With Emma: Ask Emma in the chat and she answers from your account. ### Tips - Tell Emma what counts as a result for you (purchases, leads, bookings) so she judges each campaign against the right goal. - Share your monthly budget in the chat. A change that saves a little matters more on a small budget. - If you run several ad accounts, say which one you want reviewed. - Make one or two of the ranked changes at a time, then run the analysis again later to see what moved. - Use the ad names in the report to find the exact ads in your ads manager before you pause anything. ### Try it free Connecting Meta needs a real account, so this page can't be tried without signing up: create a free SuperCool account, connect your ad account and Emma starts the review on your small free allowance. Credits on your account cover the full analysis and any follow-up questions. ### Questions **Is my ad account safe?** Your agent only reads your account to analyze it, and only makes changes if you ask. **Which accounts work?** Any Meta ad account (Facebook and Instagram) you can sign in to. **Is it free?** Yes, you can try it free with a free account. **What does a Meta ads analyzer actually check?** Your campaigns, ad sets and ads over the last 30 days: spend, results, cost per result and return on ad spend where it's tracked. From that it shows what's working, what's wasting money and the changes worth making. **Does it cover Instagram ads too?** Yes. Instagram ads run through the same Meta ad account, so they're part of the review. **Can it make the changes for me?** The analysis only reads your account. If you want something changed, ask Emma in the chat and she'll only act on what you ask for. **What date range does it look at?** The last 30 days by default. If you want a different window, say so in the chat. **How accurate are the savings estimates?** They're estimates based on your recent results, not a promise. Ad performance shifts, so treat them as a guide to what to try first. **Does it work with Google or TikTok ads?** Not on this page. This analyzer is for Meta ad accounts (Facebook and Instagram). --- ## 90-Day Launch Plan https://supercool.com/use/90-day-launch-plan **Map your launch, week by week.** Say what you're launching, your budget and where you want to be on day 90. Your AI agent plans every week with channels, tasks and targets, and splits your budget across them. Most launches stall in the gap between the idea and the calendar. You know what you're launching, roughly what you can spend and where you want to be, but not what to do on the Tuesday of week three. Tell Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, those three things and she builds a 90-day launch plan you can follow week by week. The plan runs 13 weeks in three phases: pre-launch, launch and grow. Every week has a focus, a few concrete tasks, the channels to use, that week's spend and a target. Your budget is split across channels and adds up to exactly what you gave, and the assumptions behind the plan are written down. With an account, Emma also writes week 1's posts and emails. ### How it works 1. **Say what you're launching.** At Stop 1, Launching, describe the product, shop or service in a line. 2. **Set your fuel and destination.** Pick a total budget at Stop 2 ($0, $500, $2,000, $10,000 or type your own) and your day-90 goal at Stop 3, or tap a suggestion like First 100 customers. 3. **Press Plan my launch.** Emma starts planning right away. Tell her in the chat who your customer is and what you've already tried, and she works it in. 4. **Follow the timeline.** The plan lands on the page week by week, with the budget split, the one metric to track and the assumptions. With an account you also get week 1's content and a PDF. ### What you get - A 13-week plan in three phases - Tasks, channels and a target for every week - A suggested budget split by channel - Week 1's posts and emails, written ### Who it's for - **First-time founders.** Turn an app or service idea into a week-by-week go-to-market plan with clear targets. - **Online shop owners.** Plan a product drop or a new Etsy shop around organic posts, partnerships and a small ad budget. - **Service businesses.** A bookkeeper, coach or agency launching a new offer gets a plan for outreach, referrals and content. - **New consumer brands.** A drink, candle or skincare line maps pre-launch buzz, launch week and the growth weeks after. - **Side projects with no budget.** Set the budget to $0 and get a plan built on organic channels, partnerships and outreach. - **Marketing freelancers.** Draft a starting 90-day plan for a client, then adjust it together. ### Ideas to try - A meal-prep app for busy nurses, $2,000, 1,000 signups - My handmade candle shop on Etsy, $500, first 100 customers - A bookkeeping service for dentists, $0, 10 paying clients - A new cold brew coffee brand, $10,000, stocked in 15 local cafés - An online course on sourdough baking, $300, 200 students - A dog-walking business in my neighborhood, $0, a waitlist of 50 clients - A scheduling tool for physical therapy clinics, $5,000, $10k in monthly revenue ### On your own or with Emma - **Structure.** On your own: A to-do list that grows faster than it shrinks. With Emma: 13 weeks in three phases, each week with a focus, tasks, channels and a target. - **Budget.** On your own: Spend as you go and find out halfway through that the money is gone. With Emma: A suggested split by channel that adds up to your budget exactly, with a reason for each line. - **Measuring.** On your own: Track everything and learn little from it. With Emma: One metric to watch, plus weekly targets clearly labelled as targets. - **First week's content.** On your own: Stare at a blank post on launch day. With Emma: With an account, three social posts and two emails for week 1, written and ready to send. ### Tips - Be specific about what you're launching and who it's for. 'A meal-prep app for night-shift nurses' plans better than 'an app'. - Make the goal measurable: signups, customers, revenue or a waitlist number. - Tell Emma what you've already tried and which channels you can realistically keep up with. - Read the assumptions first. If one is wrong, tell Emma and she can rework the plan. - Revisit the targets every couple of weeks and adjust as real results come in. ### Try it free The free try builds the full 13-week plan with its phases, the budget split, the metric to track and the assumptions. Week 1's posts and emails, written and ready to send, and a PDF of the plan come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial makes the full week-by-week plan with channels and a budget split. Writing the first week's posts and emails, and the PDF, come with an account and credits. **Will it guarantee my goal?** No. It's a plan built on the assumptions it lists, not a forecast or professional advice. Treat the targets and budget split as a starting point and adjust as real results come in. **What if my budget is zero?** That works. The plan leans on organic channels, partnerships and outreach instead of paid ads. **What is a 90-day launch plan?** It's a go-to-market plan for the three months around a launch, broken into weeks. This one runs 13 weeks in three phases, pre-launch, launch and grow, with tasks, channels, spend and a target for each week. **Which marketing channels will it choose?** Emma picks channels that fit your product, budget and goal, and explains each line of the budget split. Tell her in the chat which channels you already use or want to avoid. **Can I get the plan as a PDF?** Yes, with an account. The full version renders the plan as a PDF with the phases, the weeks as a table, the budget split and the assumptions. **What content does it write for week one?** With an account, Emma writes three social posts and two emails for week 1, ready to send. Ask her in the chat if you want any of them changed. **Does it research my market or competitors?** Not on this page. The plan is built from what you tell Emma and what she knows, with the assumptions listed. For a sourced look at your market, use the Market Research Brief. **Can I change the plan after it's made?** Yes. Ask Emma in the chat to shift the budget, swap a channel or move a milestone in your 90-day launch plan, and she updates it. --- ## Calculator App Builder https://supercool.com/use/calculator-app-builder **A branded calculator for your website, built in minutes.** Pick what it calculates and type your brand name. Your AI agent builds a live web calculator at its own link, ready to share or embed, and can capture leads from it. A calculator on your site answers the question visitors came with: what will this cost me, or what do I get back? Pick what it works out, type your brand name, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, builds and publishes a live web calculator at its own link. Results update as people type, and a plain line under the result explains how the number is worked out. You can switch on lead capture, so visitors leave a name and email to see the full breakdown, and those contacts are saved to your site's leads. When it's done, the calculator opens in a live preview on this page, in phone or desktop view, with an embed code to paste into your own website. This calculator app builder suits lenders, freelancers, shops and anyone who quotes prices. ### How it works 1. **Pick what it calculates.** Tap Loan payment, ROI, Fees, Project quote or Savings. Choose Something else to describe your own, like how much paint a room needs. 2. **Type your brand name.** Click the header of the mockup and type your brand. Flip on “Capture leads” if you want visitors' emails. 3. **Press Build my calculator.** Emma decides the inputs and the formula, then builds and publishes it. Share your brand colors or website, and who uses it, while she works. 4. **Share or embed.** The live calculator opens here with its link, the formula spelled out, and an embed code to copy. ### What you get - A live web calculator at its own shareable link - Your brand name and an on-brand look, on phone and desktop - The formula spelled out so you can check it - An embed code for your own site - Optional lead capture into your site's contacts ### Who it's for - **Mortgage brokers and loan officers.** A branded payment calculator that shows monthly cost and total interest, and can collect leads. - **Freelancers and contractors.** An instant quote from hours, rate and materials, so prospects see a ballpark before they call. - **Online sellers.** A fee calculator that shows what you keep after percentage and fixed fees. - **Agencies and marketers.** An ROI calculator as a lead magnet on a landing page. - **Financial coaches.** A savings growth calculator clients can play with between sessions, as an estimate rather than advice. - **Niche businesses.** A custom calculator for your own question, like solar savings or catering cost per guest. ### Ideas to try - Loan payment for Harbor Home Lending, with lead capture - Project quote for Brightline Painting: hours, hourly rate and materials - Something else: solar panel savings for a homeowner, for SunPath Solar - Fees for Crafty Corner Shop: what a seller keeps after a percentage and a fixed fee - ROI for Northwind Marketing so clients can check returns, with lead capture - Something else: a wedding catering quote per guest, for Olive & Thyme - Savings for Little Acorn Credit Union: monthly deposit, years and interest rate ### On your own or with Emma - **Building it.** On your own: Hire a developer or wrestle with formulas in a form builder With Emma: Emma builds and publishes it from a few taps - **The math.** On your own: Work out and test the formula yourself With Emma: A standard formula, spelled out in plain words so you can check it - **The look.** On your own: Style it to match your brand, then fix it for phones With Emma: Your brand name in the header, built for phone and desktop - **Leads.** On your own: Wire a form to a separate mailing tool With Emma: Optional name and email capture, saved to your site's contacts - **Putting it online.** On your own: Find hosting and work out how to embed it With Emma: Its own link plus an embed code to copy ### Tips - Check the result against a case you already know before you share it. It's an estimate for visitors, not financial advice. - For a custom calculator, name the inputs and the answer you want, like “guests and menu tier to a total price”. - Tell Emma your brand colors or website in the chat for a closer match. - Keep it to one question: this page builds a single, focused calculator. - Turn on lead capture only if you plan to follow up with those contacts. ### Try it free The free try builds a live preview of your calculator at its own link in one quick pass, without lead capture. Lead capture comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial builds a live preview of your calculator in one quick pass. Lead capture and changes come with an account and credits. **Can I trust the numbers?** Your agent spells out the formula it used so you can check it against a case you know. It's a helpful estimate for your visitors, not financial advice, so double-check before you rely on it. **Where do captured leads go?** Into your site's contacts in SuperCool. Ask your agent how many leads you have, or to email them, any time. **Do I need to know how to code?** No. You pick what it calculates and type your brand name, and Emma builds and publishes it. **Can I put the calculator on my own website?** Yes. The result includes an embed code to paste into your site, and the calculator also lives at its own shareable link. **Does it work on phones?** Yes. It's built mobile-first, and you can preview it in phone and desktop views on this page. **What kinds of calculators can it build?** Loan or mortgage payments, ROI and annualized return, fees and payouts, project quotes and savings growth. Choose Something else to describe your own. **Does it show visitors how the number is worked out?** Yes. A short plain line under the result explains the formula. **Is a calculator app builder good for collecting leads?** It can be. With lead capture on, visitors enter a name and email to see the full breakdown, and each contact is saved to your site's leads. --- ## Competitor Snapshot https://supercool.com/use/competitor-snapshot **See exactly how you stack up against your competitors.** Name your business and two or three competitors. Your AI agent reads their public pages and reviews and lays you side by side, every number linked to its source, with five ways to stand out. You probably know your competitors by name, but not exactly what they charge, what they promise or how their reviews compare with yours. This AI competitor analysis puts it on one card. Name your business and up to three competitors, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, reads their public websites, pricing pages and review listings, then lays you side by side. Every business is measured on the same five things: price, main offer, reviews, their pitch (the headline promise, quoted) and who it's for. Each value links to the page it came from, with that page's date. If something isn't public, the cell stays blank instead of being guessed. Then Emma gives you five ways to stand out, each tied to a real gap the comparison found. ### How it works 1. **Put yourself in the pink corner.** Type your website, or your business name and city, under You. 2. **Name the challengers.** Add one to three competitors under Them, as links or names. Use Add a challenger for a third, then press Ring the bell. 3. **Chat while Emma reads.** Emma reads each homepage, pricing page and review listing. Tell her what you think sets you apart and who your best customers are. 4. **Read the card.** The side-by-side lands on the page with sources, dates, notes on what the sources didn't cover, and five ways to stand out. ### What you get - A side-by-side of price, offer, reviews and messaging - Every number linked to the page it came from - 5 ways to stand out, each tied to a real gap - Gaps left blank instead of guessed - A monthly re-check, if you want one ### Who it's for - **Local service businesses.** See how your prices and reviews compare with the two or three names that come up next to yours. - **Software founders.** Line up pricing, positioning and audience against rivals before you rewrite your homepage. - **Shop and restaurant owners.** Compare offers and review standing with nearby competitors using sources you can click. - **Marketers and consultants.** Start a client engagement with a sourced snapshot instead of an afternoon of tabs. - **People planning a launch.** Check what established players promise so your pitch doesn't sound like theirs. ### Ideas to try - brightsmiledental.com against two other dentists in Raleigh: oakparkdental.com and Glenwood Family Dentistry - Rosie's Bakery, Austin, against Sweet Ritual Bakeshop and Crumb and Co., Austin - acmecrm.io against two bigger CRM tools for small agencies, by their websites - My moving company, Hill Country Movers in San Antonio, against two local movers I lose quotes to - Our yoga studio, flowhousestudio.com, against two studios within a mile of us - My online candle shop, emberandwick.com, against two independent candle brands I keep losing customers to ### On your own or with Emma - **Gathering facts.** On your own: Open a dozen tabs, copy prices into a spreadsheet and lose track of where each came from. With Emma: Emma reads each site, pricing page and review listing and fills one side-by-side card. - **Trusting the numbers.** On your own: Mix memory, old screenshots and guesses. With Emma: Every value links to its source page with a date, and missing data stays blank. - **Turning it into action.** On your own: Stare at the table and wonder what to do. With Emma: Five ways to stand out, each naming the gap it's based on. - **Keeping it current.** On your own: Repeat the whole exercise whenever you remember. With Emma: Ask Emma for a monthly check that compares again and flags what changed. ### Tips - Use website links rather than names when you can. Emma goes straight to the right pages. - If you give a name only, add the city so she finds the right business. - Pick competitors your customers actually compare you with, not the biggest name in your industry. - Tell Emma who your best customers are. The ways to stand out get sharper when she knows who you're trying to win. - Click a few sources yourself before acting on a number. Pages change, and the date tells you how fresh each one is. ### Try it free The free try compares you with your first competitor, side by side and sourced. The full card with every competitor and the five ways to stand out comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial compares you with your first competitor, side by side and sourced. The full card with every competitor and the five ways to stand out comes with an account and credits. **Where does the information come from?** From the public pages your agent actually reads: their websites, pricing pages and review listings. Each value links to its source and date. If something isn't public, the card says so rather than guessing. It can't see anything behind a login. **Can it keep watching my competitors?** Yes. Once the snapshot is ready, ask Emma for a monthly check and she'll set up a recurring run that compares again and flags what changed. Each run uses credits from your account. **How does AI competitor analysis work here?** Emma reads the public pages of each business you name (homepage, pricing page and review listings) and writes the comparison only from what she read. Each value links to where it came from. **How many competitors can I compare?** Up to three, alongside your own business. **What if a competitor doesn't publish prices?** That cell stays blank and the card notes what the sources didn't cover. Emma doesn't guess prices, review counts or other numbers. **Which review sites does it check?** Whatever review listings come up publicly for each business, such as their Google reviews. The card names the platform next to each rating and count. **Can I compare a business that has no website?** Yes, give its name and city. Emma searches for it, though there may be less public information to fill the card. **Is this a full market research report?** No. It's a focused competitor analysis on five points with five ideas to act on. For a broader look at a market, ask Emma in the chat. --- ## Contract Red-Flag Scanner https://supercool.com/use/contract-red-flag-scanner **Know what you're signing, clause by clause.** Upload your contract and say whose side you're on. Your AI agent reads it from your side and flags each clause red, yellow or green, with its reference and the exact words. The Contract Red-Flag Scanner helps you spot risky clauses before you sign. Upload a lease, a freelance agreement, a job offer or a purchase contract, say which side you're on, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, reads it from your side. You get a plain-English summary, the key terms, and the clauses that matter to you flagged red, yellow or green. Every flag shows the clause number as written in your document and the exact words, so you can find it and check it yourself. Red means push back, yellow means ask about it, green means it looks fair. This is an AI reading to help you understand the contract and know what to ask, not legal advice. For anything important, have a licensed lawyer review it. ### How it works 1. **Drop your contract here.** Add the contract as a PDF, Word (.docx) or text file, up to 10 MB. 2. **Say whose side you're on.** Tap Tenant, Freelancer, Buyer, Employee, Seller or Client, or type another side, like landlord or contractor. 3. **Press Scan for red flags.** Emma reads it from your side. Tell her in the chat what worries you most and where you are, since laws differ by place. 4. **Read the flags.** The summary, key terms and flagged clauses land on the page. Filter by color, and copy the suggested redlines and questions to ask before signing. ### What you get - A plain-English summary and the key terms - Clauses flagged red, yellow or green for your side - The exact words and clause number for each flag - Suggested redlines to propose ### Who it's for - **Renters.** Checking a lease for fees, renewal terms and who pays for what before they sign. - **Freelancers.** Reading a client agreement for payment terms, ownership of the work and how either side can end it. - **Job seekers.** Understanding an offer's non-compete, notice period or bonus terms before accepting. - **Small business owners.** Reviewing a vendor or service agreement for automatic renewal, liability and termination. - **Buyers and sellers.** A plain-English first read of a purchase agreement, so they arrive at the conversation with their agent or lawyer knowing what to ask. ### Ideas to try - My apartment lease, and I'm the tenant - A freelance design agreement from a new client, and I'm the freelancer - A job offer with a non-compete clause, and I'm the employee - A used car purchase agreement, and I'm the buyer - A kitchen remodel contract, and I'm the client - A commercial lease for my café, and I'm the tenant - A convertible note a startup sent me, and I'm the investor ### On your own or with Emma - **Understanding it.** On your own: Work through dense legal wording and look up terms one by one. With Emma: A plain-English summary and the key terms: parties, money, dates, term, renewal and termination. - **Finding the risks.** On your own: Easy to skim past an automatic renewal or a one-sided fee. With Emma: Clauses flagged red, yellow or green for your side, each with the exact words quoted. - **Pushing back.** On your own: Draft your own wording, or ask the other side to explain. With Emma: Suggested redline wording for red and yellow clauses, plus questions to ask before signing. - **Expert review.** On your own: A lawyer reads it and knows the law where you live. With Emma: A first read to prepare you, not a replacement for a lawyer on anything important. ### Tips - Upload a file with selectable text, like a PDF export or a .docx. Scans of paper pages may not read well. - Pick your side carefully. The same clause can be fair to a landlord and a red flag for a tenant. - Tell Emma what worries you most and where you are while she reads, since laws differ by place. - Check each flag against the quoted words and clause number in your own copy. - Take the questions to the other side, or to your lawyer, before you sign anything. ### Try it free The free try gives you the plain-English summary, the key terms and every flagged clause with its reference and exact quote. Suggested redlines and the questions to ask before signing come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial gives you the plain-English summary and every flagged clause with its reference and quote. Suggested redlines and the questions to ask before signing come with an account and credits. **Is this legal advice?** No. It's an AI reading to help you understand the contract and know what to ask. It can miss things and doesn't know the law where you live. For anything important, have a licensed lawyer review it. **What kinds of contracts work?** Leases, freelance and service agreements, employment offers, purchase and sale agreements, NDAs and more, as PDF, Word or text. Scanned images without selectable text may not read well. **What do the red, yellow and green flags mean?** Red means push back before you sign. Yellow means ask about it. Green means it looks fair to your side. Each flag also says what the clause means and why it matters to you. **Will it make up clauses or quotes?** It's built not to. Every quote is copied from your file, with the clause reference as numbered in the document, or the page when it's unnumbered, and the result says exactly what was read. Check anything important against your copy. **How many clauses does the contract red-flag scanner flag?** Between 6 and 14: all the red and yellow clauses that matter to your side, plus the most reassuring greens. **Does it know the law where I live?** No. It reads what the contract says, not local law. Tell Emma where you are so she knows rules differ there, and ask a local lawyer about anything that matters. **Does it work on a scanned contract?** It takes PDF, Word (.docx) and text files. A scanned PDF with little selectable text may not read well; Emma says so and works from what was readable. **What are redlines?** Suggested replacement wording for a clause, which you can propose to the other side. With an account, Emma writes one for each red and yellow clause, ready to copy. --- ## Goal Tracker App Builder https://supercool.com/use/goal-tracker-app-builder **Your own goal-tracker app, built around this year's goals.** Write down your goals and pick daily check-ins, weekly milestones or both. Your AI agent builds a personal tracker web app at its own link that you can open on any phone. Most goal tracker apps make you squeeze your year into their categories. This one starts from yours. Write down up to five goals, choose daily check-ins, weekly milestones or both, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, plans three to five milestones for each goal and builds a personal tracker web app that lives at its own link. Each goal gets its own card with a one-tap check-in and a streak count, or milestones to tick off, plus a progress bar for the whole year. It's made for phones, with a dotted-journal look and a satisfying check animation. Your progress saves in your browser, so there's no sign-in. Open the link and add it to your home screen. ### How it works 1. **Write your goals.** Type each goal for the year on a line in the journal. Use Add a goal for up to five. 2. **Pick how to track them.** Choose a sticker under 'Track them with': Daily check-ins, Weekly milestones or Both. 3. **Press Build my tracker.** Emma plans milestones for each goal and builds the app. Chat with her about what keeps you going, like a weekly review or a reward. 4. **Open your link.** The tracker opens live on the page with its link to copy. Open it on your phone and add it to your home screen. ### What you get - A personal goal-tracker web app at its own link - Daily check-ins with streaks, weekly milestones, or both - Milestones planned for each goal - Works on your phone: add it to your home screen ### Who it's for - **New Year planners.** A tracker built around this year's actual goals instead of a generic habit list. - **Habit builders.** Daily check-ins with streaks for meditating, running, reading or drinking more water. - **Students.** Milestones for a big goal like a thesis or a new language, ticked off week by week. - **Coaches.** A simple tracker built around a client's goals, shared as a link they open on their own phone. - **Savers.** Milestones toward a savings goal, without connecting a bank or another app. ### Ideas to try - Run a half marathon, Read 24 books, Meditate every morning, tracked with both - Save $5,000 for a trip to Japan, with weekly milestones - Learn conversational Spanish and Call Mom every Sunday, tracked with both - Drink more water, Sleep by 11, Walk every day after lunch, with daily check-ins - Ship my side project and Write one blog post a month, with weekly milestones - Finish a pottery course and Cook dinner at home five nights a week, tracked with both - Pay off my car loan and Stop buying lunch on weekdays, tracked with both ### On your own or with Emma - **Setup.** On your own: Pick an app, then bend your goals to fit its templates. With Emma: An app built around the goals you typed, word for word. - **Planning.** On your own: Break each goal into steps on your own. With Emma: Three to five concrete milestones per goal, spread across the year. - **Accounts.** On your own: Create yet another login to track your habits. With Emma: No sign-in: progress stays in the browser you use it in. - **Changes.** On your own: Live with the features the app ships with. With Emma: Ask Emma to change it, add features or add accounts later. ### Tips - Write goals you can measure, like 'Read 24 books' rather than 'read more', so the milestones come out concrete. - Choose Daily check-ins for habits and Weekly milestones for big projects. Both works when you have a mix. - Use the tracker from the same phone and browser, since that's where your progress is saved. - Add it to your home screen so checking in takes one tap. - Tell Emma what motivates you while she builds, such as a weekly review or a reward. ### Try it free The free try builds a live preview of your tracker at its own link in one quick pass, with your goals, two or three milestones each and the tracking you chose. Changes, extra features and polish passes come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial builds a live preview of your tracker in one quick pass. Changes, extra features and polish passes come with an account and credits. **Where is my progress saved?** The tracker saves your check-ins in the browser you use it in, so there's no sign-in. Use it from the same phone, or ask your agent to add accounts so it syncs across devices. **Can it send me reminders?** Not out of the box. Email reminders are a separate setup step: ask your agent to add them once the tracker is built. **Do I need to download a goal tracker app?** No. The tracker is a web app at its own link, so it opens in your phone's browser. Add it to your home screen to open it like any other app. **How many goals can I add?** Up to five on the page. Each one becomes its own card in the tracker. **What are milestones?** Smaller steps toward a goal. Emma writes three to five concrete milestones per goal, spread over the year, and you tick them off as you reach them. **Can I change my goals later?** Your goals are built into the app as its starting data. If they change, ask Emma to update the tracker. **Who can see my goals?** Your check-ins stay in your own browser, and there's no server storing your progress. The goals are part of the app itself, so anyone you share the link with can see them. **Does it work on any phone?** It's a single mobile-first web page, so it opens in a modern phone browser. It works on a laptop too. --- ## Invoice Maker https://supercool.com/use/invoice-maker **Type the job, get a ready-to-send PDF invoice.** Say who's billing whom and list the work, typed or spoken. Your AI agent turns it into a clean, professional PDF invoice with the totals and tax worked out. You did the work. Now you need an invoice that looks professional and adds up, without wrestling a spreadsheet or a blank document. Type who's billing whom and what the job was, or say the line items out loud, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, turns it into a clean PDF invoice with every amount worked out. This invoice maker adds an invoice number, today's date and a due date (14 days unless you say otherwise), lists each line with quantity, rate and amount, then works out the subtotal, tax at exactly the rate you chose and the total. Anything you didn't give, like an address or a tax ID, is left off and listed for you to check. With an account you also get a reusable Word template. ### How it works 1. **Fill in From and Bill to.** Type your business on the From line and your client on the Bill to line. 2. **Add the job and line items.** Write what you did and the prices on the ruled ledger in your own words, or tap the mic and say it where your browser supports speech. 3. **Pick currency and tax.** Choose USD, EUR, GBP, CAD or AUD, then No tax, 5%, 10%, 20% or a custom rate, and press Make my invoice. 4. **Download and send.** Emma asks how you'd like to be paid while she works. The invoice prints out on the page with a Download PDF button and a list of things to check before you send. ### What you get - A professional PDF invoice, ready to send - Line items, subtotal, tax and total calculated - An invoice number, issue date and due date - A reusable Word template for next time ### Who it's for - **Freelancers.** Designers, writers and developers billing a project, a retainer or a few extra revision rounds. - **Tradespeople.** Painters, plumbers and handymen turning hours and materials into an invoice right after the job. - **Photographers and event pros.** Bill a wedding shoot, an album and a booking fee in one clean document. - **Tutors and coaches.** Invoice a month of sessions at an hourly rate. - **Side businesses.** Send a proper invoice for a custom order without setting up accounting software. ### Ideas to try - From Bright Line Painting, Austin TX, to Maria Lopez, 12 Oak St: kitchen repaint, 2 coats, 14 hours at $55/hr, paint and supplies $180, 8.25% tax - Logo design package $900 and 2 extra revision rounds at $120 each, billed to Harbor Coffee Co. - Wedding photography, 6 hrs, $1,800, plus a 40-page album $350, for Priya and Sam - Four private piano lessons at £40 each in October, for the Hughes family, no tax - Website maintenance retainer for September €650, plus 3 hours of extra fixes at €70, 20% VAT - Spring yard cleanup, 6 hours at $45, plus 10 bags of mulch at $5 each - Custom cake for a 50th birthday C$220 and delivery C$25, to Tom Bradley, 5% GST ### On your own or with Emma - **Layout.** On your own: Hunt for a template, then fix its fonts and columns. With Emma: A clean, professional layout with a bold INVOICE header, From and Bill to, an items table and a totals block. - **The math.** On your own: Add up lines and tax by hand or in a spreadsheet, then check it twice. With Emma: Each amount, the subtotal, tax and total are calculated for you, so they add up. - **The details.** On your own: Make up an invoice number and forget the due date. With Emma: An invoice number, issue date, due date and payment terms are added for you. - **Next time.** On your own: Start over from scratch. With Emma: With an account, a Word template with your business details filled in. ### Tips - Write each line with a quantity and a rate, like '14 hours at $55/hr'. A flat price works too. - Choose the tax rate yourself. Emma applies exactly the rate you pick and never guesses one. - Answer Emma's question about how you'd like to be paid so your payment details end up on the invoice. - Read the 'Check before you send' list. It names anything missing, like an address. - Say in the chat if your terms differ from 14 days, such as due on receipt or 30 days. ### Try it free The free try makes the full PDF invoice with the totals and tax worked out. The reusable Word template comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial makes the full PDF invoice. The reusable Word template comes with an account and credits. **How is the tax worked out?** Your agent applies the tax rate you pick to the subtotal and does the math in code, so the totals add up. It doesn't choose a tax rate for you; check the right rate for your area. **Does it collect payment?** No. It makes the invoice document for you to send. Add your payment details (bank, PayPal, a payment link) in the chat and your agent puts them on it. **How do I make an invoice for free?** Type your business, your client and the work into the invoice maker and press Make my invoice. The free try makes the complete PDF invoice, ready to download and send. **What should an invoice include?** Your business and your client, an invoice number, issue and due dates, each item with quantity, rate and amount, the subtotal, any tax, the total and payment terms. Emma includes all of these from what you give her; check your local rules for anything else your invoices must show. **What paper size is the PDF?** US Letter, or A4 when you bill in EUR or GBP. **Can I say the line items instead of typing?** Yes, where your browser supports speech. Tap the mic on the ledger and describe the work and prices in your own words. **Does it track whether the invoice was paid?** No. It makes the invoice document only, with no paid or unpaid status. Keep track of payments in your own records. **What if I leave out my address or tax ID?** It stays off the invoice. Emma never invents an address, tax ID or bank details; she lists what's missing under Check before you send. **Can I reuse it for my next invoice?** With an account you get a Word template with your business details filled in and the client and items left blank, so the next PDF invoice starts half done. --- ## Market Research Brief https://supercool.com/use/market-research-brief **Size up your market, with every number cited.** Describe your product idea and where you'd sell it. Your AI agent reads public sources and writes a dated brief on the market, competitors and pricing, with a citation beside every figure. Before you spend money on an idea, you want to know whether anyone will pay for it. Finish one sentence on the page, 'Is there a market for ___ in ___?', and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, reads public sources about that market and writes a dated brief. Every figure has a citation beside it, with the source's publisher and date. The full AI market research brief covers market size and trends, the customer, four to six competitors with what they charge, typical pricing and risks. Anything Emma works out herself is marked as an estimate, and no number or source is made up. A 1 to 5 scoring rubric covers market size, growth, competition, willingness to pay and ease of reaching customers, with weights you can change. ### How it works 1. **Type your product idea.** Finish the sentence 'Is there a market for' with your idea in a line. 2. **Choose the market.** Tap a country like the United States, the UK or India, choose worldwide, or type any country or region. 3. **Press Research it.** Emma searches and reads sources. Tell her in the chat who you picture buying it and at what price. 4. **Read and check the brief.** The brief lands as a cited document with numbered sources. Re-weight the rubric to your priorities and open the sources to check any figure. ### What you get - Market notes with a source for every figure - Competitors and what they charge - Estimates clearly marked as estimates - A scoring rubric you can re-weight ### Who it's for - **Founders testing an idea.** See market size, competitors and pricing before you build anything. - **Small business owners.** Check demand for a new service, product line or location. - **Students and MBA teams.** Start a market analysis assignment with real, cited sources to read further. - **Product managers.** Bring a sourced snapshot of a market to a planning meeting. - **Consultants and freelancers.** Prepare for a client conversation with a dated, cited overview of their market. ### Ideas to try - A subscription box for indoor plant care, in the United States - An AI bookkeeping tool for freelancers, in the UK - Premium dog food made from insect protein, in Germany - A mobile car detailing service, in Australia - Halal meal kits for busy families, in Canada - Refillable cleaning products sold online, in India - Noise-blocking sleep earbuds, worldwide ### On your own or with Emma - **Finding numbers.** On your own: Search, open a pile of tabs, and lose track of where each figure came from. With Emma: Reads public sources and cites every figure with its publisher and date. - **Estimates.** On your own: Mix guesses and published numbers on the same slide. With Emma: Marks anything she infers as an estimate, kept apart from published figures. - **Competitors.** On your own: Visit pricing pages one by one and copy them into a sheet. With Emma: Lists competitors with what they offer and what they charge, each tied to a source. - **Deciding.** On your own: Go with a gut feeling. With Emma: A transparent scoring rubric with a reason for each score, and weights you set yourself. ### Tips - Describe the idea and the buyer as well as the category. 'Insect-protein dog food for dogs with allergies' finds sharper sources than 'dog food'. - Research one market at a time. Figures for one country and for worldwide rarely line up. - Tell Emma your target price in the chat so the pricing section is useful to you. - Open the cited sources for any figure you plan to put in a pitch or a plan. - Use the brief as a starting point, not as financial advice, and set the rubric weights to what matters most to you. ### Try it free The free try makes a one-page snapshot: a short summary and 3 to 5 facts about your market, each cited to a page Emma read, with estimates marked. The full brief, with competitors, pricing, the scoring rubric and a PDF, comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial makes a one-page snapshot with 3 to 5 cited facts about your market. The full brief, with competitors, pricing, the scoring rubric and a PDF, comes with an account and credits. **Where do the numbers come from?** From public web sources your agent actually reads, each listed with its publisher and date. Anything it works out itself is marked as an estimate. It can't see paywalled reports. **Can I make decisions from it?** Use it as a starting point. It isn't financial or professional advice, and you should check the cited sources before relying on any figure. **How do I do market research for a new product?** Look at market size and growth, who the customer is, who competes and what they charge, and the risks. An AI market research brief gathers that from public sources and cites each figure, so you can check it and dig deeper. **How current is the information?** The brief is dated the day it's made, and each source shows its publication date, or 'undated' when the page shows none. Figures are cited as their sources published them. **Does it include competitor pricing?** Yes, in the full brief. Emma lists four to six competitors with what they offer and what they charge, each tied to a source she read, plus typical price ranges for the market. **How is the opportunity score worked out?** Emma scores market size, growth, competition, willingness to pay and ease of reaching customers from 1 to 5, with a reason for each. You set the weights on the page and the score updates. **Can I research a market outside the US?** Yes. Tap a country, choose worldwide, or type any market or region. **Can I download the brief?** With an account, the full brief comes as a PDF with numbered citations and a sources list. --- ## Pitch Deck Builder https://supercool.com/use/pitch-deck-builder **Your startup in one line, a 10-slide investor deck out.** Tell it your startup in one line, the problem and any traction. Your AI agent writes and designs a 10-slide investor deck with speaker notes, while you chat with it. You know your startup. Turning it into a deck investors will sit through is the hard part. This AI pitch deck builder starts with three lines: your startup in one sentence, the problem it solves, and any traction. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes and designs a 10-slide investor deck as a PowerPoint, with speaker notes for every slide and a striking cover image on the title slide. The deck follows the story investors expect: title, problem, solution, product, market, business model, traction, competition, team and the ask. Emma never invents traction, revenue, users, team members, investors or market figures. Anything she needs but doesn't have becomes a clearly marked spot for you to fill in, and any market figure she works out is labeled as an estimate. She also writes a one-page memo to send ahead of the meeting. ### How it works 1. **Write your one-liner.** Type your startup in one line on the big screen. It becomes your title slide's headline. 2. **Add the problem and traction.** Write the problem you solve, and your traction if you have any, like "1,200 waitlist signups". Leave traction blank if you're pre-launch. Then press Build my deck. 3. **Answer Emma's questions.** While she writes and designs, she may ask how much you're raising, who's on the team and your business model. Your answers go into the deck. 4. **Review and download.** The deck plays slide by slide on the page with its speaker notes, a list of what to fill in before you pitch, the memo, and the PowerPoint to download. ### What you get - A designed 10-slide investor deck as PowerPoint - The classic story: problem, solution, market, traction, ask - Speaker notes for every slide - A one-page memo to send ahead ### Who it's for - **First-time founders.** A first investor deck with the standard structure, so you can focus on the story and the numbers. - **Accelerator applicants.** A clean 10-slide deck and memo ready to adapt for an application or demo day. - **Founders between drafts.** A fresh structure and speaker notes when your current deck has grown messy. - **Student and hackathon teams.** A pitch deck for a competition or class, built from your idea in one line. - **Side-project builders.** Test whether your idea holds up as a story before you talk to anyone about money. ### Ideas to try - An AI bookkeeper for food trucks; food trucks lose hours a week to receipts; 40 trucks on the beta - Same-day repairs for e-bikes, at your door; e-bike shops are booked out for weeks; $8k monthly revenue - Payments for freelance translators; freelancers wait 45 days to get paid; 1,200 waitlist signups - A scheduling app for dog walkers; walkers juggle bookings across texts and spreadsheets; pre-launch - Refillable cleaning products delivered monthly; plastic bottles pile up in every kitchen; 300 subscribers - Tutoring matched to school curricula; parents can't tell which tutor fits their kid's class; two school pilots ### On your own or with Emma - **Structure.** On your own: Guessing which slides investors expect and in what order. With Emma: Ten slides in the classic order, from problem to the ask. - **Design.** On your own: Hours in a slide app picking layouts, fonts and images. With Emma: Designed slides with varied layouts and a cover image, delivered as a PowerPoint. - **Numbers.** On your own: Filling gaps with optimistic figures you can't back up. With Emma: Only your numbers are used. Gaps are marked for you to fill in, and derived market figures are labeled estimates. - **Practice.** On your own: Writing talking points on index cards the night before. With Emma: Speaker notes for every slide, plus a one-page memo to send ahead. ### Tips - Write your one-liner the way you'd say it to a friend: who it's for and what it does. - Make the problem concrete, with a number if you have one, like "freelancers wait 45 days to get paid". - Add any real traction you have: signups, pilots, revenue, retention. It's the only place those numbers come from. - Tell Emma your raise amount and team in the chat, so fewer slides need filling in later. - Check every figure and fill in each marked spot before you send the deck to anyone. ### Try it free The free try writes the full 10-slide outline and designs the first 3 slides as a PowerPoint. All 10 designed slides, speaker notes for every slide and the one-page memo come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial writes the full 10-slide outline and designs the first 3 slides as a PowerPoint. All 10 designed slides, speaker notes and the one-page memo come with an account and credits. **Will it make up market numbers or traction?** No. Traction comes only from what you tell it. Where a slide needs a figure you haven't given, like market size or team bios, it leaves a clearly marked spot for you to fill in, or labels a figure as an estimate. **Can I edit the slides?** The deck is a PowerPoint with each slide rendered as a polished image. Ask your agent in the chat for changes, or for an editable text version you can type into. **What slides should be in an investor pitch deck?** This deck uses ten: title, problem, solution, product, market, business model, traction, competition, team and the ask. It's the classic order for an investor pitch. **What file format is the pitch deck?** A PowerPoint (.pptx) you can download, open and present from. The outline and notes also show on the page. **Do I need traction to use the pitch deck builder?** No. Traction is optional. If you're pre-launch, leave it blank and Emma builds the deck around the problem, solution and plan, with no made-up numbers. **Does it research my market?** Not on this page. Emma writes from what you give her. Market figures she works out are labeled as estimates, and anything she can't know is marked for you to fill in. **What's in the speaker notes?** A short script for each slide, about 40 to 80 words, so you know what to say when it's on screen. **What's the one-page memo?** A short written summary of the pitch in three to five paragraphs, to send an investor ahead of a meeting. --- ## SEO Blog Starter https://supercool.com/use/seo-blog-starter **Start a blog that can rank.** Enter your website and your audience. Your AI agent reads your site, checks what ranks today, maps the keywords worth writing for and writes your first articles, titles and meta descriptions included. A blog that ranks starts with knowing what to write about, then writing it well. This AI SEO blog starter does both. Enter your website and who you write for, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, reads your site, checks what ranks today for the topics your audience searches, maps the keywords worth targeting and writes your first articles. The keyword map has 15 to 25 keywords grouped into topic clusters, each tagged with search intent, a priority and the article that targets it. Then come three full articles of 700 to 1,000 words, written for your audience in your site's voice. Each has an SEO title, a meta description, a URL slug and clear H2 sections, and all three are saved in a Word document. ### How it works 1. **Type your website.** Click the masthead and type your site's address, like yourwebsite.com. 2. **Say who it's written for.** Finish the line Written for with your audience, then press Stop the presses. 3. **Chat while Emma researches.** Emma reads your homepage and searches the main topics to see what ranks. Tell her what you sell most and which competitors you watch. 4. **Publish from the page.** The keyword map and articles land on the page. Copy each article as Markdown, copy the meta descriptions, and download the Word document. ### What you get - A keyword map grouped by topic - Three full articles, ready to publish - SEO titles and meta descriptions - Each keyword mapped to its article ### Who it's for - **Small business owners.** Start a blog for your shop or service with articles aimed at what local customers search for. - **Ecommerce stores.** Map buying-guide and how-to keywords to articles that lead readers toward your products. - **Service professionals.** Accountants, lawyers, therapists and trainers: answer the questions clients search before they call. - **Software companies.** A first content plan and articles that match how your users describe their problems. - **Freelance writers and marketers.** A researched starting point for a client's blog that you can edit and build on. ### Ideas to try - brightpathmortgage.com, written for first-time home buyers in Ohio - prepkitchenco.com, written for busy parents who meal prep - harlowlegaltech.com, written for small law firms - summitstrides.com, written for beginner trail runners - greenleafplantshop.com, written for apartment dwellers with low light - tidyledgerbookkeeping.com, written for freelancers doing their own taxes for the first time ### On your own or with Emma - **Keyword research.** On your own: Brainstorm topics and guess which ones people search. With Emma: A keyword map built from your site and what ranks today, grouped into clusters with intent and priority. - **Planning.** On your own: Keep a loose list of post ideas with no clear target for each. With Emma: Every keyword is mapped to the article that targets it. - **Writing.** On your own: Write one post a week, if the week allows. With Emma: Three full articles in your site's voice, with H2 sections ready to publish after your review. - **On-page SEO.** On your own: Write titles and meta descriptions last, often in a hurry. With Emma: An SEO title, meta description and URL slug for every article. ### Tips - Describe your audience precisely. First-time home buyers in Ohio gets better keywords than home buyers. - Tell Emma what you sell most so the map leans toward topics that bring in customers. - Add your own examples, photos and opinions to each article before publishing. That's what makes it yours. - Link each new article to the related product or service page on your site. - Publish steadily and give it time. Rankings take a while to build and are never guaranteed. ### Try it free The free try makes a keyword map of 10 to 15 keywords and writes one full article for the top keyword. The other articles and the Word document come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial makes the keyword map and writes one full article. The other articles, and more in batches, come with an account and credits. **Does it show search volumes?** Not by default. Keywords are prioritized from your site and what currently ranks, and labelled as judgement, not measured volumes. Ranking also takes time and isn't guaranteed. **Is the writing original?** Yes, every article is written fresh for your site and audience. Read it over and add your own examples before you publish. **What does an AI SEO blog starter give me?** A keyword map grouped by topic, three full articles, and an SEO title, meta description and URL slug for each. The articles are also saved in a Word document. **How long are the articles?** Between 700 and 1,000 words each, with clear H2 sections. **What does search intent mean on the keyword map?** It's what the searcher wants: to learn (informational), to compare options (commercial), to buy (transactional) or to find a specific site (navigational). It helps you match each article to the reader. **How does it choose which keywords to target?** From what your site offers and what currently ranks for the topics your audience searches. Priorities are high, medium or low as a judgement call, not measured search volumes. **Will the articles include statistics?** No invented ones. The articles don't make up statistics or quotes, so add real figures and sources yourself where they help. **Can I post the articles straight to my blog?** Copy each one as Markdown from the page or use the Word document, then paste into your blog editor. Read each one first and add your own examples. **Is this an SEO audit of my site?** No. This page plans and writes content. It reads your homepage to understand what you offer, but it doesn't check your site's technical SEO. --- ## Website Audit https://supercool.com/use/website-audit **Give your website a checkup.** Enter your website. Your AI agent examines it and scores design, clarity, SEO, speed and trust against a rubric you can see, then tells you exactly what to fix first. Your website might be losing visitors for reasons you can't see from the inside. This AI website audit gives it a checkup. Enter your website and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, examines it and scores five areas: design, clarity, SEO, speed and trust. Each area has four checks worth up to 5 points, with a one-line note on what she actually saw. The rubric is shown right next to every score, so you know exactly why a check passed or fell short. Speed comes from Google's PageSpeed test on mobile when it answers, and is marked as an estimate when it doesn't. Emma ranks the fixes by impact, notes how much effort each takes, marks the quick wins, and with an account adds annotated desktop and phone screenshots plus a PDF report. ### How it works 1. **Write your website on the chart.** Type your site's address on the Patient line of the clipboard, like yourwebsite.com. Then press Start the checkup. 2. **Emma examines the site.** She reads the page, runs the speed test and looks at the site on desktop and phone. Tell her the site's main goal, like calls, sales or bookings. 3. **Read your scores.** Each area comes back scored out of 20, with its four checks, the points for each and what was seen. 4. **Fix what matters first.** Work down the ranked fix list, starting with high-impact, low-effort changes. Ask Emma in the chat if you want help making them. ### What you get - A score for five areas, rubric included - Annotated screenshots of your site - A ranked fix list, quick wins marked - Real speed data when Google can test it ### Who it's for - **Small business owners.** Find out why your site isn't bringing in calls or bookings, in plain language. - **Freelance web designers.** A scored audit to open a conversation with a prospective client or to check your own work before launch. - **Marketers.** A quick read on SEO basics, speed and clarity before spending on ads that send traffic to the site. - **Founders.** See whether your homepage says what you do and who it's for within the first screen. - **Agencies.** A consistent rubric to compare sites and show progress after changes. ### Ideas to try - The website for my bakery in Portland - My plumbing company's homepage - The landing page for my online course - Our restaurant's website before we redesign it - My photography portfolio site - A client's dental practice website before our first meeting - The pricing page of my SaaS product ### On your own or with Emma - **Knowing what to check.** On your own: Searching checklists and guessing which ones matter. With Emma: A fixed rubric of twenty checks across design, clarity, SEO, speed and trust. - **Speed data.** On your own: Running speed tests and decoding the jargon yourself. With Emma: Real mobile speed results when the test answers, with plain notes, or a marked estimate. - **Seeing the problems.** On your own: Taking screenshots and describing issues in an email. With Emma: Annotated desktop and phone screenshots with numbered markers that match the fixes. - **Priorities.** On your own: A long list of issues with no idea where to start. With Emma: Fixes ranked by impact, each with its effort level. ### Tips - Enter the exact page you care most about, usually the homepage or your main landing page. - Tell Emma the site's main goal in the chat. Calls, sales and bookings point to different fixes. - Start with fixes marked high impact and low effort. They're the quick wins. - Run the audit again after making changes to see the scores move. - If speed is marked as an estimate, the test couldn't reach your site this time. Try again later for measured numbers. ### Try it free The free try gives the full scored audit: every area's score with its rubric, plus your top 5 fixes. The annotated screenshots and the PDF report come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial gives the scored audit: every area's score with its rubric, plus your top fixes. The annotated screenshots and the PDF report come with an account and credits. **How is the score worked out?** Each area has four checks worth up to 5 points each, shown beside its score, and the overall score is simply their sum. Speed uses Google PageSpeed data when it's available and is marked as an estimate when it isn't. **Will it fix my site?** The audit only reports. Fixing is a separate step: ask your agent in the chat to make the changes, or hand the list to whoever runs your site. **What does the SEO check look at?** A unique title tag of 30 to 60 characters, a meta description of 70 to 160 characters, exactly one H1 with logical H2s, and whether the page is indexable with image alt text. **What speed numbers does the website audit use?** Largest Contentful Paint of 2.5 seconds or less, Total Blocking Time of 200 milliseconds or less, Cumulative Layout Shift of 0.1 or less, and whether images are sized and compressed. **Does it check how my site looks on a phone?** Yes. Design includes a mobile check (no sideways scrolling, tappable buttons), speed is tested on mobile, and the full version adds an annotated phone screenshot. **What counts toward trust?** Easy-to-find contact details, social proof like reviews or client logos, HTTPS plus a privacy policy, and signs of real people with nothing stale or broken. **Does it audit every page of my site?** It checks the page at the address you enter. Enter another page's address to audit that one. **Is the AI website audit score the same as my search ranking?** No. The score comes from this page's own rubric of twenty checks. It points to things that affect visitors and search, but it doesn't predict where you rank. --- ## Course Builder https://supercool.com/use/course-builder **Design a full course, week by week.** Name the subject, choose who it's for from beginner to expert, and set the weeks and hours. Your AI agent writes the syllabus with weekly modules, objectives and assignments. Planning a course from a blank page takes days: deciding what comes first, what each week should achieve and how to grade it all. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes the first full draft for you. Name the subject, choose the learner's level from beginner to expert, set the number of weeks and the hours per week, and she writes the whole syllabus. You get a catalog description, learning outcomes, prerequisites and one module per week, each with objectives, topics, an in-session activity, an assignment and hours that fit your weekly time. An assessment plan with weights that add up to 100 and suggested kinds of resources round it out. Think of it as an AI course builder that hands you a solid draft to edit. ### How it works 1. **Type your subject.** Type the subject as the course title, and a crest and course code form around it. 2. **Set the level and length.** Slide the Level from Beginner to Expert, tap the last week on the semester calendar and set Hours a week. 3. **Press Write my syllabus.** Emma starts writing. Tell her in the chat how it will be taught (in person, live online or self-paced) and what your learners want to get out of it. 4. **Read and refine.** The syllabus lands on the page as a catalog entry, week by week. With an account, download it as a printable PDF and ask for quizzes or a certificate design. ### What you get - A syllabus with a module for every week - Clear objectives and topics for each module - Activities and assignments that build up - An assessment plan with weights - A printable syllabus PDF ### Who it's for - **Teachers.** Draft a new elective, or reshape an existing class into weekly modules with clear objectives. - **Corporate trainers.** Plan an onboarding or skills program with activities and assignments that build on each other. - **Online course creators.** Map a self-paced course before you record a single video. - **Coaches and consultants.** Turn what you teach one-on-one into a structured cohort program. - **Tutors and community educators.** Plan a library workshop series, a language class or a weekend club. ### Ideas to try - Intro to Photography, Beginner, 8 weeks, 4 hours a week - Conversational Spanish, Intermediate, 12 weeks, 3 hours a week - Python for Data Analysis, Beginner, 10 weeks, 6 hours a week - Personal Finance Basics, Beginner, 6 weeks, 2 hours a week - Watercolor Landscapes, Advanced, 8 weeks, 3 hours a week - Leadership for New Managers, Intermediate, 6 weeks, 2 hours a week - Machine Learning in Production, Expert, 12 weeks, 8 hours a week - Sourdough and Artisan Bread, Beginner, 4 weeks, 3 hours a week ### On your own or with Emma - **Sequencing.** On your own: Shuffle topics on sticky notes until the order feels right. With Emma: Each week builds on the last, pitched at the level you chose. - **Objectives.** On your own: Write outcomes and weekly objectives from scratch. With Emma: Course outcomes plus two or three objectives for every module, ready to edit. - **Assessment.** On your own: Guess at the weights and fix the math later. With Emma: An assessment plan whose weights add up to 100. - **Formatting.** On your own: Lay out a syllabus document by hand. With Emma: With an account, a printable catalog-style PDF. ### Tips - Name the subject the way you'd title the course. 'Python for Data Analysis' gives a sharper syllabus than 'Python'. - Be honest about the level. Beginner assumes no prior experience; Expert assumes practitioners who want mastery. - Set Hours a week to the real time learners have, including homework. - Tell Emma the format and your learners' goal in the chat. A self-paced course needs different activities from a live class. - Ask Emma to rework any week that feels too full, or to merge two light ones. ### Try it free The free try writes the full syllabus on the page, week by week. The printable PDF, plus quizzes for each module or a certificate design, come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial writes the whole syllabus on the page, week by week. The printable PDF, plus quizzes and a certificate design on request, come with an account and credits. **Who is it for?** Teachers, trainers, coaches and creators planning a class, a cohort course or an online course, at any level from complete beginner to expert. **Does it recommend specific books or links?** It suggests the kinds of resources to use and names only well-known ones. Check any resource before you assign it, and ask Emma to swap in your own. **How do I write a course syllabus?** Start with what learners should be able to do by the end, plan weekly modules that build toward it, then decide how you'll assess them. The AI course builder drafts all of that from your subject, level and length, so you start by editing instead of writing. **How long can the course be?** Tap any week up to 16 on the semester calendar, and set anywhere from 1 to 20 hours a week. **Does it write the lessons too?** No. It writes the syllabus: modules, objectives, topics, activities, assignments and assessment. With an account you can ask Emma for quizzes for each module, and the Lesson Plan Builder covers single classes in more depth. **Can I use it for a self-paced online course?** Yes. Tell Emma in the chat that it's self-paced and she shapes the activities for learners working on their own. **Where does the course code come from?** It's made from your subject and level, like PHO 101 for a beginner photography course, and appears on the syllabus. Higher levels get higher numbers, up to 401 for Expert. **Is the syllabus accredited?** No. It's a draft for you to review and adapt. Check it against your school's or organization's requirements before you use it. --- ## Interview Coach https://supercool.com/use/interview-coach **Walk in knowing what they'll ask, and what you'll say.** Paste the job description, add your resume and pick the interview type. Your AI agent writes the 15 likely questions with answers built from your own experience, while you chat with it. Good interview prep starts with the questions you'll actually face. Paste the job description or a link to the posting, add your resume and pick the interview type. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, works as your AI interview coach: she writes the 15 questions you're most likely to be asked for this role, says why each one comes up and drafts an answer in your voice. Every answer is built from your real experience and names the part of your resume it draws on. She never invents employers, projects or numbers. With an account you also get a STAR story bank, three smart questions to ask the interviewer and a printable prep sheet. When your cards land, ask her for a practice round right in the chat. ### How it works 1. **Paste the job.** Paste the job description into the folder marked The job, or paste a link to the posting. 2. **Add your resume and pick the type.** Slide in your resume as a PDF, Word or text file if you have one, then tap Phone screen, Behavioral, Technical, Panel, Case study or Final round. 3. **Press Prep me and chat.** Emma reads your resume and the posting. While she writes, tell her when the interview is, who you're meeting and what worries you. 4. **Flip the cards, then practice.** Your 15 questions land as cards that flip to their answers, filtered by category. Copy them all, then ask Emma to quiz you one question at a time. ### What you get - The 15 questions you're most likely to be asked - Suggested answers built from your own experience - A STAR story bank for behavioral questions - Smart questions to ask the interviewer ### Who it's for - **Anyone with an interview this week.** Get the likely questions and answers in your own words instead of guessing what to prepare. - **Career changers.** See how experience from another field maps onto the new role, and where you still need a story. - **Recent graduates.** Turn internships, class projects and part-time jobs into answers that hold up in a behavioral interview. - **People returning to work.** Rebuild confidence with answers drawn from what you've actually done, then rehearse them. - **Final-round candidates.** Prepare for a panel or final round, with questions to ask the people across the table. ### Ideas to try - A link to a Product Designer posting, my resume as a PDF, Behavioral - A pasted job description for a junior data analyst at a hospital network, resume attached, Technical - Senior account executive at a software company, Final round, no resume, I'll describe my experience in the chat - A retail store manager posting, my resume as a Word file, Phone screen - A strategy consultant job description, resume attached, Case study - A middle school science teacher opening, my resume as a text file, Panel - A registered nurse role on a pediatric unit, resume attached, Behavioral ### On your own or with Emma - **Which questions.** On your own: Generic lists of common interview questions that don't fit the role. With Emma: 15 questions for this posting and this interview type, each with why they ask it. - **Answers.** On your own: Written from memory the night before. With Emma: First-person answers built from your resume, naming the experience each one uses. - **Behavioral stories.** On your own: Scrambling for an example mid-interview. With Emma: With an account, a bank of STAR stories from your real experience, tagged by the questions they answer. - **Rehearsal.** On your own: Asking a friend to quiz you. With Emma: A practice round in the chat, one question at a time, with short, kind feedback. ### Tips - Add your resume. Answers built from your real projects sound far more natural than frameworks. - Paste the full job description, responsibilities and requirements included, not only the title. - Pick the interview type you're facing next; the mix of questions follows it. - Tell Emma in the chat about results that aren't on your resume so she can use them. - Read each answer aloud and trim it into your own words before the day. ### Try it free The free try writes all 15 likely questions, each with why they ask it, a suggested answer, the experience it draws on and a delivery tip. The STAR story bank, the questions to ask them and the printable prep sheet come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial writes all 15 questions with suggested answers. The STAR story bank, the questions to ask them and a printable prep sheet come with an account and credits. **Do I have to upload my resume?** It's optional but worth it: with your resume, the answers use your real projects and results. Without it, the answers are frameworks with spots for your own examples, and you can tell your agent about your experience in the chat. **Will the answers sound scripted?** They're starting points in your own words and facts. Read them aloud, make them yours, and ask your agent for a practice round in the chat to rehearse. **What interview questions will I be asked?** It depends on the role and the interview type. Emma writes the 15 most likely for this posting, mostly of the type you picked plus role-specific ones and a closing question, and says why each comes up. **What resume file types can I upload?** PDF, Word (.docx), or a plain text or Markdown file, up to 5 MB. **Can I paste a link instead of the job description?** Yes. Paste the posting's link and Emma reads it. If the page can't be read, she works from what you gave and tells you so. **Does the AI interview coach make up experience?** No. Every fact comes from your resume or what you tell her in the chat. Where nothing fits, the answer gives a framework with a spot for your own example. **What is the STAR method?** A way to answer behavioral questions: the Situation, the Task, the Action you took and the Result. Emma shapes behavioral answers that way. **Can Emma run a mock interview with me?** Yes, in the chat. She asks one question at a time and gives short, kind feedback on each reply. --- ## Lesson Plan Builder https://supercool.com/use/lesson-plan-builder **Get a full lesson plan in minutes.** Tell it the topic, the grade and how long the class is, and clip in your slides or textbook pages if you have them. Your AI agent writes a timed lesson plan with an exit ticket. Planning tomorrow's class shouldn't eat your evening. This AI lesson plan generator starts from one line: finish "Today we're teaching...", tap the grade and the class length, and clip in your slides or textbook pages if you have them. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes a complete, age-appropriate lesson plan while you chat with her. You get two to four measurable objectives, materials, key vocabulary with kid-friendly definitions, and a minute-by-minute flow from warm-up to wrap-up whose minutes add up to your class length, with what you do and what students do in each part. There are checks for understanding, support and stretch ideas, and an exit ticket of three questions with answers. Always read a plan through before you teach it. ### How it works 1. **Name the topic.** Finish the sentence "Today we're teaching..." with your topic, like the water cycle or persuasive writing. 2. **Pick the grade and length.** Tap a grade sticker from Kindergarten through 12th grade or College, and choose a class length of 30, 45, 60 or 90 minutes. 3. **Clip your materials (optional).** Add photos of textbook pages or a PDF of your slides, up to four files. Then press Plan my lesson. 4. **Chat, then teach.** Tell Emma about your class size, needs and what you covered last time while she writes. The plan lands on the page as a tabbed planner. ### What you get - Objectives, materials and key vocabulary - A minute-by-minute lesson flow - An exit ticket with answers - Support and stretch ideas for every learner - A printable PDF of the plan ### Who it's for - **Classroom teachers.** A full plan for a new unit or a lesson you've never taught, written while you get on with grading. - **Substitute and cover teachers.** A clear, timed plan someone else can pick up and run. - **Student teachers.** A model of objectives, pacing and checks for understanding to learn from and adapt. - **Homeschool parents.** A structured lesson for any grade, with an exit ticket to see what stuck. - **Tutors and college instructors.** A timed session plan around the textbook chapter or slides you already use. ### Ideas to try - The water cycle, 3rd grade, 45 minutes - Fractions on a number line, 4th grade, 60 minutes - The causes of World War I, 10th grade, 45 minutes, with photos of my textbook pages - Persuasive writing, 7th grade, 60 minutes - Photosynthesis, 6th grade, 30 minutes - Solving two-step equations, 8th grade, 90 minutes, with my slides as a PDF - Letter sounds for B and D, Kindergarten, 30 minutes - Supply and demand, College, 90 minutes ### On your own or with Emma - **Time.** On your own: An evening of writing objectives, timing activities and drafting questions. With Emma: Emma writes the whole plan while you chat with her. - **Pacing.** On your own: Guessing how long each part takes and adjusting on the fly. With Emma: A minute-by-minute flow that adds up exactly to your class length. - **Your materials.** On your own: Rebuilding a generic template around your own textbook. With Emma: Clip your pages or slides and the lesson follows their examples, terms and order. - **Every learner.** On your own: Adding support and extension ideas as an afterthought. With Emma: Support and stretch ideas are part of every plan. - **Assessment.** On your own: Writing an exit ticket and answer key separately. With Emma: Three exit ticket questions with answers, included. ### Tips - Make the topic specific. "Adding fractions with unlike denominators" gives a sharper plan than "fractions". - Clip the pages you'll actually teach from, so the plan uses your textbook's examples and vocabulary. - Tell Emma the standard you're teaching to. She won't invent standards codes on her own. - Mention your class in the chat: its size, learners who need extra support, and what you did last lesson. - Read the plan through and adjust it for your students before you teach it. ### Try it free The free try writes the full lesson plan with its exit ticket, right on the page. The printable PDF, plus a worksheet or slides on request, come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial writes the full lesson plan with its exit ticket, right on the page. The printable PDF, plus worksheets and slides on request, come with an account and credits. **Can it use my own materials?** Yes. Clip photos of your textbook pages or a PDF of your slides and the plan is built around them. **Does it match my state standards?** It doesn't look up standards codes on its own. Tell Emma the standard you're teaching to and she'll align the objectives and exit ticket to it. Always review a plan before you teach it. **What grades does the lesson plan generator cover?** Kindergarten through 12th grade, plus College. Content and vocabulary are written for the grade you pick. **What class lengths can I choose?** 30, 45, 60 or 90 minutes. The timed flow always adds up to the length you pick. **What's in the lesson flow?** A warm-up, direct teaching, guided practice, independent practice and a wrap-up, each timed, with what the teacher does and says and what students do. **Can I get a worksheet or slides too?** Yes, with an account. After the plan lands, ask Emma for a worksheet with an answer key, or slides. **Can I print the lesson plan?** With an account you get a clean, printable PDF of one to two pages, with the timed flow as a table and the exit ticket answers at the end. **Does it include homework?** Optional homework is included when it fits the lesson. Some plans won't need any. **What files can I upload?** Photos of textbook pages or PDFs of your slides, up to four files. Each PDF can be up to 10 MB. --- ## Manuscript Feedback Coach https://supercool.com/use/manuscript-feedback-coach **Get an editor's letter on your manuscript.** Upload a chapter or your whole manuscript and say what worries you. Your AI agent writes an editorial letter with the top 5 fixes, each tied to a passage from your pages. Manuscript Feedback Coach gives you an honest first read from an editor's point of view. Upload a chapter or your whole manuscript, pick the genre and tap what worries you, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes an editorial letter: what's working, then the top 5 fixes ranked by impact, each tied to a passage quoted word for word from your pages. Every fix says where the passage is, why it matters and how to fix it, weighted toward your worries, from pacing and voice to plot holes. You also get line notes in the margin and a pacing chart of words per chapter, measured from your file. The letter says exactly what was read, so you know what the manuscript feedback covers. ### How it works 1. **Drop your chapter or manuscript.** Add your pages on the desk as a PDF, Word, EPUB, Pages or text file, up to 10 MB. 2. **Pick the genre and your worries.** Choose the genre, then tap what worries you: Pacing, Voice, Dialogue, Characters, Opening hook, Plot holes or Show, don't tell. 3. **Press Get my editorial letter.** Emma reads your pages and writes the letter. Chat with her about who the book is for and your goal: querying agents or self-publishing. 4. **Revise from the letter.** The fixes land beside their quoted passages, with margin notes and the pacing chart. Copy the whole letter in one tap. ### What you get - An editorial letter with the top 5 fixes - Each fix tied to a quoted passage from your pages - Line notes in the margin - A pacing chart of words per chapter - Focused on what worries you: pacing, voice, dialogue and more ### Who it's for - **Novelists getting ready to query.** A hard look at the opening chapters before sending pages to agents. - **Self-publishing authors.** A ranked revision list before the book goes to formatting and print. - **Memoir writers.** Notes on voice, pacing and showing rather than telling in true stories. - **Workshop and class members.** A second opinion between workshop rounds, tied to specific lines. - **Writers who just finished a draft.** Knowing where to start revising when the whole draft feels too big to tackle. ### Ideas to try - The first three chapters of my cozy fantasy, worried about pacing and the opening hook - My finished thriller manuscript, worried about plot holes - Chapter one of my young adult novel, worried about voice and dialogue - My memoir about growing up on a dairy farm, worried about show, don't tell - A sci-fi novella draft, worried about characters - The opening of my literary novel, with no particular worry: anything an editor would flag - The romance chapter where my leads first meet, worried about dialogue ### On your own or with Emma - **Speed.** On your own: Wait on beta readers' schedules or an editor's queue. With Emma: A letter while you chat with Emma. - **Specific notes.** On your own: General comments like the middle drags. With Emma: Five ranked fixes, each tied to a quoted passage and where it is. - **Focus.** On your own: Feedback on whatever the reader happened to notice. With Emma: Weighted toward what you said worries you. - **Pacing.** On your own: Count words per chapter yourself in a spreadsheet. With Emma: A pacing chart with measured word counts per chapter. - **Depth.** On your own: A professional editor reads every page closely and knows the market. With Emma: A fast first read to revise from, not a replacement for a professional editor. ### Tips - For the closest look, upload just the chapters you want read rather than the whole book. - Tap only the worries you care about most. The fixes are weighted toward them. - Tell Emma your goal while she works, querying agents or self-publishing, so the letter fits where you're headed. - Work through the fixes in order. They're ranked by impact, so the first one usually matters most. ### Try it free The free try reads your opening pages and gives you the letter's opening note, what's working and the top 5 fixes with quoted passages, plus your chapter word counts. The margin notes, the pacing notes and a longer read come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial gives you the letter's top 5 fixes from your opening pages, with your chapter word counts. The line notes and a longer read use credits on your account. **Does it read my whole manuscript?** On a long manuscript it reads the opening chapters closely and samples the rest, and the letter says exactly what it read. Every quote comes from your file. Upload just the chapters you want read for the closest look. **Is it as good as a human editor?** It's a fast, honest first read that helps you revise, not a replacement for a professional editor. Where you disagree with a note, trust your own ear. **What is an editorial letter?** It's the overview an editor writes after reading a manuscript: an honest opening note, what's working and the biggest things to fix. Here it's the top 5 fixes ranked by impact, each tied to a quoted passage. **What file types can I upload?** PDF, Word (.docx), EPUB, Pages or plain text, up to 10 MB. If your file is bigger, export a .docx or upload just the chapters you want read. **Are the quotes really from my manuscript?** Yes. Every quote is copied word for word from your file, never paraphrased, and the chapter word counts are measured, not estimated. **Does it rewrite my book?** No. It tells you what to fix and how, with line notes on specific sentences, but the revising stays with you. **Which genres does it cover?** Literary, fantasy, romance, thriller, sci-fi, young adult, memoir and nonfiction. **Can I get manuscript feedback on a single chapter?** Yes. Upload one chapter and the letter focuses on those pages, which gives you the closest read. --- ## Memoir Writer https://supercool.com/use/memoir-writer **Start your memoir with a first chapter in your own voice.** Answer a few questions about your life by typing or talking. Your AI agent writes chapter one the way you'd tell it, using only what you shared. Plenty of people mean to write their life story and never get past the blank page. Answer a few questions about your life, by typing or by talking, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes the first chapter of your memoir in the first person, using your words, your rhythm and your turns of phrase. She builds it only from what you share: the people, places and moments you name. You get a chapter of about 1,500 words, a working title, a 10-chapter outline, a cover concept with artwork, a Word document to edit and keep, and questions that will make the next chapter richer. It's a memoir writer that starts from your own telling. ### How it works 1. **Answer the questions.** Turn the journal's pages and answer at least two of the five questions, from 'Where does your story begin?' to 'What do you want them to know?' 2. **Type or talk.** Write on the lined page, or, where your browser supports it, tap the dictaphone and speak. Your words appear on the page so you can check them. 3. **Choose who it's for and press Write my first chapter.** Pick My kids and grandkids, My whole family, Readers everywhere or Just for me. While Emma writes, chat with her about a name, a place or a saying you remember. 4. **Read and keep it.** Chapter one lands on the page as a book page you can copy in one tap, with the outline, the cover concept and the Word file. ### What you get - A first chapter of about 1,500 words, in your voice - A working title and a 10-chapter outline - A cover concept with artwork - A Word document you can edit and keep - Questions that make the next chapter richer ### Who it's for - **Grandparents.** Family stories written down for the grandkids, in the voice they know. - **Adult children helping a parent.** Read the questions aloud to Mom or Dad and let them talk into the dictaphone. - **Aspiring authors.** A first chapter and an outline to get past the blank page and keep going. - **People marking a milestone.** A retirement or a big birthday, with the story so far told in their own words. - **Private writers.** Choose Just for me and write about the hard parts without an audience in mind. ### Ideas to try - I grew up above my parents' bakery in Cleveland in the 1960s. The whole building smelled of rye bread and the radio was always on. - My grandmother Rosa taught me to sew on a pedal machine and always said, 'Measure twice, complain never.' - The night my brother and I drove through a blizzard to make it to my daughter's birth. - Losing the farm in 1985 and starting over as a school bus driver at forty. - Moving from Manila to Toronto at nineteen with one suitcase and my father's watch. - For my grandkids: I want them to know it's fine to change your mind about your life more than once. ### On your own or with Emma - **Getting started.** On your own: Stare at a blank page and wonder where to begin. With Emma: Five guided questions, answered by typing or talking. - **Voice.** On your own: Hire a ghostwriter, or try to sound like a 'real writer'. With Emma: A first-person chapter in your own words and rhythm. - **Facts.** On your own: Keep track of every name, date and place yourself. With Emma: Only what you shared, with questions where a detail is missing. - **The shape of the book.** On your own: Plan the whole book before writing a word. With Emma: A working title and a 10-chapter outline to build on. - **A file to keep.** On your own: Type it up and format it later. With Emma: A Word document you can edit, print and share. ### Tips - Answer with specifics: a street name, a smell, something someone said. They become the best parts of the chapter. - Talk the way you'd tell it at the dinner table. Emma writes in your voice, so loose, spoken phrasing is fine. - Answer all five questions if you can. Two are enough to start, but more gives Emma more to work with. - Check dictated answers before you send, since speech-to-text can mishear names and places. - Answer the questions at the end of the chapter. They're the raw material for the next one. ### Try it free The free try writes the opening pages of chapter one in your voice, with five chapter titles for the outline and two questions for next time. The full chapter of about 1,500 words, the complete outline, the cover and the Word file come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial writes the opening pages of chapter one. The full chapter, the outline, the cover and the Word file come with an account and credits. **Will it make things up about my life?** No. Your agent writes only from the people, places and moments you share. Where a scene needs a detail you didn't give, it keeps it general and asks you about it instead. **Can I talk instead of typing?** Yes, in browsers with built-in speech-to-text (such as Chrome, Edge and Safari): tap the dictaphone and talk, and your words appear on the page so you can check them before you send. **How long is the first chapter?** About 1,500 words, written in the first person. The page shows the word count and a rough reading time. **What file format do I get?** A Word document (.docx) of the chapter, which you can edit, print or share. The text is also on the page to copy in one tap. **Do I have to answer all five questions?** No. Two answers are enough to start. Each extra one gives Emma more to draw on. **What does 'Who is it for?' change?** It tells Emma who you picture reading: your kids and grandkids, your whole family, readers everywhere or just you. The chapter is written with them in mind. **Can I write a memoir for my mom or dad?** The chapter is written in the first person from the answers given, so it works best when the person whose story it is does the answering. You can type or hold the dictaphone for them. **Can this memoir writer help with the rest of the book?** The page writes chapter one and outlines the rest. Answer the questions it leaves you and ask Emma for the next chapter in the chat. --- ## Nonfiction Book Starter https://supercool.com/use/nonfiction-book-starter **Turn what you know into a book, starting today.** Tell your AI agent your topic, your experience and who the book is for. It titles the book, outlines every chapter and writes the first one, while you chat with it. Lots of people know enough to write a useful book. The hard part is the blank page: what to call it, what goes in which chapter, how to start. This nonfiction book starter gets you past it. Tell Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, your topic, what you know about it and who the book is for, and she titles your book, outlines it and writes the first chapter. You get a title and subtitle, a one-sentence promise to your reader, and a chapter-by-chapter book outline of 10 to 12 chapters, each with a summary and key points. Chapter one runs about 2,000 words, written from your experience in a clear, practical voice. There's also a back-cover blurb, a cover concept and a Word document of the outline and chapter so you can keep writing. ### How it works 1. **Name your topic.** Finish the line A book about with your subject. 2. **Add your experience and reader.** Finish by someone who with what you've done (optional, but it makes the book yours), then pull a spine for who it's for or type someone else. Press Start my book. 3. **Chat while Emma writes.** Emma may ask about your story with the topic: a turning point, a client win, a mistake you learned from. Your answers feed the chapter. 4. **Read and take it with you.** The outline and chapter land on the page to read and copy, with the blurb, cover concept and Word document. ### What you get - A title, subtitle and the promise to your reader - A chapter-by-chapter outline with key points - A first chapter of about 2,000 words - A back-cover sales blurb - A cover concept and a Word document to keep writing in ### Who it's for - **Consultants and coaches.** Turn the method you teach clients into a book outline and a first chapter you can build on. - **Small business owners.** Write down what years of running a shop or a trade taught you, for people starting out. - **Experienced professionals.** Shape what you know about managing, nursing, engineering or teaching into a practical guide for your field. - **People with a hard-won story.** Getting out of debt, changing careers, recovering from burnout: a practical book that helps the next person. - **Hobby experts.** Dog training, gardening, home brewing: a beginner's guide from someone who has done it for years. ### Ideas to try - A book about running a profitable small bakery, by someone who has run a bakery for 12 years, for complete beginners - A book about getting out of debt on one income, by someone who paid off $80k in four years, for busy parents - A book about leading remote engineering teams, by someone who has led teams at three startups, for new managers - A book about training a rescue dog, by someone who has fostered 40 rescue dogs, for curious readers - A book about switching from bedside nursing to health tech, by someone who made that move at 45, for nurses changing careers - A book about pricing freelance design work, by someone who has freelanced for a decade, for people in my field ### On your own or with Emma - **Starting.** On your own: Weeks of notes and false starts before a structure appears. With Emma: A title, subtitle, reader promise and full chapter outline from three short inputs. - **First chapter.** On your own: Write and rewrite the opening while doubting the whole plan. With Emma: About 2,000 words of chapter one, written from your experience, to edit rather than invent. - **Facts and figures.** On your own: Easy to lean on half-remembered numbers. With Emma: No invented studies, statistics or quotes. Marked placeholders show where your own numbers go. - **Next steps.** On your own: Hire a ghostwriter or editor to keep momentum. With Emma: Keep chatting with Emma to write the next chapters or rework the outline. ### Tips - Be specific in by someone who. Years, numbers of clients or a clear result give the chapter real authority. - Pick one reader. A book for new managers reads better than a book for everyone. - Share a real story in the chat. One turning point makes chapter one far more personal. - Fill in the bracketed placeholders with your own figures and sources before you share the chapter. - Ask Emma for another title or a different chapter order if the outline doesn't feel like your book yet. ### Try it free The free try gives you the titled, chapter-by-chapter outline: title, subtitle, reader promise and 10 chapters with summaries and key points. The first chapter, the blurb, the cover concept and the Word document come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial gives you the titled, chapter-by-chapter outline. The first chapter, blurb, cover and Word file come with an account and credits. **Will the chapter include facts and statistics?** Your agent writes from your experience and general knowledge, and doesn't invent studies, statistics or quotes. Where a number or source would help, it leaves a clearly marked placeholder for you to fill in. **Can I keep going after the first chapter?** Yes. Keep chatting with your agent to write the next chapters, change the outline or try another title. **How do I start writing a nonfiction book?** Start with a clear reader and a promise, then an outline. This nonfiction book starter gives you both, plus a first chapter to react to, so you're editing instead of facing a blank page. **How long is the first chapter?** About 2,000 words. **How many chapters are in the outline?** Ten to twelve, each with a one-sentence summary and two to four key points. **Can I edit the book in Word?** Yes. The outline and first chapter come as a Word document you can keep writing in. **Does the cover concept include my title?** No. The cover concept is a bold, simple image without lettering. For a lettered cover in your genre, try SuperCool's Book Cover Designer. **Who owns the book?** You can use what Emma writes for your own projects, including publishing your book. Read it closely and make it your own before you do. --- ## Publish-Ready Book Formatter https://supercool.com/use/publish-ready-book-formatter **Turn your manuscript into a print-ready book.** Upload your manuscript, pick a trim size and the genre. Your AI agent typesets a print-ready interior PDF with a table of contents, and a proof you can flip through. The Publish-Ready Book Formatter turns your manuscript into a print-ready interior PDF. Upload the file, pick a trim size and genre, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, typesets it: print margins, page numbers from the first chapter, chapters opening on right-hand pages, a running head and a Contents page with page numbers read from the finished PDF. You also get an EPUB for ebook stores, a proof you can flip through right on the page, the interior's specs and a short KDP upload checklist. Emma doesn't rewrite your text; she lays it out, with type suited to your genre. While she works, tell her the title and author name as they should appear and where you're printing. ### How it works 1. **Load the feed tray.** Drop your manuscript as a PDF, Word, EPUB, Pages or text file, up to 10 MB. 2. **Pick the trim size and genre.** Choose 5 × 8, 5.5 × 8.5, 6 × 9 (the most common), 7 × 10 or 8.5 × 11 inches, then the genre: Novel, Memoir, Nonfiction, Self-help, Devotional or Poetry. 3. **Press Typeset my book.** Emma typesets the interior and makes the EPUB. Tell her the title and author name, and whether it's going to KDP or another printer. 4. **Flip through the proof.** Page through the proof on the page, check the specs and the Contents, then download the PDF and EPUB and tick off the KDP checklist. ### What you get - A print-ready interior PDF at your trim size - A table of contents with real page numbers - An EPUB for ebook stores - A proof copy to flip through on the page - A KDP upload checklist ### Who it's for - **Self-publishing novelists.** A clean paperback interior ready to upload, without learning layout software. - **Memoir writers.** A family memoir set as a real book to print and share with relatives. - **Nonfiction and self-help authors.** A tidy interior with a Contents page for a book they sell at talks or alongside their work. - **Pastors and devotional writers.** A devotional laid out with clear chapter openings and page numbers. - **Poets.** A collection set in type suited to poetry, with a Contents page readers can use. ### Ideas to try - My finished mystery novel, 5.5 × 8.5, Novel - A memoir about my dad's years as a long-haul trucker, 6 × 9, Memoir - A 30-day devotional for our church's women's group, 5 × 8, Devotional - My guide to marketing a small bakery, 6 × 9, Nonfiction - A collection of sixty poems about the coast of Maine, 5 × 8, Poetry - A self-help book on recovering from burnout, 5.5 × 8.5, Self-help - A large-format guide to raising backyard chickens, 7 × 10, Nonfiction ### On your own or with Emma - **Layout.** On your own: Wrestle a word processor's section breaks, margins and headers. With Emma: Typeset to your trim with print margins and chapters on right-hand pages. - **Table of contents.** On your own: Type page numbers by hand and redo them after every change. With Emma: A Contents page with page numbers read from the finished PDF. - **Ebook.** On your own: Convert the file separately and fix the formatting all over again. With Emma: An EPUB made from the same manuscript. - **Checking.** On your own: Print a test copy to see how the pages fall. With Emma: A proof to flip through on the page first, plus a KDP upload checklist. ### Tips - Give each chapter a clear heading in your file, like Chapter One. Clean headings make for clean chapter openings and an accurate Contents page. - Choose the same trim size you'll select at your printer, so the interior and your print settings match. - Make sure the title page shows the title and author as they should appear, or tell Emma in the chat. - Finish your edits before formatting. Changes afterwards shift the page numbers. - Order a printed proof before you publish. Paper shows things a screen doesn't. ### Try it free The free try typesets your first chapter at your trim size as a sample interior PDF, with its first pages to flip through. The whole book, with its Contents page and EPUB, comes with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial typesets your first chapter as a sample interior. The whole book, with its contents and EPUB, uses credits on your account. **Will KDP accept it?** It's laid out to your trim size with print margins, page numbers and chapters starting on right-hand pages, which is what KDP expects. KDP still checks every file on upload, so use its previewer and order a printed proof before you publish. **What about picture books and cookbooks?** This page is for text-led books: novels, memoirs, nonfiction, devotionals and poetry. Heavily illustrated layouts need a different setup, so ask Emma about yours. **What does a book formatter do?** It sets your manuscript into book pages: margins, type, page numbers, running heads, chapter openings and a table of contents. This book formatter does that for you and shows a proof you can flip through. **What trim sizes can I choose?** 5 × 8, 5.5 × 8.5, 6 × 9, 7 × 10 and 8.5 × 11 inches. 6 × 9 is the most common. **Does it change my writing?** No. Emma lays out your text as it is and doesn't edit or rewrite it. For notes on the writing itself, try the Manuscript Feedback Coach page first. **What file formats can I upload?** PDF, Word (.docx), EPUB, Pages or plain text, up to 10 MB. If your file is too big, a .docx export is usually much smaller. **Does it make the book cover?** No. This page makes the interior only. The Book Cover Designer page is the place for covers. **Can I use the files with a printer other than KDP?** Yes. The interior is a standard print-ready PDF at your trim size, and the EPUB is for ebook stores. Check each printer's own requirements before you upload. --- ## Resume Glow-Up https://supercool.com/use/resume-glow-up **Rewrite your resume for the exact job you want.** Upload your resume and name the job. Your AI agent rewrites it to match the posting and drafts a tailored cover letter, using only what's already true in your resume. Resume Glow-Up rewrites your resume for one specific job. Upload your current resume and paste the job posting link or type the title. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, reads both and rewrites it ATS-friendly: clear headings, strong action verbs, and the posting's keywords wherever they're true for you. Numbers only appear if they're already in your resume. Nothing is invented. Every employer, title, date, degree and metric comes from your file, and keywords you don't have are listed separately so you decide. You also get a cover letter built from the same facts, a LinkedIn headline and About section, and the resume and letter as PDF and Word files. It's an honest way to rewrite your resume for the job you want. ### How it works 1. **Drop in your resume.** Drag your resume onto the left sheet, or tap to choose a PDF, Word or text file. 2. **Add the job you want.** Paste the posting link for the closest keyword match, or type a title like Registered Nurse, ICU. 3. **Press Glow up my resume.** Emma reads your resume and the posting and rewrites it. Tell her what drew you to the role, or anything you're proud of that isn't on the page yet. 4. **Review and download.** The new resume lands here to read and copy, with the keyword checklist, notes on what changed, the cover letter and the downloads. ### What you get - A rewritten, ATS-friendly resume as PDF and Word - A cover letter tailored to the posting - A keyword checklist against the job - A LinkedIn headline and About section ### Who it's for - **Career changers.** Reframing real experience in the language of a new field, without stretching the truth. - **Recent graduates.** Turning coursework, internships and part-time jobs into a resume aimed at one posting. - **Active job seekers.** A tailored version for each application instead of one generic resume. - **People returning to work.** A clean, current rewrite of an older resume for today's role. - **Professionals eyeing a promotion.** A resume and LinkedIn profile that match the next title up. ### Ideas to try - My nursing resume, for Registered Nurse, ICU - A teacher's resume, for Instructional Designer at an online learning company - Junior Data Analyst at a fintech - Operations Manager, warehouse and logistics - Customer Success Manager at a software startup - Executive Assistant to a CEO - A posting link for a Senior Product Designer role, copied from the company's careers page ### On your own or with Emma - **Tailoring.** On your own: Rewrite your resume by hand for every application With Emma: Rewritten for the posting you give, in one run - **Keywords.** On your own: Guess what screening software looks for With Emma: A checklist of the posting's keywords, marked matched or missing - **Honesty.** On your own: Easy to overstate when you're tired of applying With Emma: Only what's in your resume; missing keywords flagged, never added - **Cover letter.** On your own: Start every letter from scratch With Emma: A tailored letter from the same facts - **Files.** On your own: Reformat in a word processor With Emma: Resume and letter as PDF and Word ### Tips - Use the posting link when you can; it gives a closer keyword match than a title. - If the job site blocks reading, paste the posting text into the chat. - Tell Emma achievements that are missing from your resume; facts you share in the chat can be used. - Only add a missing keyword if it's true for you. - Read every line before you send it. ### Try it free The free try rewrites your resume for the job and shows the keyword checklist and what changed. The cover letter, the LinkedIn headline and About, and the PDF and Word files come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial rewrites your resume for the job and shows the keyword checklist. The cover letter, the LinkedIn headline and About, and the PDF and Word files come with an account and credits. **Will it make things up to look better?** No. Your agent only rewrites and reorganizes what's in the resume you upload. Keywords you don't have are listed separately, for you to add only if they're true. **Can it read job links from any site?** It reads most public job postings. Some sites block automated reading; then it works from the job title, and you can paste the posting text into the chat for a closer match. **What is an ATS-friendly resume?** One that applicant tracking systems can read cleanly: clear headings, a plain structure and the posting's keywords where they're true for you. Emma rewrites yours that way. **What file types can I upload?** PDF, Word (.docx) or a text file, up to 5 MB. **Can I use just a job title?** Yes. A title works, though a posting link gives a closer keyword match. **Will it change my dates or job titles?** No. Employers, titles, dates and degrees stay as they are in your file. Emma reworks the wording, order and emphasis. **Does it write my LinkedIn profile too?** It writes a LinkedIn headline and About section from the same facts, with an account and credits. **Can I rewrite my resume for several jobs?** Each run tailors it to one job. Run it again with the next posting for another version. **What does the keyword checklist show?** Each keyword from the posting, marked matched if it's now truthfully in your resume, or missing if your file doesn't support it. **Does it work for any industry?** It rewrites from whatever is in your resume for the job you name, from nursing and teaching to software and operations. --- ## Tabletop Campaign Designer https://supercool.com/use/tabletop-campaign-designer **A tabletop RPG campaign, ready for your next game night.** Pick the setting, your party and the tone. Your AI agent writes the campaign (hook, villain, arc and locations), three session plans, NPCs with portraits, a map and handouts. Prep is the part of running a game that eats your week. This tabletop campaign designer gives you a campaign you can run on game night. Write the setting, set your party size and level, and lay down a tone card. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes the campaign: a title and pitch, the hook, a villain with a goal and a method, an arc in three acts and four to six key locations. Then come three session plans, each with a goal, four to six scenes mixing combat, social and exploration, a big encounter pitched for your party, treasure and a cliffhanger. You also get four NPC cards with motives, secrets and a line of voice, portraits for three of them, a hand-drawn style map and two handouts to read aloud. It's system-neutral and easy to run in D&D 5e or similar games. ### How it works 1. **Write your setting on the parchment.** Finish A campaign set in with your own idea, or press a seal: High fantasy, Pirate isles, Grim frontier, Steampunk city, Cosmic horror or Space frontier. 2. **Set the party and the tone.** Tap the pawns for party size, slide the d20 for level, and pick a tone: Heroic, Dark & gritty, Comedic, Mystery, Intrigue or Horror. Then press Write my campaign. 3. **Tell Emma about your table.** While she writes, she asks what your players love, fights, puzzles or drama, and anything to avoid at the table, and builds it in. 4. **Unroll it.** The outline, sessions, NPC cards, map and handouts land on the page, ready to read before your next game night. ### What you get - A campaign outline: hook, villain, arc and key locations - Three session plans with scenes, encounters and cliffhangers - NPC cards with portraits, motives and secrets - A hand-drawn style campaign map - Handouts to read to your players ### Who it's for - **Busy game masters.** GMs with a game on Friday and no time to prep a new arc from scratch. - **First-time GMs.** New game masters who want a complete structure to learn from and run. - **One-shot hosts.** People running a game for friends, a convention table or a store event. - **Homebrew worldbuilders.** GMs with a setting idea who want it turned into playable sessions. - **Teachers and club leaders.** Adults running a game club who need a ready campaign at the right tone. ### Ideas to try - A desert city built on the bones of a dead god, 4 players, level 3, Mystery - A sinking archipelago ruled by rival witch-queens, 5 players, level 6, Intrigue - A frozen mining town where the dead keep digging, 4 players, level 2, Horror - Pirate isles, 3 players, level 5, Comedic - A floating monastery that drifts between two warring kingdoms, 4 players, level 1, Heroic - Space frontier, 6 players, level 8, Dark & gritty - A steampunk city where the clock tower controls the weather, 4 players, level 4, Mystery ### On your own or with Emma - **Prep time.** On your own: Evenings of notes, outlines and half-finished villains. With Emma: A full campaign while you chat with Emma. - **Sessions.** On your own: Plan one session at a time and hope the next comes together. With Emma: Three session plans with scenes, an encounter, treasure and a cliffhanger each. - **NPCs.** On your own: Invent names on the spot when players ask questions. With Emma: Four NPC cards with role, look, wants, a secret and a line of voice. - **Visuals.** On your own: Search for maps and portraits that roughly fit. With Emma: A hand-drawn style map and three NPC portraits in one illustrated style. - **Table fit.** On your own: Adjust published adventures to your group. With Emma: Pitched for your party size and level, with your players' tastes in mind. ### Tips - Give your setting a twist. A frozen mining town where the dead keep digging beats a frozen town. - Set the party level accurately. The big encounter in each session is pitched for it. - Tell Emma what your players love and what to avoid. It shapes the scenes and the tone. - Read the NPC secrets before the session so you know what each one is hiding. - Ask Emma for stat blocks in your system once you've picked the encounters you'll use. ### Try it free The free try writes the campaign outline (title, pitch, hook, villain, arc and locations), your first session plan and two NPC cards. Sessions two and three, the NPC portraits, the map and the handouts come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial writes the campaign outline and your first session plan. All three sessions, NPC portraits, the map and handouts come with an account and credits. **Which game system does it use?** It's system-neutral and easy to run in D&D 5e or similar fantasy and sci-fi games. Encounters are described rather than statted out; ask your agent for stat blocks in your system. **Can I change things?** Yes. Ask your agent to swap the villain, add a session, rework a scene for your players or make it darker or sillier. **Can AI write a D&D campaign?** Yes. Give Emma your setting, party size and level, and tone, and she writes a system-neutral campaign that's easy to run in D&D 5e, with an outline, three sessions, NPCs, a map and handouts. **Does it include stat blocks?** No. Encounters are described and pitched for your party size and level rather than fully statted. Ask Emma afterwards for stat blocks in your system. **What party sizes and levels does it support?** The page lets you set one to six players and a level from 1 to 20. **Does the map have labels?** No. It's a hand-drawn style map on aged parchment with no readable text, so you can label it for your own table. **Does it use existing settings or characters?** No. Names and characters are original, not taken from published settings. **Can I get more than three sessions?** The page writes three. Ask Emma in the chat to add more sessions or extend the arc. **Is there a printable version?** Not on this page. The campaign shows on the page; ask Emma in the chat if you want it as a document. --- ## Home Services Finder https://supercool.com/use/home-services-finder **Find the right local pro for any home job.** Describe the job and where you are. Your AI agent finds local providers, reads their reviews and hands you a ranked shortlist, while you chat with it. Water stains on the ceiling, an AC blowing warm air, a yard that got away from you. Finding a good local pro usually means an evening of searching, opening listings and reading reviews that contradict each other. The Home Services Finder hands that evening to Emma, your SuperCool AI agent. Tell her the job and where you are, and she looks up local providers who do that work near you. Emma reads their reviews, ranks them on reliability, responsiveness, price signals and red flags, and gives you a shortlist with phone numbers, websites, ratings and review counts. You also get typical price ranges for the job in your area and questions to ask before you hire. It is a quick way to compare local contractors near you without doing all the legwork yourself. ### How it works 1. **Describe the job.** Type what needs fixing in the search bar in your own words, or tap a tile like Plumbing, Roof leak or Deep clean. 2. **Add where it is.** Tap Near me to use your location, or tap 'or a city' and type a city or ZIP. 3. **Press Find my pros and chat.** Emma starts looking right away. While she works, tell her about timing, budget and what matters most to you, and she takes it into account. 4. **Get your shortlist.** Ranked providers land on the page with contact details, what customers praise and complain about, typical prices, questions to ask and a one-page comparison PDF. ### What you get - A ranked shortlist of local providers with contact details - What their customers praise and complain about - Typical prices for the job in your area - Questions to ask and red flags to avoid - A one-page comparison PDF ### Who it's for - **Homeowners with an urgent problem.** A leak, a storm-damaged roof or a dead AC, when you need a list of people to call today rather than a weekend of research. - **People new to the area.** Just moved and don't know who's reliable? Get a starting list of local cleaners, movers or handymen with the red flags called out. - **Landlords and property managers.** Compare providers for a repair at a rental, and keep the comparison PDF for your records. - **Busy parents.** Hand off the research for a remodel or a yard cleanup and spend your time on the calls that matter. - **People helping a relative.** Find a pro for a parent's home in another town by typing their city or ZIP instead of yours. ### Ideas to try - A leak under the kitchen sink that's getting worse, Columbus, OH 43215 - The AC is blowing warm air and the house won't cool down, Phoenix - Deep clean of a three-bedroom house before we move out, Austin, TX - Replace a rotted section of the back deck, Portland, OR 97214 - Install two ceiling fans and a new outlet in the garage, near me - Weekly lawn mowing and hedge trimming for a corner lot, Charlotte, NC - Water damage cleanup after the basement flooded, Nashville - Full bathroom remodel with a walk-in shower instead of a tub, Raleigh 27609 ### On your own or with Emma - **Finding providers.** On your own: Search, open listing after listing, and copy phone numbers into a note. With Emma: Pulls local providers for that job and area into one ranked shortlist with phone, website, rating and review count. - **Reading reviews.** On your own: Scroll through reviews one business at a time and try to spot patterns. With Emma: Reads recent reviews for the top picks and sums up what customers praise and complain about. - **Knowing a fair price.** On your own: Call around for quotes before you know what's normal. With Emma: Gives typical price ranges for the job in your area, labelled as typical, so an outlier quote stands out. - **Making the call.** On your own: Wing it on the phone and hope you asked the right things. With Emma: Hands you questions to ask and red flags to watch for before you hire. ### Tips - Describe the problem as well as the trade. 'Brown stain on the ceiling after rain' tells Emma more than 'roofer'. - Use a city or ZIP when the job isn't where you are right now, like a rental or a parent's house. - Tell Emma in the chat what matters most: speed, price, weekend availability or someone who does small jobs. - Treat the typical prices as a guide and get written quotes from the shortlist before you agree to anything. - Ask each pro the questions on your list, and check licensing and insurance with them directly. ### Try it free The free try finds the five best local providers for your job, with ratings, review counts, phone numbers, websites and a short highlight for each, plus typical prices for the area. Reading their reviews, the full ranked comparison and the one-page PDF come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** Yes. The free try finds the five best-rated providers for your job, with their phone, website and rating. Create an account with credits for the full report: their reviews read for you and a comparison PDF. **Where does the provider information come from?** Your agent looks up local business listings and their public reviews, then reads and compares them for you. **What kinds of jobs does it cover?** Anything a local pro does: repairs, restoration, roofing, plumbing, electrical, cleaning, landscaping, remodeling, moving and more. **How do I find a reliable contractor near me?** Start with providers that have strong ratings across many reviews, then read what customers say about showing up on time and sticking to the quote. The Home Services Finder does that first pass for you and flags red flags, so you only call the best few. **Does it get quotes or book the pro for me?** No. Emma finds and compares providers and gives you their contact details and typical prices. You call or message them for a quote and book it yourself. **Are the prices it shows real quotes?** No. They are typical price ranges for that kind of job in your area, labelled as typical. Your actual price depends on the job, so get written quotes before you hire. **Does it check licenses and insurance?** Not on this page. It works from public listings and reviews. Ask each provider for proof of license and insurance, and check with your local licensing authority where that applies. **Can I use it for an emergency repair?** Yes. Describe the emergency, like water coming through the ceiling, and tell Emma in the chat that you need someone today. For anything dangerous, such as a gas smell or sparking wiring, call emergency services or your utility first. **How are the providers ranked?** Emma weighs reliability, responsiveness, price signals and red flags from their reviews, along with rating and review count. The best fit is listed first, with a few words on what each one is best for. **Can I compare local contractors for a big remodel?** Yes. Describe the remodel in the search bar and add budget and timing in the chat. You get a shortlist to interview, typical price ranges and questions to ask before you sign anything. --- ## Birth Chart Reading https://supercool.com/use/birth-chart-reading **Your birth chart, mapped and read.** Tell it when and where you were born. Your AI agent maps your chart (Sun, Moon, rising and the planets) and writes a reading about you, framed as entertainment. A birth chart is a map of where the Sun, Moon and planets were at the moment you were born. This birth chart reading starts with one sentence: the date, the time and the town. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, calculates the positions rather than guessing them, draws your chart wheel with every planet at its degree, and works out your Sun, Moon and rising signs. Then she writes a warm, specific reading in short sections: an overview, your big three, love, work and growth. You also get a shareable card of your big three and a PDF of the reading. It's made for fun and reflection. The positions are real astronomy, but what they mean is tradition, so treat it as entertainment, not advice. ### How it works 1. **Finish the sentence.** Fill in I was born on, at and in: your birth date, your birth time and the town or city. 2. **No birth time? Say so.** Tap I don't know my birth time. You still get every planet's sign; the rising sign and houses are left out. Then press Read my chart. 3. **Tell Emma what to focus on.** While she calculates, chat about what you'd like the reading to lean into, such as love, career or a decision you're weighing. 4. **Read your chart.** Your chart wheel, placements and written reading land on the page, with the share card and PDF to download. ### What you get - Your chart wheel, with every planet at its degree - Your Sun, Moon and rising signs - A written reading: personality, love, work and growth - A shareable card of your big three ### Who it's for - **The astrology curious.** People who know their Sun sign and want to see their Moon, rising and the rest of the chart. - **Gift givers.** Friends and partners who want a personal, printable reading as a birthday surprise. - **Couples and friends.** People who run their charts side by side for a fun conversation over dinner. - **Writers.** Novelists who build a character's personality by drafting a birth chart for them. - **Journalers.** Anyone who likes a reflective prompt about work, love and growth to write against. ### Ideas to try - July 14, 1990 at 8:30 in Lisbon, Portugal - March 3, 1985 at 11:45 pm in Austin, Texas - October 21, 2001, birth time unknown, in Lagos, Nigeria - December 25, 1978 at 6:10 am in Manila, Philippines - May 9, 1996 at 2:20 pm in Toronto, Canada - August 30, 1969 at 4:05 am in Glasgow, Scotland - February 14, 2004 at 7:50 pm in Melbourne, Australia ### On your own or with Emma - **Getting the positions.** On your own: Hunt down a chart calculator and decode a table of glyphs and degrees. With Emma: Emma calculates all ten placements, Sun to Pluto, with sign, house and retrograde. - **Time zones.** On your own: Work out the UTC offset and daylight saving for your birthplace on that date. With Emma: Emma works out the offset for your birthplace and shows the assumptions she used. - **Understanding it.** On your own: Read generic sign descriptions that don't connect to each other. With Emma: A written reading built from your own placements, in plain language. - **Sharing it.** On your own: Screenshot a cluttered chart. With Emma: A shareable card of your big three and a PDF of the reading. ### Tips - Use the time on your birth certificate if you can. The rising sign can change within a couple of hours. - Type the town or city, not just the country. The location sets the time zone and the rising sign. - If you only know roughly when you were born, mark the time as unknown rather than guessing. - Tell Emma one thing you'd like the reading to speak to. It makes the writing more specific. - Check the assumptions line on the result to see the coordinates and time offset used. ### Try it free The free try gives you the chart wheel with every placement and a written reading. The shareable big three card and a PDF of your reading come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial gives you the chart wheel and the written reading. The shareable card and a PDF of your reading come with an account and credits. **How accurate is the chart?** Positions are calculated with standard astronomical formulas, close enough for signs, but a planet within a degree of a sign line can land either side. Your rising sign depends on your exact birth time and time zone, so it's left out if you don't know the time. **Is astrology real?** We frame it as entertainment. The planet positions are real astronomy; what they mean about you is tradition, not science, and nothing here is advice. **What do I need for a birth chart reading?** Your birth date, your birth time and the town or city you were born in. The time is optional, but without it there's no rising sign or houses. **How do I find my rising sign?** Your rising sign depends on your exact birth time and place. Enter both and Emma calculates it, along with your midheaven. **What zodiac and house system does it use?** The tropical zodiac with whole-sign houses. The result shows a one-line note on how the positions were calculated. **Does it show retrograde planets?** Yes. Each of the ten placements, Sun to Pluto, shows its sign, its house when the time is known and whether it was retrograde. **Will the reading predict my future?** No. It describes personality, love, work and growth themes for fun. It never predicts health, money or specific events, and nothing in it is advice. **Can I make a birth chart reading for someone else?** Yes, as long as you know their birth date and place. It makes a thoughtful gift, especially with the share card and PDF. **How long is the written reading?** A few hundred words in four to six short sections, written in the second person from your own placements. Ask Emma afterwards to go deeper on any part. --- ## Budget Grocery Planner https://supercool.com/use/budget-grocery-planner **A week of meals and the grocery list, on your budget.** Set your weekly budget, where you shop and who's eating. Your AI agent plans seven days of meals and a grocery list by aisle, with every price marked as an estimate. Feeding a household on a set amount is a weekly puzzle: what to cook, what to buy, and whether it all fits. The Budget Grocery Planner hands that puzzle to Emma, your SuperCool AI agent. Give her your weekly budget, where you shop, how many people are eating and any diet, and she plans seven days of breakfasts, lunches and dinners around it. Meals reuse ingredients so less goes to waste, and the grocery list comes sorted by aisle with quantities and an estimated price for each item. The estimated total is added up and kept under your budget with a little room to spare. Prices are estimates of typical prices where you shop, not live store prices. With an account you also get prep-day steps and a printable list. ### How it works 1. **Write your weekly budget.** Tap the big number on the chalkboard, type your budget and pick the currency: USD, EUR, GBP, CAD, AUD or INR. 2. **Say where you shop and who's eating.** Under Shopping at, type a store, a city or both. Add or remove people, and tap any diet tags like Vegetarian, Gluten-free or Kid-friendly. 3. **Press Plan my week.** Emma starts planning. Tell her in the chat what you like to cook, how much time you have on weeknights and what's already in your pantry. 4. **Shop from the list.** The week's meals and the list by aisle land on the page. Tap items into your basket as you shop and watch the estimated total. ### What you get - Seven days of breakfasts, lunches and dinners - A grocery list sorted by aisle - Estimated prices and a running basket total - Prep-day steps to cook ahead ### Who it's for - **Families on a tight budget.** Plan a week of kid-friendly meals for four that stays under a set amount. - **Students and people cooking for one.** Get cheap, simple meals from the nearest discount store, sized for one. - **Meal preppers.** Use the prep-day steps to cook ahead on the weekend and keep weeknights easy. - **People with a diet to follow.** Plan vegetarian, vegan, halal, gluten-free, dairy-free or low-carb weeks without starting from scratch. - **Anyone trying to waste less.** Meals share ingredients, so the herbs you buy for Monday get used up later in the week. ### Ideas to try - $120 a week, Aldi in Columbus, Ohio, 4 people, Vegetarian - £60 a week, Tesco in Manchester, 2 people, no restrictions - $75 a week, Walmart near Phoenix, 1 person, Low-carb - €90 a week, the farmers' market and a Lidl in Lyon, 3 people, Dairy-free - C$180 a week, No Frills in Toronto, 5 people, Kid-friendly - ₹3,000 a week, the local market in Pune, 2 people, Vegetarian - A$150 a week, Coles in Brisbane, 4 people, Halal and Kid-friendly ### On your own or with Emma - **Planning meals.** On your own: Scroll recipes and hope they share ingredients. With Emma: Seven days of meals planned together, reusing ingredients across the week. - **The list.** On your own: Write it from memory and zigzag around the store. With Emma: A list sorted by aisle, with quantities sized for your household. - **Staying on budget.** On your own: Find out at the checkout. With Emma: An estimated price per item and an estimated total kept under your budget. - **Weeknight cooking.** On your own: Start from scratch every night. With Emma: With an account, prep-day steps to cook ahead. ### Tips - Name the actual store if you can. Estimates for a discount grocer differ from a premium one. - Tell Emma what's already in your pantry so she doesn't put it on the list. - Mention how much time you have on weeknights. Quick dinners plan differently from slow weekend cooking. - Keep the bit of room left in the budget for price differences at the shelf. - If the budget is very tight, ask Emma which meals to swap to save more. ### Try it free The free try plans the week's meals and the grocery list by aisle, with estimated prices and an estimated total. Prep-day steps and a printable one-page list come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial plans the week's meals and the grocery list with estimated prices. Prep-day steps and a printable list come with an account and credits. **Are the prices real store prices?** No. They're estimates of typical prices where you shop, clearly marked as estimates. Store prices and sales vary, so check the shelf; the plan leaves some room in your budget for that. **Can it handle allergies?** It plans around the diets you pick and anything you tell it in the chat. For serious allergies, always check ingredient labels yourself. **How do I plan meals on a budget?** Set a weekly amount, plan meals that share ingredients, shop from a list and cook ahead. The Budget Grocery Planner does the planning for you: a week of meals, a list by aisle and an estimated total under your budget. **What if my budget is too low for the week?** Emma swaps in cheaper meals to stay under it. If the budget truly can't cover the week for your household, she says so plainly in the ways to save. **Can I pick more than one diet?** Yes. Tap as many diet tags as you need, for example Vegan and Gluten-free, or leave it on Anything. **How many people can it plan for?** From 1 to 10 people on the page. Quantities on the list are sized for the household you set. **Does it work outside the US?** Yes. Pick USD, EUR, GBP, CAD, AUD or INR and type where you shop. Prices are estimated for that area and store. **Can I print the grocery list?** With an account. The full version makes a one-page printable list with check boxes by aisle and the week's meals in a small table. **Is it a nutrition plan?** No. This budget grocery planner plans affordable meals around the diet you pick. For medical or nutritional needs, follow your doctor's or dietitian's advice. --- ## Complaint Letter Writer https://supercool.com/use/complaint-letter-writer **A firm complaint letter that gets taken seriously.** Say what happened, which company and what you want. Your AI agent writes a calm, firm, professional letter with a clear ask and a deadline, while you chat with it. A good complaint letter is calm, specific and hard to ignore. This complaint letter writer turns your story into exactly that. Type the company, say what happened in your own words and press the keys for what you want, from a refund to cancelling your account. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes a firm, professional letter with the facts in order, a clear ask and a reasonable deadline. She uses only what you tell her. Anything she needs but doesn't have, like an order number or your address, stays as a highlighted spot for you to fill in. With an account you also get a short follow-up email for when they go quiet, realistic escalation steps and the letter as PDF and Word files. It's a well-written letter, not legal advice. ### How it works 1. **Type the company.** Type who the letter is to on the typewriter sheet, like the airline, the store or your internet provider. 2. **Say what happened and what you want.** Describe what went wrong in plain words; dates, amounts and names help. Then press Refund, Repair or fix, Replacement, Apology, Compensation or Cancel my account. 3. **Write my letter, then chat.** Press Write my letter. Emma may ask for your order number, the dates and your name. Tell her in the chat and she fills the spots. 4. **Copy it or download it.** The letter lands on letterhead with any blanks highlighted. Copy it into an email, or with an account download the PDF or Word file. ### What you get - A firm, professional letter with a clear ask - The facts laid out in order, with a deadline - A follow-up email if they don't reply - Where to escalate if they still won't fix it ### Who it's for - **Shoppers with a faulty product.** Ask a store or manufacturer for a refund, repair or replacement without sounding angry or vague. - **Travelers.** Write to an airline, hotel or rental company about a cancellation, a lost bag or a room that wasn't as booked. - **Tenants and homeowners.** Put a complaint to a landlord, contractor or utility in writing, with a clear deadline. - **Anyone billed wrongly.** Dispute a double charge, or get an account cancelled when support stops replying. - **Family helpers.** Help a parent or older relative set out a complaint clearly and politely. ### Ideas to try - The appliance store: my new fridge stopped cooling after 3 weeks and two repair visits were no-shows. Replacement. - My gym: I cancelled in writing in January and they've charged me for three more months. Refund and Cancel my account. - The airline: our flight was cancelled and they refused to rebook us for two days, so we paid for a hotel. Compensation. - A furniture store: the sofa arrived with a torn cushion and they keep rescheduling the pickup. Replacement. - My phone carrier: I was charged twice for March and support stopped replying after two emails. Refund. - A moving company: they broke a mirror and a lamp and haven't answered my claim in a month. Compensation and Apology. - My building's property manager: the heating has been out for ten days in January. Repair or fix. ### On your own or with Emma - **Tone.** On your own: Easy to sound furious, or too soft to be taken seriously. With Emma: Calm, firm and professional, with no threats, insults or exaggeration. - **Structure.** On your own: Facts scattered across a long, emotional email. With Emma: A clear subject line, the facts in order, the remedy you want and a deadline. - **Details.** On your own: Tempting to guess at dates or numbers you don't have handy. With Emma: Only your facts. Anything missing is a highlighted spot for you to fill. - **If they don't reply.** On your own: Starting over, unsure where to go next. With Emma: With an account, a follow-up email and 3 to 4 realistic escalation steps. ### Tips - Include dates, amounts and the names of anyone you spoke to. Specific facts make a stronger letter. - Press only the outcomes you'd accept. One clear ask is easier to say yes to than five. - Mention receipts, photos or emails you have; the letter can list them as enclosures to attach. - Fill every highlighted spot before you send, and keep a copy for yourself. - Send it in writing, by email or post, so there's a record of when they got it. ### Try it free The free try writes the full complaint letter, ready to copy. The follow-up email, the escalation steps and the PDF and Word files come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial writes the letter. The follow-up email, the escalation steps and the PDF and Word files come with an account and credits. **Will it make up details like order numbers?** No. It uses only what you tell it. Anything it needs but doesn't know, like an order number or your address, is left as a highlighted spot for you to fill in. **Is this legal advice?** No. It's a well-written letter, not legal advice. If a lot of money or your rights are at stake, talk to a consumer protection office or a lawyer where you live. **How do I write a complaint letter that gets results?** Stay calm, put the facts in order, ask for one specific remedy and give a deadline. That's the shape Emma uses, with 14 days as the usual deadline unless your situation is urgent. **Who is the letter addressed to?** The company's customer service or complaints team, with today's date and a clear subject line. If you have a named contact, tell Emma in the chat. **What if I'm not sure what to ask for?** Leave the keys unpressed. The letter then asks for a fair resolution instead of a specific remedy. **Can I send it by email?** Yes. Copy the letter into an email; the subject line is already written. With an account you can also attach the PDF. **What if the company ignores my complaint?** With an account, Emma writes a short follow-up email and escalation steps, such as the company's formal complaints process, a chargeback if you paid by card, or small claims. She won't invent laws, case numbers or contact details. **Does the complaint letter writer work outside the US?** The letter itself works for any company. For escalation, Emma names a consumer protection body or ombudsman for your country only when she's sure of its name. --- ## Home Value Estimate https://supercool.com/use/home-value-estimate **What's your home worth? A range from real recent sales.** Type an address. Your AI agent finds recent comparable sales nearby and estimates a price range, showing each sale's date and source and the math behind it. A price with no sources behind it is hard to trust. This one shows its work. Type an address, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, looks up recent comparable sales nearby, homes of similar size and type sold in the last year, and builds a home value estimate from them: a low, likely and high price. Every comp comes with its sale price, sale date, size, distance and source, pinned on a map around your home. The range is computed from the comps' price per square foot, and the method is written out so you can check the math. You also get caveats and a short listing description. It's an estimate from public sales data, not an appraisal. ### How it works 1. **Type the address.** Write the full street address on the brochure cover under What's it worth?. Add the home's size on the optional line, such as 3 bed, 2 bath, 1,650 sq ft. 2. **Press Estimate my home.** Emma looks up the home's facts and recent nearby sales, then picks the closest matches in size, type and distance. 3. **Tell her about the house.** While she works, she asks about condition and recent upgrades. Mention a new roof or a dated kitchen, and she factors it into the caveats. 4. **Check the range and comps.** A price bar with low, likely and high lands on the page, with each comp as a pin and a card showing its date and source. ### What you get - An estimated price range with the math shown - Recent comparable sales with dates and sources - The comps pinned around your home - A listing description, ready to use ### Who it's for - **Homeowners thinking of selling.** People who want a grounded starting number before they call an agent. - **Buyers.** House hunters checking whether an asking price lines up with what similar homes nearby sold for. - **Refinancers.** Owners who want a rough sense of value before talking to a lender. - **Curious neighbors.** People who want to know what nearby homes have sold for lately. - **Landlords and investors.** Owners keeping an eye on a rental's value with sources they can check. ### Ideas to try - 1428 Elm Street, Springfield, IL 62704, 3 bed, 2 bath, 1,650 sq ft - 88 Harbor View Rd, Portland, ME - 2210 W 38th Ave, Denver, CO 80211, 2 bed, 1 bath bungalow - 415 Magnolia Dr, Raleigh, NC 27607, 4 bed, 3 bath, 2,400 sq ft - 7 Birch Lane, Ann Arbor, MI 48104, 3 bed ranch, about 1,400 sq ft - 1902 E Pine St, Seattle, WA 98122, 2 bed condo, 980 sq ft ### On your own or with Emma - **Finding comps.** On your own: Scroll sold listings, filter by date and size, and copy numbers into a spreadsheet. With Emma: Emma finds comparable homes sold nearby in the last 12 months and picks the closest matches. - **Doing the math.** On your own: Work out price per square foot and a fair range by hand. With Emma: Price per square foot, the median and a range from the comps, computed and explained. - **Checking sources.** On your own: Lose track of where each number came from. With Emma: Each comp shows its sale date and source, with a link when there is one. - **Seeing it.** On your own: Picture where the comps are. With Emma: The comps pinned on a map around your home. - **Next step.** On your own: Write a listing description from scratch. With Emma: A short listing description, ready to use. ### Tips - Use the full address with city and ZIP code so the right neighborhood gets searched. - Add beds, baths and square feet if you know them. The likely price is built on square footage. - Tell Emma about condition and upgrades. The comps can't see inside your home. - Click through a comp's source if one looks out of place, and ask Emma to drop it. - Treat the range as a starting point for a conversation with a local agent or appraiser. ### Try it free The free try estimates a price range from three cited recent sales near the address. More comps and a listing description come with an account and credits. ### Questions **What do I get if I try it free?** The free trial estimates a range from 3 cited recent sales. More comps and a listing description come with an account and credits. **Is this an appraisal?** No. It's an estimate from public sales data, with every comp and its source shown so you can check it. It can't see the inside of your home. For a loan, a sale price or a legal matter, get a licensed appraiser or a local agent. **Where do the sales come from?** Your agent looks up recent sold-home records and public listing pages near the address and cites each one with its sale date. If it can't find enough nearby sales, it says so rather than guessing. **How accurate is an online home value estimate?** It's only as good as the nearby sales it's built on. This one shows every comp, its date and source, and the math, so you can judge it yourself. It can't account for the inside of your home. **What is a comparable sale?** A nearby home of similar size and type that sold recently. Here Emma looks for homes sold within about a mile in the last 12 months. **How is the price range calculated?** From the comps' price per square foot: the likely value is the median times your home's square footage, and the low and high come from the middle spread of the comps. The method is written out on the result. **What if there aren't enough recent sales nearby?** Emma says so instead of guessing. With fewer than three real comps, you get a wider range or no range at all. **Do I need to know my square footage?** No, but it helps. Without it, Emma looks up the home's facts or, if she can't find the size, bases the range on the comps' prices and notes that in the method. **Can I use this home value estimate to set a listing price?** Use it as a starting point. For a sale price, a loan or a legal matter, talk to a licensed appraiser or a local real estate agent. **Can I check a home I don't own?** Yes. It uses public sales data around any address you type. --- ## Trip Itinerary Planner https://supercool.com/use/trip-itinerary-planner **Your whole trip, planned day by day and mapped.** Say where you're going, when, how you like to travel and your budget. Your AI agent plans each day from morning to night and pins every stop on a map. Planning a trip usually means too many tabs: what to see, where to eat, and how far everything is from everything else. Fill in the boarding pass with where you're going, when, how you like to travel and your budget, and Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, plans every day of the trip from morning to night. Each day gets a theme and an area, with four to six stops grouped so they're walkable or a short ride apart. Every stop has a time, what to do there, an estimated cost and a tip, and it's pinned on the day's map with a link to the route in Google Maps. It's a trip itinerary planner that hands you a rough daily budget too. ### How it works 1. **Fill in the boarding pass.** Type where you're going as the Destination and your Dates, like May 12 to 16 or 5 days in October. 2. **Stamp your travel style and pick a class.** Tap Food, Culture, Outdoors, Nightlife, Slow & relaxed or With kids, then choose Shoestring, Comfort or Treat yourself. 3. **Press Plan my trip.** Emma starts planning. Tell her in the chat who's going, where you're staying and anything you've already booked or must see. 4. **Explore your days.** Your itinerary lands as a stamp per day with a fold-out map. Tap a stop's number to pin it, or open the day's route in Google Maps. ### What you get - A day-by-day itinerary, morning to night - Each day's stops on a map, with the route in Google Maps - Estimated costs and a daily budget - A packing list and a book-ahead checklist ### Who it's for - **First-time visitors.** Get a sensible day-by-day shape for a city you've never seen. - **Families.** Stamp With kids for days planned around traveling with children. - **Food lovers.** Build the whole trip around markets, street food and restaurants. - **Couples.** Plan a slow, relaxed anniversary trip or a treat-yourself weekend. - **Backpackers.** Stretch a shoestring budget with hostels and street food. - **Multi-city travelers.** Plan two cities, like Tokyo and Kyoto, in one itinerary. ### Ideas to try - Lisbon, May 12 to 16, Food and Culture, Comfort - Tokyo & Kyoto, 7 days in April, Food, Culture and Nightlife, Comfort - Mexico City, a long weekend in March, Food, Shoestring - The Amalfi Coast, 5 days in September, Slow & relaxed, Treat yourself - Banff, 4 days in July, Outdoors and With kids, Comfort - Barcelona, 3 days in October, Nightlife and Food, Shoestring - Edinburgh, a long weekend in December, Culture, Comfort ### On your own or with Emma - **Research.** On your own: Read blogs and lists, then try to fit it all in. With Emma: Plans each day around your style and budget, using real named places. - **Getting around.** On your own: Plot spots on a map and realize they're across town from each other. With Emma: Groups each day's stops in one or two neighboring areas and maps them. - **Budget.** On your own: Add it all up after you're home. With Emma: An estimated cost for each stop and a rough daily budget, labelled as estimates. - **Prep.** On your own: Remember to book the popular thing after it sells out. With Emma: With an account, a book-ahead checklist with when to book, plus a packing list for the place and season. ### Tips - Give exact dates if you have them, so the plan has one day per date. Without a length, Emma assumes 4 days. - Tell Emma where you're staying so the days start nearby. - Mention anything already booked, like a show or a tour, so she plans around it. - Stamp two or three travel styles rather than all six for a more focused plan. - Map pins are approximate, so confirm each address before you set off. ### Try it free The free try plans your whole itinerary, day by day, with every stop on the map and a rough daily budget. The packing list, book-ahead checklist and a PDF of the trip come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial plans your whole itinerary with its map. The packing list, booking checklist and a PDF of the trip come with an account and credits. **Are the opening hours and prices up to date?** They're estimates from what your agent knows, not live data, so check hours, prices and bookings before you go. Ask your agent to look up anything you want confirmed. **Does it book anything for me?** No. It plans the trip and tells you what to book ahead and when; you book it yourself. **How do I plan a trip itinerary?** Pick your dates and must-dos, then group everything else by neighborhood, one day at a time. The trip itinerary planner does that for you from your destination, dates, style and budget, and maps each day. **Can it plan a multi-city trip?** Yes. Type more than one place, like Tokyo & Kyoto, and tell Emma in the chat how many days you want in each. **Will it plan a trip with kids?** Yes. Stamp With kids and Emma plans days that suit traveling with children. Tell her their ages in the chat. **What currency are the costs in?** Costs are rough estimates in the local currency of where you're going. **Are the places real?** Emma plans with real named places only and doesn't invent venues. Places close and change, so check each one before you go. **Can I get the itinerary as a PDF?** With an account. The full version makes a PDF with a page per day, the stops, the packing list and the booking checklist. **Can I change a day after it's planned?** Yes. Ask Emma in the chat to swap a stop, add a slower day or move things around. --- ## Workout & Meal Plan https://supercool.com/use/workout-and-meal-plan **A 4-week workout plan and meal plan, written for your goal.** Pick your goal, how often you can train and what you've got to work with. Your AI agent writes a progressive 4-week plan, what to eat alongside it and a tracker you can print. Generic programs assume a gym you don't have and a schedule you can't keep. This workout and meal plan starts from your real week: your goal, how many days you can train, the equipment you have and how you eat. Emma, your SuperCool AI agent, writes a progressive 4-week training plan built around exactly that, with every session set by set. Each session has a short warm-up and four to six exercises with sets, reps and rest, plus clear rules for progressing from week one to week four. Alongside it you get three sample meal days for your diet with estimated calories and protein, a grocery list, and a printable tracker PDF to tick off sets and log weights. It's general fitness guidance, not medical advice. ### How it works 1. **Circle your goal.** Pick a goal on the whiteboard, such as Lose fat, Build muscle, Get stronger, Run farther, Move better or Get fit again, or write your own. 2. **Set your week, kit and diet.** Tap the tally marks for Days a week, choose your Kit and your Diet, then press Write my plan. 3. **Tell Emma about you.** While she writes, she asks about your experience, any injuries or moves you can't do, and how long each session can be, and adjusts the plan. 4. **Get your board.** The plan lands on the page as its own board, week by week, with the meal days, grocery list and the tracker PDF to print. ### What you get - A 4-week training plan, every session set by set - How to progress week to week - A meal plan to match your diet, with estimated calories and protein - A grocery list to copy - A printable tracker PDF ### Who it's for - **Beginners.** People starting out who want a clear plan with sensible loads instead of guessing. - **Home trainers.** Anyone with dumbbells, bands or just their bodyweight who wants a plan that fits that kit. - **People coming back.** Those returning after a break who want to get fit again at a steady pace. - **Event goals.** People training toward a date, such as a first 10k or a wedding. - **Plant-based eaters.** Vegetarians and vegans who want meals that match their training. - **Busy parents.** People with two or three free slots a week who need every session to count. ### Ideas to try - Run my first 10k by June, 3 days a week, Bodyweight only, Eat anything - Drop 15 lb before the wedding, 4 days a week, Full gym, High protein - Do 10 pull-ups, 3 days a week, Full gym, Vegetarian - Feel strong at 50, 2 days a week, Dumbbells at home, Eat anything - Build muscle, 5 days a week, Full gym, Vegan - Get fit again after a long break, 3 days a week, Bands & a kettlebell, Dairy-free - Move better and touch my toes again, 2 days a week, Bodyweight only, Low carb ### On your own or with Emma - **Fitting your week.** On your own: Bend a template written for someone else's schedule. With Emma: Exactly your days per week, using only the equipment you have. - **Progression.** On your own: Guess when to add reps or weight. With Emma: Clear rules for progressing each week, with week four possibly a lighter deload. - **Food.** On your own: Find recipes and estimate macros separately. With Emma: Three sample meal days for your diet with estimated calories and protein, plus a grocery list. - **Tracking.** On your own: Build a spreadsheet or use the notes app. With Emma: A printable tracker with a tick box per set and a column for the weight used. ### Tips - Be honest about days per week. A plan you can keep beats an ambitious one you skip. - Write your own goal if the circled ones are too broad. Do 10 pull-ups gives Emma something specific to aim at. - Tell Emma about injuries or moves you can't do, and she leaves them out. - Pick the kit you actually have this month, not the gym you plan to join. - Log the weight you use each set on the tracker. It makes the progression rules easy to follow. ### Try it free The free try writes week one of your plan, every session with exercises, sets, reps and rest, plus the warm-ups and progression rules. All four weeks, the meal plan and the printable tracker come with an account and credits. ### Questions **Is it free?** You can try it free: the free trial writes week one of your plan. All four weeks, the meal plan and the printable tracker come with an account and credits. **Is this medical or nutrition advice?** No. It's general fitness guidance, and calories and protein are estimates. If you have an injury, a health condition or you're pregnant, check with a doctor before starting. **Can I change the plan?** Yes. Ask your agent to swap an exercise, move a day, make it shorter or adjust the meals, and it rewrites that part. **Can AI make a workout and meal plan for me?** Yes. Give Emma your goal, days per week, equipment and diet, and she writes a 4-week training plan, sample meal days with estimated calories and protein, a grocery list and a printable tracker. **Does it tell me how much weight to lift?** No. It uses reps and effort ratings instead of exact weights, since it can't know your strength. You log the weights you use on the tracker. **Can I do the workout plan at home?** Yes. Choose Dumbbells at home, Bodyweight only, or Bands & a kettlebell as your kit, and every exercise uses only that. **How many days a week can I train?** Pick two to six. Every week of the plan has exactly that many training days. **Are the calorie numbers exact?** No. Calories and protein are round estimates to guide you, not a prescription. **Is it suitable for beginners?** Yes. It uses sensible beginner-friendly loads, and the plan includes a line on form and when to stop. If you have an injury, a health condition or you're pregnant, check with a doctor first. **What diets does the meal plan support?** Eat anything, Vegetarian, Vegan, High protein, Low carb or Dairy-free. Ask Emma in the chat if you need something else.